Human Genetics - 5th PDF

mebooksfree.
com
HUMAN GENETICS
mebooksfree.com
This page intentionally left blank
mebooksfree.com
HUMAN
GENETICS
FIFTH EDITION
SD Gangane, MBBS, MS (ANATOMY), FAIMS

Professor and Head
Department of Anatomy
Terna Medical College, Nerul
Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra, India
Ex-Professor and Head
Genetic Division and
Grant Medical College
Mumbai, Maharashtra
Ex-Professor and Head
RCSM Government Medical College
Kolhapur, Maharashtra
mebooksfree.com
RELX India Pvt. Ltd.
Registered Office: 818, 8th Floor, Indraprakash Building, 21, Barakhamba Road,
New Delhi-110 001
Corporate Office: 14th Floor, Building No. 10B, DLF Cyber City, Phase II, Gurgaon-122 002,
Haryana, India
Human Genetics, 5e, SD Gangane

Copyright © 2017, 2012, 2008, 2000, 1992 by RELX India. Pvt. Ltd.
All rights reserved.
ISBN: 978-81-312-4870-6
e-Book ISBN: 978-81-312-4925-3
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or any informa-
tion storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher.
Details on how to seek permission, further information about the Publisher’ permissions
policies and our arrangements with organizations such as the Copyright Clearance
Center and the Copyright Licensing Agency, can be found at our website: www.elsevier.
com/permissions.
This book and the individual contributions contained in it are protected under copyright
by the Publisher (other than as may be noted herein).
Notice
Knowledge and best practice in this field are constantly changing. As new research and
experience broaden our understanding, changes in research methods, professional
practices, or medical treatment may become necessary.
Practitioners and researchers must always rely on their own experience and
knowledge in evaluating and using any information, methods, compounds, or
experiments described herein. In using such information or methods they should be
mindful of their own safety and the safety of others, including parties for whom they
have a professional responsibility.
With respect to any drug or pharmaceutical products identified, readers are ad-
vised to check the most current information provided (i) on procedures featured or
(ii) by the manufacturer of each product to be administered, to verify the recom-
mended dose or formula, the method and duration of administration, and contrain-
dications. It is the responsibility of practitioners, relying on their own experience and
knowledge of their patients, to make diagnoses, to determine dosages and the best
treatment for each individual patient, and to take all appropriate safety precautions.
To the fullest extent of the law, neither the Publisher nor the authors, contribu-
tors, or editors, assume any liability for any injury and/or damage to persons or
property as a matter of product liability, negligence or otherwise, or from any use
or operation of any methods, products, instructions, or ideas contained in the
material herein.
Although all advertising material is expected to conform to ethical (medical)
standards, inclusion in this publication does not constitute a guarantee or endorse-
ment of the quality or value of such product or of the claims made of it by its
manufacturer.
Please consult full prescribing information before issuing prescription for any product mentioned
in this publication.
Manager Content Strategy: Dikshita Khanduja

Manager–Education Solutions (Digital): Smruti Snigdha
Senior Manager–Education Solutions: Shabina Nasim
Sr Content Development Specialist: Goldy Bhatnagar
Project Manager: Nayagi Athmanathan
Sr Operations Manager: Sunil Kumar
Sr Production Executive: Ravinder Sharma
Sr Graphic Designer: Milind Majgaonkar
Typeset by GW India
Printed in India by EIH Printer, Manesar, Haryana
mebooksfree.com
Dedicated to
My Wife
Madhuri
who has been my inspiration and been rendering
unconditional support over past four decades
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com
Preface to the Fifth Edition
“Speed/pace”, is the crux of scientific progress and especially so in

the field of Genetics. Therefore it is inevitable to enter into the fifth
edition of Human Genetics. However in doing so, it is observed that the
book caters to the need of medical undergraduates and does not
increase the burden of superfluous details.
To facilitate easy understanding and revision by a new entrant in
the field, a thorough touch up to each chapter incorporating the
recent advances has been done. In this edition new features such as
learning objectives and key words have been included to further
enhance the utility of this book. The topics on molecular genetics,
chromosomal aberrations, modes of inheritance, population genet-
ics, and genetic counselling have been updated. New figures have
been added and earlier figures have been revised. I sincerely hope
that the students will be benefited with these changes.
In addition, complimentary access to online videos along with
complete e-book is also provided. Suggestions from both the faculty
and students are solicited to enable me to improvise this title in
subsequent editions. With this I humbly submit this edition to the
readers.
SD Gangane
vii
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com
Preface to the First Edition
Human genetics claims a frontline position under the faculty of

medicine. It is duly emphasised if we realise the wide spectrum of
patients referred to this speciality. The medical fraternity is becoming
aware of present day techniques in this rapidly expanding branch of
medicine. The vigilant eye of a family physician can promptly put, the
family at risk, to the care of the geneticist. In fact he serves as a liaison
between the patient, his relatives and the geneticist. It is from this
point of view that “Genetics” forms a part of undergraduate medical
curriculum in most of the universities.
Genetics makes almost a boundless field and every branch of genet-
ics is vast enough to perplex a new entrant to this field. A simple and
concise account elucidating human genetics is therefore highly desired
and always welcome. This book forms a concise version chiefly
designed to cater to the needs of an undergraduate student in a medi-
cal school/college. Schematic representations along with clinical
photographs of patients have been incorporated to simplify and
supplement the text. The subject has been dealt with in 12 chapters.
The first chapter presents historical gleanings followed by other
chapters containing cytogenetics, molecular genetics, biochemical
genetics, immunogenetics and so on. The aim has been to offer basic
principles without superfluous details.
This book has taken its present form with direct or indirect help
from many people. I sincerely thank them. My special thanks to
Mrs. N.N. Bhagat who had been of great help in typing the manuscript,
Dr. A.L. Kulkarni, Associate Professor of Anatomy for his assistance in
preparing the manuscript. I am grateful to Miss Vidya Dicholkar and
Mr. More from Genetic Division, Grant Medical College, Mumbai for
their help in photomicrography and clinical photography.
I am also grateful to Dr. (Mrs.) A.M. Lete, Professor of Anatomy,
Grant Medical College, Mumbai for the constant encouragement
and valued suggestions that I got during the writing of this book.
With this, I humbly submit this book to the readers.
SD Gangane
ix
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com
Acknowledgements
With deep sense of gratitude, I wish to acknowledge the help

rendered by all the members of Genetic Division, Department of
Anatomy, Grant Government Medical College and Sir JJ Group
of Hospitals, Mumbai, Maharashtra, namely Dr Prasad Kulkarni,
Dr Vidya Salaskar, Dr Abeda Khan, Ms Sonal Jagtap, Ms Shailaja
Surve and Mrs Vidya Jadhav. I am also grateful to Dr DS Joshi,
Professor and Head, Department of Anatomy for his valuable sug-
gestions and constant support. I am thankful to Mr Shashi Kudalkar
for the clinical photography.
My special thanks are due to Dr Shabana Borate, Associate Profes-
sor, Genetic Division for her untiring and immense technical help in
organizing all the bits of this book and shaping it into fifth edition.
Lastly, I gratefully acknowledge the help and cooperation re-
ceived from my publisher, RELX India Pvt. Ltd., especially Ganesh
Venkatesan (Director Editorial and Publishing Operations), Shabina
Nasim (Senior Project Manager–Education Solutions), Dikshita Khanduja
(Associate Content Strategist), and Goldy Bhatnagar (Senior Content
Specialist).
xi
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com
Contents
Preface to the Fifth Edition vii
Preface to the First Edition ix
Acknowledgements xi
1 Historical Gleanings 1
2 Cytogenetics 10
3 Molecular Genetics 33
Transcription 42
Translation 43
4 Chromosomal Aberrations 68
5 Developmental Genetics 93
6 Modes of Inheritance 101
7 Biochemical Genetics 124
Haemoglobin Structure 130
8 Genetics of Blood Groups 139
9 Immunogenetics 148
Immunoglobulin Structure 150
10 Cancer Genetics 161
11 Genetic Component in Common Diseases 177
12 Population Genetics 194
13 Prenatal Diagnosis 208
xiii
mebooksfree.com
xiv Contents
14 Genetic Counselling 217
15 Gene Therapy 229
Gene Therapy 230
16 Stem Cell Therapy 239
Stem Cell Therapy 240

Glossary 245
Bibliography 265
Answers 267
Index 279
mebooksfree.com
Historical
Gleanings
At the end of this chapter the students should be able to understand:

• How the science of Genetics evolved?
• Salient events in its evolution chronologically
• Principles of Mendelism
• Recent developments in the field of Genetics
Mendel and Mendelism

. ,'
The concept of heredity dates back

around 6000 years, as evidenced in the
stone engravings from Chaldea in Baby-
lonia in current Iraq. These engravings
depict pedigrees relating to some charac-
teristics in horses. As regards human
heredity, haemophilia (a bleeding disor-
der) was the first genetic disorder known
about 1500 years ago. Until recent times,
however, a proper record of the historical
events, the nature of the hereditary disor-
ders and explanations regarding their
etiology remained largely speculative.
In the third century BC, Aristotle sug- Mendel
gested that semen originates from (Source: Emery's Elements of
blood and has an ability to give life to Medical Genetics, FIGURE 1.1 ,
embryo; embryo is formed in uterus by 2012, Churchill Livingstone.)
coagulation of menstrual blood. This
concept ruled for over 2000 years. In the 17th century, Dutch scien-
tist Regnier de Graaf demonstrated that union of egg (female germ
cell) and sperm (male germ cell) is essential for conception.
1
2 Human Genetics
He described small protuberances on mammalian ovaries, now

called Graafian follicles, containing unfertilised egg. This led to a
thought that the sperm alone is not responsible as a sole hereditary
agent.
Pierre-Louis Moreau de Maupertuis, a French naturalist born in
1698 in France, studied polydactyly (extra digit) and albinism (lack
of pigment). He showed that these two traits were inherited in dif-
ferent ways. He proposed that there were hereditary particles re-
sponsible for the formation of a particular body part. Each body
part was formed by two such particles, one from each parent. One
particle may dominate over the other (recessive). This was much on
the lines of what Mendel propounded a century later. He believed
that both parents contribute equally to their offsprings. He substan-
tiated his claim by animal experiments.
A scientific approach towards genetics came in the latter half of
19th century when Gregor Mendel gave principles of heredity.
Around the same period, in 1859, Charles Darwin postulated in his
“Theory of Evolution” that multiplication of individuals of a given
species is associated with the origin of variations resulting from
recombination and mutation.
MENDEL AND MENDELISM
Our present knowledge of genetics has its roots in Mendelian princi-

ples—that is where we start with. Johann Mendel was born on
22 July 1822 in Heinzendorf in Moravia situated in old time Austria,
now recognised as Czechoslovakia. He adopted the name “Gregor” in
1843 and subsequently became a priest. In 1851, he joined the Univer-
sity of Vienna. Here he was greatly influenced by two scientists—Franz
Unger, a plant physiologist, and Christian Doppler, after whom the
Doppler effect in physics is named. A part of Unger’s teaching course
incorporated plant hybridisation experiments by two German bota-
nists, Kölreuter and Gaertner. In fact Gaertner worked on peas,
the same material that Mendel used about a decade later. Gaertner,
however, could not interpret the results successfully.
In 1853, Mendel went to Brunn where he conducted his experiments
on garden peas (Pisum sativum). He selected seven pairs of contrasting
characters in the garden pea, such as height of plant, shape of pod,
texture of seed, flower position and colour, etc. (Fig. 1.1).
He crossed these varieties of plants considering one pair of
contrasting character. Hybrids thus obtained formed F1 genera-
tion. Plants in this (F1) generation were allowed to undergo self-
pollination. This led to F2 generation. The plants in F1 generation
resembled one of the parents; for example, cross between tall
and dwarf resulted in all tall plants. The characteristics expressed
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 1 — Historical Gleanings 3
Figure 1.1 Seven contrasting characters in garden peas.
in hybrids were called dominant, e.g. tallness. Among the two

characters—tall and dwarf—tallness expressed itself and so was
called a dominant character. The characters that were not mani-
fested in hybrids were referred to as recessive ones. Analysis of F2
generation revealed both types of plants, one expressing dominant
character (tall) and the other expressing recessive character
(dwarf). They occurred in ratio 3 tall:1 dwarf. F2 generation plants
exhibiting recessive character were self-pollinated. This resulted in
F3 generation with all the plants expressing recessive character, i.e.
dwarf. Plants expressing dominant character (tall) in F2 genera-
tion on self-pollination yielded plants of two types. Two-thirds of
them on self-pollination resulted in plants expressing both domi-
nant and recessive characters, i.e. tall and dwarf. Rest one-third on
self-pollination displayed only dominant character. This led to the
mebooksfree.com
4 Human Genetics
Figure 1.2 Progeny of tall and dwarf plant (homozygous) in F1 followed by

self-pollination of F1 giving rise to F2 generation.
conclusion that F2 generation is constituted by 1:2:1 ratio of plants,

the analysis being based on the type of offsprings they produce.
Let us assume two contrasting characters, tall represented by
letter “T” and dwarf by letter “t”. The former represents a dominant
character, while the latter is recessive. The result of their progeny
in successive generations is shown in Fig. 1.2.
Mendel’s Laws
On the analysis of progeny of generations in garden pea, Mendel
propounded his concepts that came to be recognised as Mendel’s
Laws:
1. Law of Unit Inheritance
Under modern teaching in genetics, this concept is hardly
stressed. In pre-Mendelian era, concept about inheritance was
that the characteristics of the parents blend in the offsprings.
Mendel, for the first time, offered a new concept that charac-
ters do not blend; if they do not express in the first generation,
they can reappear without change in the subsequent genera-
tion. For example, we have seen that the cross between tall and
dwarf plants led to F1 generation having all tall plants. The
dwarfness reappeared in F2 generation. There was no blending
of characters like tall 1 dwarf 5 medium sized plant.
2. Law of Segregation
This law states that the members of a gene pair segregate and pass
to different gametes. They are never found in the same gamete,
except in the event of non-disjunction, i.e. when members of
chromosome pair fail to separate (Fig. 1.3). This law applies to
the genes on homologous chromosomes, and disjunction of
mebooksfree.com
Figure 1.3 Law of segregation.
paired homologous chromosomes forms the basis of the law of

segregation.
3. Law of Independent Assortment
It states that the members of different gene pairs assort indepen-
dently of one another during gametogenesis. The law of inde-
pendent assortment applies to the behaviour of non-homologous
chromosomes in the meiosis. The genes located on these non-
homologous chromosomes (i.e. genes that are not linked) un-
dergo independent assortment. Random assortment of maternal
and paternal chromosomes forms a physical basis of the law of
independent assortment (Fig. 1.4).
Figure 1.4 Law of independent assortment.
mebooksfree.com
6 Human Genetics
Mendel presented the results of his work in 1865 before the Natu-
ral History Society of Brunn. In the subsequent year, it was
published in the Transactions of the Society, not much widely read.
In fact, Mendel’s work remained buried in the pages of history
till the turn of the century, for almost 35 years. In 1900, Mendel-
ism was rediscovered by three botanists independently, namely
Professor Hugo de Vries from Amsterdam, C Correns from
Tübingen, and Erich von Tschermak, an agricultural assistant
from Esslingen near Vienna. It is unfortunate that Mendel’s
work saw the light of the day 16 years after his death. Mendel
died of Bright disease in 1884.
MILESTONES IN THE DEVELOPMENT

OF GENETICS
Karl Landsteiner discovered ABO blood groups in the year 1900.
Walter S. Sutton and Theodor Boveri independently proposed chro-
mosomal theory of heredity in 1903. In 1902 William Bateson,
a strong proponent of Mendelism, coined the term “Genetics”.
A Danish botanist, Johannsen, introduced the term “Gene” in 1909.
The first example of Mendelian inheritance in man was reported
in 1902 by Garrod. It was a case of alkaptonuria. A few years later in
1908, Garrod coined up his concept of “Inborn errors of metabo-
lism”. Bridges (1916) demonstrated that genes are sequences of
nucleotides and they are oriented in a linear fashion on chromo-
somes. This was the beginning of cytogenetics. In 1927, Muller
showed that X-ray exposure increases the mutation rate. The effect
of certain other extraneous factors is also similar. They include ul-
traviolet (UV) rays, cosmic rays, gamma rays, certain drugs and dyes.
The concept of one gene–one enzyme was proposed by Beadle
and Tatum in 1941. Barr and Bertram (1949) demonstrated “Barr
body” in female cat neurons. In 1952, Gerty Cori and Carl Cori dem-
onstrated an enzyme defect in glucose-6-phosphate-dehydrogenase
(G6PD) deficiency, a type of inborn error of metabolism.
The double helical model of DNA molecule was forwarded by
Watson, Crick and Wilkins in 1953, for which they were awarded the
Nobel Prize. A major breakthrough came in 1956 when JH Tjio and
A Levan, and independently Ford and Hamerton demonstrated the
actual number of human chromosome complement as “46”; earlier
it was thought to be 48. This was made possible by improved cytoge-
netic techniques evolved by these scientists.
It was in 1959 that Lejeune and his associates noted for the first
time a chromosomal defect as the reason of Down syndrome. Dur-
ing the same period, a specific chromosomal aberration associated
with cancer was detected by Nowell and Hungerford. This was la-
belled as Philadelphia chromosome. It is found in patients of
mebooksfree.com
chronic myeloid leukaemia. In 1961, Mary F. Lyon proposed the

hypothesis of X chromosome inactivation in female cells. In 1970,
Har Gobind Khorana and his associates succeeded in synthesizing a
gene de novo. It was non-functional, though structurally correct.
But by 1976, Khorana and his colleagues were able to synthesise a
functional artificial gene.
A review of the last three–four decades duly stresses the impor-
tance of genetics, if we consider the names of Nobel Laureates in
physiology and medicine. Here is the list of these legends. In 1962,
Francis Crick, James D. Watson and Maurice Wilkins got the Nobel
Prize for discovering the molecular structure of DNA. Francis Jacob,
J Monod and A Lwoff won the Nobel Prize for their work on regula-
tion of gene in 1965. Deciphering of the genetic code won the
Nobel Prize for Robert Holley, Har Gobind Khorana and Marshall
Nirenberg in 1968. In 1975, R Dulbecco, H Temin and D Baltimore
worked out an interaction between tumour viruses and nuclear
DNA. The discovery of restriction endonucleases won the Nobel
Prize to W Arber, D Nathans and H Smith in 1978. In 1980, B Bena-
cerraf, G Snell and J Dausset explained how genes control an im-
munological response, and they were awarded Nobel Prize for this.
In 1983, Barbara McClintock received Nobel Prize for the discovery
of “Jumping genes” or transposons (mobile genes). The following
discoveries of cell receptors in familial hypercholesterolaemia by
M Brown and J Goldstein (1985), genetic aspects of antibodies by
Tonegawa Susumu (1987), the study of oncogenes by M Bishop and
H Varmus (1987) won them the Nobel. In 1993, Richard Roberts
and Philip Sharp offered the concept of “split genes” for which
they were awarded the Nobel Prize. In 1995 Nobel Prize was
awarded jointly to Edward B. Lewis, Christiane Nüsslein-Volhard
and Eric F. Wieschaus for their discoveries concerning the genetic
control of early embryonic development. In 2002, Sydney Brenner,
H Robert Horvitz and John E. Sulston discovered genetic regula-
tion of organ development and programmed cell death. Andrew Z.
Fire and Craig C. Mello (in 2006) were awarded Nobel Prize jointly
for their discovery of RNA interference—gene silencing by
double-stranded RNA. In 2007, Nobel Prize was awarded jointly
to Mario R. Capecchi, Sir Martin J. Evans and Oliver Smithies for
principles for introducing specific gene modifications in mice by
the use of embryonic stem cells. The Nobel Prize in 2009 was
awarded jointly to Elizabeth H. Blackburn, Carol W. Greider and
Jack W. Szostak for the discovery of how chromosomes are pro-
tected by telomeres and the enzyme telomerase. In 2010, Robert
G. Edwards was conferred Noble Prize for the development of in
vitro fertilization.
Recent advances in the field of genetics chiefly aim at developing
more accurate techniques for early and precise diagnosis of genetic
disorders. Rapidly expanding areas include recombinant DNA
mebooksfree.com
8 Human Genetics
technology, restriction fragment length polymorphisms (RFLPs),

DNA fingerprinting, human genome, whole chromosome paints
(WCPs), fluorescent in situ hybridisation (FISH), gene therapy and
stem cell therapy.
Summary
• Stone engravings from Chaldea in Babylonia (Iraq) depict pedigree of
horse 6000 years ago.
• Haemophilia (bleeding disorder) is known for 1500 years ago.
• 300 BC, Aristotle suggested that semen originates from blood and has
ability to give life to embryo.
• In 17th century, Regnier de Graaf demonstrated that union of egg and
sperm is essential for conception. Mature ovarian follicle is named as
Graafian follicle.
• In 1698, Moreu-de-Maupertuis from France studied polydactyly and albi-
nism. He suggested that traits were inherited through hereditary particles
that are received from the parents.
• Johann Mendel (1822–1884), born on 22nd July 1822, adopted name
“Gregor” in 1843. He joined University of Vienna in 1851. He went to
Brunn in 1853, where he conducted experiments on garden peas (Pisum
sativum). He presented his work in 1865 before the Natural History Soci-
ety of Brunn. He propounded what are recognised as Mendel’s laws of
inheritance—1. Laws of unit inheritance, 2. Law of segregation, 3. Law
of independent assortment.
• In 1900, Karl Landsteiner discovered ABO blood group.
• In 1902, term Genetics was coined by William Bateson.
• In 1902, the first example of Mendelian inheritance was reported by Garrod.
It was a case of Alkaptonuria.
• In 1916, Bridges demonstrated that genes are sequences of nucleotides.
• In 1927, Muller demonstrated mutational effect of X-rays.
• In 1941, Beadle and Tatum gave a concept of one gene–one enzyme.
• In 1949, Barr and Bertram demonstrated “Barr body” in female cat
neurons.
• In 1952, G6PD deficiency was detected by Gerty and Carl Cori.
• In 1953, double helical model of DNA molecule was given by Watson,
Crick and Wilkins.
• In 1956, Lejeune noted 21 trisomy as the chromosomal error in Down
syndrome.
• In 1961, Mary F. Lyon proposed the hypothesis of X inactivation.
• In 1976, Khorana and his associates synthesised functional artificial gene.
• In 1983, Barbara McClintock discovered jumping genes.
• In 1987, Varmus and Bishop studied oncogenes.
• In 1993, concept of split genes was offered by Roberts and Sharp.
• In 1995, Edward B et al. offered concept concerning the genetic control
of early embryonic development.
• In 2002, Sydney Brenner et al. coined the concept of genetic regulation
of organ development and programmed cell death.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
• In 2006, Andrew Z. Fire and Craig C. Mello were awarded Nobel Prize for
their discovery of RNA interference—gene silencing by double-stranded
RNA.
• In 2007, the principles of specific gene modifications by the use of
embryonic stem cells in mice were given by Mario R. Capecchi et al.
• The Nobel Prize in 2010 was awarded to Robert G. Edwards for the
development of in vitro fertilisation.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. Mendel selected following contrasting characters in garden peas except:

a. Height of plant b. Shape of pod
c. Size of seed d. Texture of seed
2. In Mendelian experiment, F2 generation had following phenotypic ratio of
tall and dwarf plants:
a. 2:1:1 b. 1:2:1
c. 1:1:2 d. None of the above
3. Self-pollination of tall heterozygote plants results in progeny exhibiting:
a. All tall homozygotes b. All tall heterozygotes
c. All dwarfs homozygotes d. None of the above
4. What is true about law of segregation?
a. Members of the gene pair segregate and pass to different gametes
b. This law applies to genes on homologous chromosomes
c. The exception to the law is an event of “non-disjunction”
d. All of the above
*See page 267 for Answers.
mebooksfree.com
Cytogenetics
At the end of this chapter the students should be able to understand

• The process of mitosis and meiosis
• Morphology and classification of chromosomes
• Chromosome preparation (Karyotyping)
• Lyon's hypothesis
• Various ways to study chromosomes
Cell cycle, Mitosis, Meiosis, Chromosomes, Sex chromatin, Barr body
Cytogenetics deals mainly with the study of chromosomes and sex

chromatin. Advances in cytogenetics have made it possible to pin-
point the errors in human chromosomes. In this chapter, we shall
deal with the basic facts about chromosomes and the recent tech-
niques for studying this subject.
In eukaryotes, chromosomes reside in the nucleus. An interphase
nucleus has chromosomes in coiled and extended portions. Coiled
portion stains darker and appears in clumps, called heterochromatin
(Fig. 2.1 ), while the extended portion is pale staining and forms
euchromatin. Chromosome number in a particular species is fixed.
The human chromosome complement consists of 46 chromosomes
(23 pairs). This number 46 is called diploid, often designated as 2n.
A haploid number "n" is 23, and it is encountered only in gametes.
Of the total 46, 44 are autosomes (in 22 pairs) and 2 are sex chro-
mosomes. The latter in females are XX and in males are X and Y In
females, of the two X chromosomes, one is rendered inactive to
form Barr body. Its significance is discussed later in this chapter.
The word chromosome is derived as follows: Chroma means colour
and soma means body. As they appear like coloured (stained) rod-
shaped structures, they are called chromosomes. Each chromosome
10
Chapter 2 —฀Cytogenetics 11
Figure 2.1 An interphase cell showing heterochromatin.
(in metaphase) consists of two

chromatids joined together at
centromere (Fig. 2.2). Depending
upon the placement of centro-
mere, chromosomes are classi-
fied into various types. Chromo-
somes have small units of
heredity called genes, which
have specific positions on the
chromosome. This is called
gene locus. Chromosomes are
usually studied in metaphase of Figure 2.2 A chromosome.
mitosis. It will be interesting as
well as essential to note the
details of cell division so as to
understand the role of chromo-
somes during cell division.
A cell that is capable of divi-
sion undergoes a cyclical change
throughout its life; this is called
cell cycle. It consists of an inter-
phase–mitosis–interphase cycle.
Most of the body cells exist and
function in an interphase. An
interphase comprises the fol-
lowing phases: G1 (Gap 1),
S (Synthesis) and G2 (Gap 2).
Gap 1 phase is followed by
S phase. During S phase, DNA is
synthesised. It takes about Figure 2.3 Diagram showing stages
7 hours time. After this, the cell of the “cell cycle”. They are: G1,
enters a brief G2 phase, which resting stage of interphase; S, DNA
takes about half an hour. This is replication; G2, second resting
followed by mitosis (Fig. 2.3). stage; and M, mitosis.
mebooksfree.com
12 Human฀Genetics
MITOSIS
It involves somatic cells. The result of mitosis is two daughter cells

each with a copy of parental genome. During mitosis, both cyto-
plasm and nucleus divide. Cytoplasmic division is relatively a simple
phenomenon, while nuclear division presents a sequence of compli-
cated activities. For the sake of description, mitosis can be divided
into four stages, namely prophase, metaphase, anaphase and telo-
phase (Fig. 2.4).
Prophase
In this phase, the nuclear chromatin organises to form rod-like bod-
ies called chromosomes. Each chromosome seems to be made up of
two thin strands called chromatids. They are joined at the spot
called centromere. Nuclear membrane disappears. Centriole dupli-
cates itself and the two daughter centrioles move towards opposite
poles.
Metaphase
Chromosomes condense further and move towards equatorial
plane of the cell. They form a metaphase plate. Meanwhile micro-
tubules radiate from centrioles to the equatorial plane. They attach
Figure 2.4 Stages of mitosis.
mebooksfree.com
to centromeres of the chromosomes. These microtubules consti-

tute spindle.
Anaphase
In this phase, centromeres divide vertically and the paired chroma-
tids disjoin. They form new daughter chromosomes. The new chro-
mosomes move, one to each pole. The movement of chromosomes
towards a pole is supposed to be by contraction of spindle fibres. At
this stage, an indication of cytoplasmic division appears in the form
of a furrow along the equatorial plane.
Telophase
In this stage, daughter chromosomes have arrived at the poles. This
is followed by cytokinesis, i.e. division of cytoplasm. It is accomplished
by further deepening of the furrow at the equatorial plane of the
cell separating two daughter cells. Each daughter cell bears identi-
cal chromosome complement. Subsequently, chromosomes start
unwinding and show poor staining. Finally, they are no longer visi-
ble as separate entities, but form chromatin network. Concomi-
tantly, there is reconstitution of nuclear membrane. Thus two
daughter cells, each appearing in interphase, are obtained.
Comments
Cell division can be arrested at metaphase by substances like colchi-
cine or its derivatives. Colchicine inhibits spindle microtubule for-
mation. This permits us to study metaphase chromosomes.
In mitosis, two points need elaboration; these are somatic recom-
bination and sister chromatid exchange. Somatic recombination is
crossing over between homologous chromosomes in mitosis. It is less
frequent than recombination in meiosis. This is because, in meiosis,
homologous chromosomes are more closely associated than in mito-
sis, thus offering more chances of meiotic recombination.
Sister chromatid exchange
It involves crossing over between the sister chromatids of a single
chromosome in mitosis. It was first demonstrated in 1957 by Taylor.
Later on in 1973, a special technique was developed by Latt to dem-
onstrate DNA replication in human metaphase chromosome. In this
technique, the cultured cells are allowed to replicate twice in
the presence of bromodeoxyuridine (BUdR). This allows incorpora-
tion of BUdR in newly synthesised DNA. It replaces thymine. The
incorporation of BUdR alters staining characteristics of chromatids.
The chromatid containing BUdR stains with fluorescent stain
mebooksfree.com
14 Human฀Genetics
(Hoechst 33258). Bright and dim fluorescence pattern along chro-

matids signifies occurrence of sister chromatid exchange. In some
genetic disorders like Bloom syndrome, frequency of sister chroma-
tid exchanges is greatly increased.
MEIOSIS
This is a special type of cell division that occurs in gonads and results
in formation of gametes. It consists of two divisions, often called
meiosis I (reduction division) and meiosis II (similar to mitosis).
Each daughter cell at the end of meiosis I contains haploid chromo-
some complement (23 chromosomes). This haploid number is
maintained thereafter in (meiosis II) gametes. It is in contrast to
mitosis in which diploid number is maintained in daughter cells.
Meiosis I (Reduction Division) (Fig.฀2.5)

Prophase I
It is much prolonged in contrast with mitotic prophase. It consists
of the following stages:
Leptotene
In this, chromosomes appear as thin thread-like structures. The
chromosome threads start condensing, as a result they show alter-
nate thick and thin portions. This gives them a beaded appearance.
These beads are called chromomeres.
Zygotene
The homologous chromosomes pair during this stage. Two mem-
bers of the homologous pair lie parallel and show point-to-point
pairing. Together these chromosomes are called bivalents. The pair-
ing of homologous chromosomes occurs only in meiosis and not in
mitosis. In sex chromosomes, pairing involves only small segments,
the tips of their short arms.
Pachytene
The chromosomes become more tightly coiled and stain deeply.
Each chromosome now appears to be made up of two chromatids.
Thus, each bivalent (homologous chromosome pair) is constituted
of four strands, hence called tetrad. The strands of tetrad show cross-
ing at places.
Diplotene
This stage is characterised by longitudinal separation of the mem-
bers of bivalent, without split in centromere. The two chromatids of
mebooksfree.com
Figure 2.5 Chromosomal behaviour in meiosis. Only two pairs of chromo-

somes are shown. Chromosomes of one parent are shown in purple and
those of other in outline. Note crossing over and exchange of material in
diplotene and subsequent stages.
mebooksfree.com
16 Human฀Genetics
each chromosome remain together. Chiasmata mark the sites of

crossing over between chromatids, where exchange of material has
occurred. Subsequently chiasmata break off.
Diakinesis
The chromosomes condense further and stain more deeply. This
marks the last stage of prophase.
Metaphase I
It begins when the nuclear membrane disappears. Chromosomes
move to the equatorial plane of the cell.
Anaphase I
Two members of bivalent (homologous pair) disjoin. At this stage,
there is random assortment of maternal and paternal chromosomes.
One chromosome from bivalent pair goes to each pole. Chiasmata
formation and random assortment of maternal and paternal chro-
mosomes forms physical basis of Mendelian law of independent
assortment.
Telophase I
Cytoplasmic division is done in this phase. In 1974, Hulten found
that an average of about 50 chiasmata are seen in spermatocytes.
Meiosis II
It resembles mitosis, but differs from it in two respects. Firstly, there
is no DNA replication prior to this. Secondly, the second meiotic
division follows meiosis I without interphase. Unlike meiosis I, here
centromere splits and two sister chromatids separate to move one to
each pole. This results in daughter cells having identical chromo-
somes. Meiosis II shows similar phases, prophase II, metaphase II,
anaphase II and telophase II.
GAMETOGENESIS
Gametogenesis in human beings shows sexual dimorphism. In

males, the process is called spermatogenesis; in females, it is called
oogenesis.
Spermatogenesis
It is the process by which spermatozoa are formed. It occurs in
seminiferous tubules of the testis after puberty. The wall of the
seminiferous tubule is formed by seminiferous epithelium. The
mebooksfree.com
latter consists of (i) germinal element and (ii) supporting ele-

ment (Sertoli cell). Germinal element consists of a series of
developing germ cells. The most peripheral cell population is of
spermatogonia. These are stem cells. They are of two types, type
A and type B. Type B spermatogonia by their further division
form primary spermatocytes. The primary spermatocyte under-
goes a prolonged prophase comprising leptotene, zygotene,
pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis. It is followed by metaphase,
anaphase and telophase (meiosis I). During the anaphase, cen-
tromeres do not split. This results in separating members of the
homologous pair of chromosomes, each member reaching the
opposite pole. This reduces chromosome number to half, i.e.
23 chromosomes. Thus, division of a primary spermatocyte
results in the formation of two secondary spermatocytes each
with haploid chromosome complement. The secondary sper-
matocyte soon undergoes second meiotic division (meiosis II)
forming two spermatids. Thus, four spermatids are formed from
each primary spermatocyte. Spermatids do not undergo division
but mature to form spermatozoa. The process of transformation
of spermatid into spermatozoon is called spermiogenesis. Total
time taken from beginning of meiosis to the formation of mature
spermatozoa is about 64 days. About 200–300 million sperms are
produced per ejaculate.
Oogenesis
This differs from spermatogenesis in certain respects:
1. Oogonia divide to form primary oocytes in prenatal life. No pri-

mary oocyte is formed after birth. From prenatal life to puberty,
the primary oocytes remain in suspended prophase. Meiosis I com-
pletes at the time of ovulation. That means some primary oocytes
may complete their first meiotic division after 40 years or more.
This leaves a chance of meiotic error (nondisjunction) in elderly
mothers resulting in higher incidence of numerical/structural
aberration in foetus, e.g. Down syndrome.
2. In both meiotic divisions involving oocyte, there is unequal divi-
sion of cytoplasm. Primary oocyte divides to form one secondary
oocyte receiving most of the cytoplasm and one (first) polar body
with hardly any cytoplasm. However, both have haploid chromo-
some complement.
3. Second meiotic division in oogenesis commences as the female
germ cell passes into the uterine tube, but is not completed
until after fertilisation. After fertilisation, secondary oocyte
completes its second meiotic division to extrude second polar
body.
mebooksfree.com
18 Human฀Genetics
FERTILISATION
It is the process of union of male and female germ cells resulting in

formation of zygote. It usually occurs in the ampullary portion of
the uterine tube. The process takes about 24 hours to complete.
The process of fertilisation involves the following steps:
1. Passage of sperm across corona radiata aided by acrosome reac-
tion releasing hyaluronidase.
2. Passage of sperm across zona pellucida helped by acrosin and
zona lysine.
3. Entry of sperm into ooplasm.
4. Occurrence of zona reaction—a physicochemical change ren-
dering zona pellucida impermeable to other sperms (after entry
of one).
5. Sperm loses its tail and its head forms male pronucleus.
6. Formation of female pronucleus by extrusion of second polar
body.
7. Fusion of male and female pronuclei forming zygote.
Achievements of Fertilisation
1. Reconstitution of species-specific chromosome complement
(46 in humans).
2. It allows for biparental inheritance and thus species variation.
3. Initiation of cleavage. Cleavage is a series of mitotic divisions in-
volving zygote and resulting in the formation of smaller cells
called blastomeres.
So far, we have seen the behaviour of chromosomes during cell divi-
sion both in mitosis and meiosis. Their behaviour in these two types
of divisions is much different. We have also seen how reconstitution
of diploid chromosome complement occurs at fertilisation. With
this background let us now concentrate upon the structure and
analysis of chromosomes.
HUMAN CHROMOSOMES
We have earlier seen that the human chromosome complement has

46 chromosomes. However, before 1956 the chromosome number
was thought to be 48. It was in 1956 that Tjio and Levan with refined
cytogenetic techniques convincingly demonstrated that there are
46 chromosomes in human beings. They are in 23 pairs, with
22 pairs of autosomes and a pair of sex chromosomes.
mebooksfree.com
Chromosome Morphology
Chromosomes are rod-shaped structures, each one consisting of two
chromatids. They are held together at the primary constriction, the
area that is narrower and in which there is a pale staining region
called a centromere. On either side of a centromere, a chromosome
has its two arms designated as short arm (p arm) and long arm
(q arm). Depending upon the placement of centromere, chromo-
somes have been classified into four types. They are:
1. Metacentric chromosomes: In these, the centromere is almost in
the centre and two arms are nearly equal in size.
2. Submetacentric chromosomes: In these, centromere is located
between midpoint and end of the chromosome.
3. Acrocentric chromosomes: They have a centromere very close to
one end of the chromosome. Thus, their p arms are very short
and q arms are relatively much longer.
4. Telocentric chromosomes: These chromosomes have a centro-
mere at one end and have only one arm (Fig. 2.6).
Associated with human acrocentric chromosomes are small round
structures (chromatin masses) called satellites. They are attached to
short arms by narrow stalks called secondary constrictions. Latter
contain genes coding for 18S and 28S ribosomal RNA.
Karyotyping
It is the process by which a karyotype is obtained. In this process,
metaphase chromosomes are obtained for analysis and photomicro-
graphed. Photographs of individual chromosomes are then cut and
arranged according to standard classification. This is called ideo-
gram or karyotype.
Figure 2.6 Types of metaphase chromosomes. Telocentric chromosomes

are not found in human beings.
mebooksfree.com
20 Human฀Genetics
Chromosome classification
The first attempt towards this was made in 1960 at Denver, Colorado;
hence, it is known as “Denver Classification”. According to this, the
chromosomes are classified under seven groups. They are A-1, 2, 3;
B-4, 5; C-6 to 12 and X chromosome; D-13,14,15; E-16,17,18; F-19, 20;
G-21, 22 and Y chromosome. The basis of classification includes chro-
mosomal features such as length of chromosomes, placement of
centromere and relative lengths of arms (Fig. 2.7). Subsequently in
1971 at the Paris conference, more accurate ways of identifying chro-
mosomes based on various banding patterns were suggested. Today, the
Paris nomenclature is accepted all over the world. According to this,
both p and q arms consist of regions that are numbered 1, 2 and 3,
starting from the centromere. The regions are further subdivided into
bands so as to give a precise location, e.g. RBI (Retinoblastoma) locus
is situated on chromosome 13. Its precise location is 13q 14, i.e. fourth
band on the first region of long arm of chromosome 13. Table 2.1
shows symbols of chromosome nomenclature currently in use.
Chromosome preparation
Chromosomes can be obtained from somatic cells by culturing
them. One can undertake either short-term or long-term culture
depending upon the cells used. Under long-term culture, one can
use fibroblasts or amniotic fluid cells. Chromosomes can also be
observed directly (without culture) in tissues with high mitotic in-
dex like bone marrow or chorion villous samples.
Figure 2.7 Normal male chromosome complement 46, XY arranged

according to the standard classification.
mebooksfree.com
Table 2.1 Standard Symbols Used in Describing Karyotype
Symbol Meaning
p Short arm of a chromosome
q Long arm of a chromosome
del Deletion, e.g. 46, XY, del (5) (p)
dup Duplication, e.g. 46, XX, dup (13)
i Isochromosome, e.g. 46, X, i (Xq)
r Ring chromosome, e.g. 46, XX r (18)
t Translocation, e.g. 46, XY, t (8;14) (q24; q32)
ter Terminal or end, e.g. pter or qter
inv Inversion, e.g. 46, XX, inv (9) (p1 q12)
/ Mosaicism, e.g. 46, XX/45, XO
Peripheral blood culture

This involves the following steps (Fig. 2.8):
1. Collection of blood: Blood is collected from peripheral vein un-

der sterile conditions in heparinized syringe.
2. Planting: The blood sample collected is then transferred to cul-
ture vials, usually 2–3 vials are set per sample. Each vial contains:
(a) Culture medium: Commonly used media are HAM F10, TC
199, RPMI, etc.
Figure 2.8 Procedure of karyotyping.
mebooksfree.com
22 Human฀Genetics
(b) Foetal calf serum or alternatively human AB serum may be

used. Both (medium and serum) serve to nourish the cul-
tured cells.
(c) Phytohaemagglutinin: This is a mitogenic agent. Its addition to
a vial is necessary to promote the rate of mitosis of the cul-
tured cells. It is extracted from French bean (Phaseolus vul-
garis).
(d) Antibiotics: Usually penicillin and streptomycin combination
serves the purpose but alternatively any other antibiotic can
be used. The purpose of antibiotic addition to culture is to
prevent bacterial growth.
3. Incubation: The culture vials are put in an incubator at 37°C for
3 days. During this period, lymphocytes present in blood un-
dergo mitosis. Cultures should be shaken intermittently during
the incubation period.
4. Harvesting: Around 70 hours after planting, colchicine is added
to the culture vial. This arrests the mitosis at metaphase by pre-
venting formation of spindle tubules. Two hours after addition of
colchicine, contents of vial are taken into the centrifuge tube.
After centrifugation for 5 minutes, supernatant is discarded and
pellet containing cells at the bottom of the tube is treated with
hypotonic solution. By this, the cells swell and the chromatids
separate. The cells are then re-suspended in fixative. Fixative
contains glacial acetic acid and methanol in 1:3 proportion. After
three successive changes of fixative, cells suspended in about half
millilitre of fixative are dropped from a height on chilled slides.
5. Staining: For chromosome analysis, it is essential to stain them
with one of the following banding techniques. Among them rou-
tinely used is Giemsa banding (G-banding).
(a) G-banding: Slides with chromosome preparation are first
treated with a solution of trypsin. Trypsin denatures the chro-
mosome protein. Slides are then stained with Giemsa solu-
tion. The chromosomes show dark and light bands that can
be observed under a microscope.
(b) Q-banding: In 1970, Casperson demonstrated that chromo-
somes stained with quinacrine mustard show a specific band-
ing pattern (Q-bands) when observed under fluorescent
microscope.
(c) R-banding: In this, the chromosome preparations are pre-
heated in buffer at high temperature and then stained with
Giemsa. This gives a banding pattern (R-bands) that is re-
verse of Q- or G-banding.
(d) C-banding: This method is selectively chosen for staining the
centromeric region and other regions with secondary con-
strictions, e.g. those in chromosome 1, 9, 16 and long arm of
Y chromosome (Fig. 2.9).
mebooksfree.com
Figure 2.9 C-banding of chromosomes.
(e) NOR-staining: In this method, ammoniacal silver is used as

stain. It stains nucleolar organizing regions, i.e. narrow stalks
on some D and G group chromosomes. These regions con-
tain 18S and 28S rRNA genes (Fig. 2.10).
High Resolution Banding
In routine metaphase preparation, a total of about 200 bands are
seen on the whole chromosome preparation. Instead of this if we
Figure 2.10 NOR staining.
mebooksfree.com
24 Human฀Genetics
Figure 2.11 Schematic representation of somatic cell hybridisation. Note

progressive loss of B chromosomes. 1, 2, 3 represent subsequent nuclear
divisions.
take prophase or prometaphase chromosomes for study, they ex-

hibit a total of about 800–1400 bands through the whole karyotype.
This helps a great deal in locating precise breakpoints or some
minor structural alterations (if any) along the chromosomes. The
principle behind this technique is—blocking the cells in “S” phase
of the cell cycle and subsequently releasing the block and harvesting
the culture at a proper time when maximum number of cells are in
prometaphase.
Somatic Cell Hybridisation
This has proved rewarding in genetic linkage. In this technique,
somatic cells from two different species are fused together under
favourable conditions and then cultured (Fig. 2.11). Chromosome
complement of the hybrid cell is then studied. To cite an example,
mouse cells cannot synthesise an enzyme thymidine kinase but hu-
man cells can do so. Thus, when mouse cells are fused with human
cells, the hybrid cells should possess the capacity to synthesise thy-
midine kinase and they do synthesise the enzyme. Even after several
generations, a hybrid cell retains this capacity. A study of chromo-
somes from a hybrid cell reveals that it has lost all human chromo-
somes except number 17. This indicates that the gene coding for
enzyme thymidine kinase is located on chromosome 17.
Flow Cytometry
Flow cytometry forms a recent technique that is likely to have a sig-
nificant impact on present techniques of chromosome analysis. It
actually means “fluorescent activated cell sorting” (FACS). In this
technique, cells are first ruptured and then stained with a selective
DNA dye that is fluorescent in nature. The material is then pro-
jected into a fine jet across a laser beam in flow chamber. The laser
beam excites chromosomes to fluoresce and the fluorescence can
mebooksfree.com
be measured by a detector. The amount of fluorescence depends

upon the size of a chromosome. This makes it possible to draw a
frequency distribution histogram of the chromosome size with the
help of a computer. A distinct advantage of this method is rapid
analysis avoiding present day methods that are time consuming.
However, the cost of such a unit is prohibitive, thereby limiting its
routine use.
Fluorescent In Situ Hybridisation (FISH)
This has revolutionised the concept of chromosome analysis. It is
based upon the unique ability of a portion of single-stranded DNA,
the probe, to anneal or hybridise with its complementary target
DNA sequence located in the genome. This probe is conjugated
with a fluorescent label and hence can be visualised under UV light.
Various types of chromosome-specific probes can be used. Some
of them are specific for the centromere of chromosome or for a
particular portion of a chromosome. Alternatively, probe for the
whole chromosome can be prepared. On application to a meta-
phase spread, this probe hybridises to that chromosome. It is called
whole chromosome paint (WCP). This technique can be extremely
rewarding for characterizing complex chromosome rearrangements
such as, deletion, insertion, translocations, ring chromosome, etc.
FISH has an added advantage in that it can be applied at inter-
phase stage, i.e. it can be used to make a rapid diagnosis in condi-
tions like trisomy 21 in interphase nuclei from chorion villous
sample (CVS) without culturing the cells. In yet another procedure
called “reverse painting”,an additional portion of an unidentified
chromosome material, such as a small duplication or marker chro-
mosome, is extracted with the help of cell sorter. This is then ampli-
fied with polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and used as a probe for
hybridisation to a normal metaphase spread. The origin of the un-
identified chromosome fragment is then revealed by knowing the
chromosome to which it hybridises.
Applications of Karyotyping
1. Clinical diagnosis: Karyotyping helps in reaching a clinical diag-
nosis. It is especially indicated in patients with congenital malfor-
mations involving multiple systems, mental retardation or in
cases of ambiguous genitalia.
2. Gene mapping: Chromosome analysis has helped in proper locali-
sation of human genes to their specific positions on chromosomes.
3. Role in cancer: The detection of Philadelphia chromosome
in patients with chronic myelogenous leukaemia (CML) alters
prognosis. The formation of Philadelphia chromosome involves
translocation between long arms of chromosomes 22 and 9.
mebooksfree.com
26 Human฀Genetics
The Philadelphia-positive CML cases have a longer survival than

those without Philadelphia chromosome.
4. Repeated foetal loss: On chromosome analysis, the couple may
reveal a chromosomal defect in any one of the partner. Chromo-
somal aberrations account for a sizeable number of spontaneous
abortions in the first trimester of pregnancy.
5. Prenatal diagnosis: Chromosome analysis of chorion villous sam-
ples and amniotic cells may reveal a chromosome abnormality in
a foetus warranting medical termination of pregnancy.
SEX CHROMATIN
In 1949 Barr and Bertram, while studying cat neurons, found that
some of these cells show a chromatin mass in their nuclei. This was
observed only in females but not in males. Subsequently, it was la-
belled as sex chromatin or Barr body. The cells that contain this are
called chromatin-positive and others are called chromatin-negative
cells. Barr body can be found in many cell types but can be conve-
niently examined in buccal mucosa.
Procedure of Examining Barr Body

It is relatively simple. Scrapping from the inner side of the cheek is
taken on a slide and smeared evenly. Subsequently, it is fixed in al-
cohol and stained with thionin. It is then mounted in neutral me-
dium and observed under a microscope (Fig. 2.12).
Figure 2.12 Barr body.
mebooksfree.com
In the past, buccal smear (sex chromatin study) was used as a di-
agnostic tool for disorders of sexual development. However, now it
has been replaced by karyotyping. Number of Barr bodies in a cell
will depend upon the number of X chromosomes in the cell, i.e.
number of Barr bodies 5 number of X chromosomes – 1. For ex-
ample, in an individual with 47, XXX complement, there are 3 X
chromosomes. Therefore, the number of Barr bodies is 3 – 1 5 2.
A Turner syndrome patient having 45, XO complement has only one
X chromosome. Therefore, the number of Barr bodies is 1 – 1 5 0,
i.e. no Barr body.
Barr body represents one of two X chromosomes of a female
cell. This remains condensed and is in inactive state throughout
interphase. Its replication is also late as compared to its homo-
logue.
Lyon’s Hypothesis
Dr. Mary F. Lyon, in 1962, stated in her
hypothesis about the inactivation of
X chromosome. It was observed that at
prophase, one X chromosome is late
replicating and heteropyknotic, i.e. this
X chromosome differs from other
chromosomes in respect to state of con-
densation and staining. Of the two
X chromosomes only one is active in cel-
lular metabolism while the other (inac-
tive one) forms sex chromatin. In males,
there is only one X chromosome, which
is active and hence they do not show
Barr body. (Used from PLoS Genetics.
Lyon’s hypothesis states that: Attributed to: 2010 Jane
Gitschier.)
1. In female somatic cells, only one X
chromosome is active. The second is inactive, condensed and
appears in the form of sex chromatin in interphase.
2. Inactivation occurs early in embryonic life.
3. Inactivation is random but fixed. The inactive X can be maternal
or paternal (Xm or XP) in different cells of the same individual.
However, once the decision as to which X will be inactivated is
made in the cell, then all the clonal descendants of that cell will
follow the decision. Sex chromatin is detected in blastocyst
at 9–12 days. First it is detectable in syncytiotrophoblast, then
chorionic mesoderm followed by yolk sac. In embryo proper, it is
detected after the 18th day.
mebooksfree.com
28 Human฀Genetics
Mechanism of Inactivation of X Chromosome

It involves DNA methylation; specifically, cytosine undergoes change
forming 5-methyl cytosine at certain sites in DNA. This accounts for
altered gene activity. DNA methylation is said to be responsible for
inactivation of genes; the exact mode of which is yet not clear.
Inactivation Centre
It is believed to be in the proximal part of the long arm of X chro-
mosome (Xq) around which the Barr body condenses. The evidence
attesting this fact is as follows:
1. An abnormal X lacking proximal part of Xq has not been ob-
served to form a Barr body.
2. An abnormal X with duplication of this part of X chromosome
forms a bipartite Barr body.
There appears to be a couple of exceptions to “random inactiva-
tion”. In X chromosome abnormality such as deletion, ring chromo-
some or isochromosome, it is the abnormal X that forms a Barr
body. Accordingly, the size of the Barr body may be larger or smaller
than the normal one. Secondly, in translocations involving X chro-
mosome and an autosome, it is the intact X that becomes inactive to
form a Barr body.
Genetic Significance of X Inactivation

It is threefold:
1. Dosage compensation
2. Variability of expression
3. Mosaicism
Dosage compensation
The X chromosome inactivation explains why the X-linked gene
product is equivalent in both sexes in spite of two X chromosomes
in female and only one in male.
Variability of expression
As inactivation is random, female heterozygotes for X-linked genes
present a considerable phenotypic variation. Variation in expression
of X-linked disorders can be ranging from completely normal to full
expression of the defect. A carrier who exhibits an X-linked trait is
called manifesting heterozygote, e.g. colour blindness, haemo-
philia, Duchenne muscular dystrophy.
mebooksfree.com
Mosaicism
Females are mosaics in respect to X chromosome. They possess two
cell populations, one cell line with one X chromosome active and
the other with an alternative X active. Davidson et al. (1963) dem-
onstrated mosaicism by cloning cultured fibroblasts from a woman
heterozygous for two different G6PD alleles.
There are some X-linked genes that do not get inactivated. They
are Xg locus for Xg blood group and STS locus for steroid sulpha-
tase. These loci are located on the distal end of the short arm of
X chromosome (Xp). It is suggested that they escape inactivation
through a mechanism of X–Y pairing during meiosis.
Origin of X-Inactivation
It is thought that initially X and Y were homologous through most
of their length. Subsequently, part of Y became involved in testicular
development and part of X became concerned with ovarian devel-
opment. Afterwards, part of Y that was not involved in testicular
development got translocated to X chromosome. This led to a du-
plication of genes and long arm of X chromosome. To prevent the
double dose effect, it became necessary to inactivate that part of
X chromosome in somatic cells.
Summary
1. Cell cycle consists of mitosis–interphase–mitosis.
Interphase consists of G1, S and G2 phases.
Mitosis consists of:
i) Prophase: Chromosomes condense and centriole divides.
ii) Metaphase: Formation of metaphase plate and spindle formation.
iii) Anaphase: Chromatids disjoin with vertical split of centromere, cyto-
plasmic division starts with a furrow at equator.
iv) Telophase.
2. Sister Chromatid Exchange (SCE): It involves crossing over between
sister chromatids of single chromosome.
3. Meiosis consists of:
Meiosis I (reduction division).
• It is much prolonged and at the end of it number of chromosomes is
reduced from diploid (46) to haploid (23).
• It has prolonged prophase I comprising of proleptotene, leptotene,
zygotene, pachytene, diplotene and diakinesis stages. Prophase I is
followed by metaphase I, anaphase I (without centromeric split) and
telophase I.
Meiosis II—It is like mitosis except that there is no interphase and no
replication of DNA.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
30 Human฀Genetics
Summary—cont’d
4. Oogenesis differs from spermatogenesis in the following respects:
• All primary oocytes are formed before birth and remain suspended at
prophase.
• There is unequal cytokinesis (division of cytoplasm).
• Meiosis II of oogenesis occurs only when sperm enters ooplasm.
5. Fertilisation: Process of union of mature male and female germ cells,
resulting in formation of zygote.
This results in (i) reconstruction of species-specific chromosome
complement—46 in humans; (ii) species variation through biparental
inheritance; (iii) sex determination; and (iv) initiation of cleavage.
6. Chromosome morphology: Types—metacentric, submetacentric, ac-
rocentric and telocentric (depending on place of centromere).
Karyotyping: It is the process of obtaining chromosomes. Steps:
(i) Collection of blood; (ii) planting; (iii) incubation; (iv) harvesting; and
(v) staining and then observing/studying under microscope.
7. High resolution banding (HRB) helps in detection of structural altera-
tions.
8. Somatic cell hybridisation: Helps in the study of genetic linkage and
localisation of gene/s on chromosome/s.
9. Flow cytometry: It involves “fluorescent activated cell sorting (FACS)”.
It allows much faster chromosome analysis.
10. Applications of chromosome analysis: (i) confirming clinical diagnosis;
(ii) gene mapping; (iii) prognosis in cases of CML; (iv) in repeated foetal
loss; and (v) prenatal diagnosis.
11. Barr body: Number of Barr bodies in a cell 5 Number of X chromosome
2 1; e.g., for a cell with 46, XX it is 2 2 1 5 1.
Lyon’s hypothesis:
In female somatic cell, only one “X” chromosome is active while the other is
inactive, condensed to form Barr body.
Inactivation occurs in early embryonic life.
Inactivation is random but fixed.
Mechanism—DNA methylation.
Inactivation centre—Proximal part of long arm of X chromosome.
Significance of X inactivation: (i) Dosage compensation; (ii) variability of
expression; and (iii) mosaicism.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. Euchromatin represents:
a. Extended pale staining portion of chromosomes
b. Coiled dark staining portion of chromosomes
c. Both coiled and extended portions of chromosomes
d. None of the above
2. How is the word chromosome derived?
mebooksfree.com
3. What is cell cycle?

4. In which phase of cell cycle do most of the cells in the body exist and
function?
5. What are the characteristics of interphase?
6. Name two salient features of metaphase.
7. What is the striking feature of anaphase in mitosis?
8. What is the role of colchicine in karyotyping?
9. What is somatic recombination?
10. What is sister chromatid exchange?
11. What is the striking feature of anaphase of meiosis I?
12. What is the difference between meiosis II and mitosis?
13. Which one of the following is true about the primary oocytes?
a. All primary oocytes are formed in prenatal life.
b. All primary oocytes are formed at puberty.
c. All primary oocytes are formed after menarche.
d. Primary oocytes are formed continuously from puberty until meno-
pause.
14. In which phase of meiosis I, the primary oocytes remain suspended?
a. Prophase b. Metaphase
c. Anaphase d. Telophase
15. Which one of following chromosome complement is normally present in
the daughter cells resulting from meiosis I?
a. Polypoid b. Aneuploid
c. Diploid d. Haploid
16. Second meiotic division in oogenesis usually completes when the
female germ cell is in _________
a. Ovary b. Ampulla of uterine tube
c. Uterine cavity d. Cervical canal
17. What is fertilisation?
18. “Human chromosome complement has 46 chromosomes” was
established in the year ________
a. 1936 b. 1952
c. 1956 d. 1969
19. Name the four types of chromosomes depending upon the placement
of centromere.
20. Which one of the following banding techniques is routinely used in chro-
mosome analysis?
a. C-banding b. G-banding
c. Q-banding d. R-banding
mebooksfree.com
32 Human฀Genetics
21. After Q-banding, the chromosome spread is observed under________

a. Binocular research microscope b. Polarised microscope
c. Fluorescent microscope d. Electron microscope
22. Which chromosomes show secondary constrictions?
23. What is the advantage of high resolution banding (HRB)?
24. What is somatic cell hybridisation?
25. What is flow cytometry?
26. What is FISH?
27. What are the applications/indications for karyotyping?
28. What is Barr body?
29. How many Barr bodies are seen in a cell?
30. What is Lyon’s hypothesis?
31. How is inactivation of X chromosome achieved?
32. Where is the inactivation centre?
*See pages 267–268 for Answers.
mebooksfree.com
Molecular
Genetics

• Structure of DNA, its types and transcription and translation
• Structure and types of RNA and its role
• Gene structure and its function
• Mutation, recombinant DNA, polymerase chain reaction
DNA, RNA, Gene, Recombinant DNA, PCR, DNA sequencing,

Gene chip
In this chapter, an attempt has been made to answer few basic ques-
tions. For example, what is a gene? How does gene determine a
character, like colour of eyes and skin, height, etc.? What are the
events involved in the production of protein, the final product of
gene? To find out the answer to these questions, let us first equip
ourselves with some basic information.
Each human cell has a nucleus that stores genetic information
(Fig. 3.1); it is surrounded by cytoplasm containing various organ-
elles such as mitochondria, ribosomes, endoplasmic reticulum,
etc. Let us look into the pages of history for evidence to support
our statement that nucleus stores genetic information. Friedrich
Miescher in 1869 conducted some experiments. He made chemi-
cal analysis of nuclei obtained from pus cells. He detected a sub-
stance with a high phosphorus content. It was called nuclein. Later
on, it was called nucleic acid considering its acidic properties. In
1928, Griffith performed an experiment on pneumococci . Mor-
phologically, there are two forms of this bacteria-rough (R) and
smooth (S) form. Griffith showed that if S form of pneumococci
are killed and the remains are mixed with living R form, then some
33
34 Human฀Genetics
Figure 3.1 Schematic representation of eukaryotic cell.
of the R bacteria are transformed

into S form. Now the question is—
what brings about this transforma-
tion of R bacteria into S form? Logi-
cally, it is only the material from
dead S bacteria that can do so. This
was confirmed by further experi-
ments in 1944 by Avery et al. They
purified extracts from dead S bacte-
ria. They further showed that the
transformation from R to S form
could be brought about by using
nucleic acid solution. This con-
firmed that the genetic information
regarding this transformation was
passed through nucleic acid. This
was further supported by experi- Figure 3.2 A diagrammatic
ments on bacteriophage (Fig. 3.2) in representation of bacteriophage.
1952 by Hershey and Chase. They
labelled the outer protein coat of
phage with radioactive sulphur and inner nuclei with radioactive
phosphorus. It should be noted that the protein coat has practically
no phosphorus and nucleic acid has no sulphur. These labelled
phages were allowed to infect bacteria. On analysing these infected
bacteria, it was discovered that the radioactive phosphorus of nu-
cleic acid had entered the bacteria. The radioactive sulphur from
the protein coat was not found. The infected bacterial cells could,
however, produce complete bacteriophage particles with the pro-
tein coat. This means that the information for synthesis of the
protein coat was passed through the nucleic acid (with a radioac-
tive phosphorus label).
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 3 —฀Molecular฀Genetics 35
STRUCTURE OF NUCLEIC ACID
It consists of long chains of molecules called nucleotides. Each nu-

cleotide molecule in turn consists of a nitrogenous base, a sugar
moiety and phosphorus molecule. The nitrogenous bases are of two
types—purine and pyrimidine. The purine bases are adenine and
guanine; the pyrimidine bases are thymine, cytosine and uracil.
There are two types of nucleic acids—deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA)
and ribonucleic acid (RNA). DNA contains sugar called deoxyri-
bose, and RNA contains sugar called ribose. DNA is mainly found in
chromosomes (exception mitochondrial DNA) and RNA is chiefly
found in nucleolus and in cytoplasm. Among pyrimidine bases,
DNA has thymine and RNA has uracil; the rest of the nitrogenous
bases are common in both.
DNA
We realise that genes are composed of DNA, and so it is essential at
this stage to consider the structure of DNA.
Structure: Watson–Crick model
JD Watson, FHC Crick and MHF Wilkins proposed a structure of
DNA molecule based on X-ray diffraction studies, for which they
were awarded the Nobel Prize. They suggested that DNA molecule
consists of two chains of nucleotides in the form of double helix.
Each chain has a backbone of sugar–phosphate molecule (Fig. 3.3).
The two chains are held together by hydrogen bonds between
nitrogenous bases. The DNA chains have polarity due to orientation
(Attributed to: Gene (Attributed to: Marc (Used from: Leyo. Attributed
Forum.) Lieberman.) to: Website Der National
Institutes of Health.)
mebooksfree.com
36 Human฀Genetics
Figure 3.3 Diagrammatic representation of sugar–phosphate backbone

and nucleotide pairing in DNA duplex. A 5 adenine, C 5 cytosine,
G 5 guanine, T 5 thymine and P 5 phosphate.
of sugar–phosphate molecules. The 5’ end of the chain is termi-

nated by a 5’ carbon atom of a sugar molecule and the 3’ end of the
chain is terminated by a 3’ carbon atom. In the two strands of DNA
double helix, the 5’ end of one strand is opposite the 3’ end of the
other. In short, the strands are said to be anti-parallel.
The bases in DNA molecule pair with specificity. Adenine always
pairs with thymine and cytosine with guanine. The two strands of
DNA molecule separate at a nuclear division, and each strand
then builds up its complement. This is called replication. The
process of DNA replication commences simultaneously at multi-
ple sites along the length of DNA strand and then progresses in
both directions.
mebooksfree.com
Types of DNA
There are three main types of DNA:
1. Unique sequences
2. Satellite DNA
3. Interspersed repetitive DNA sequences
Unique Sequences
It has been estimated that there are about 50–100 thousand genes
that code for specific proteins. They form unique sequences and
account for about 5% of DNA of the human genome. Out of the rest
95%, about 75% consists of again unique or single copy DNA se-
quences, precise function of which is yet unknown.
Satellite DNA
About 10%–15% of human genomic DNA comprises of short tan-
dem repeat (STR) DNA sequences that code for ribosomal and
transfer RNAs (tRNAs). These sequences are clustered in the het-
erochromatic regions of chromosomes 1, 9, 16 and long arm of
Y chromosomes. This DNA separates out on density gradient cen-
trifugation as a shoulder or “satellite” to the main peak of DNA and
hence referred as satellite DNA.
Interspersed Repetitive DNA Sequences
This accounts for about 10%–15% of the human genomic DNA. It
is made up of two main classes of repetitive DNA sequences, which
are interspersed throughout the genome. Out of these, one class is
made up of short interspersed repetitive elements (SINEs) that
form about 5% of human genome. Each sequence is about 300 bp
(base pairs) and is in nearly 300,000 copies. They are called “Alu
repeats” because they contain an Alu I restriction enzyme recogni-
tion site. “Alu” is a bacterial restriction enzyme.
Another class of interspersed repetitive DNA elements is made up
of LINEs, i.e. long interspersed repetitive sequences or LI family.
They are about 6000 bp in length and occur in nearly 1,00,000 cop-
ies. The function of these sequences is not clear. However, both Alu
and LI family sequences (i.e. SINEs and LINEs) have been impli-
cated as cause of mutations in inherited human diseases.
“Selfish DNA”, it has been referred so because it preserves itself as a
result of selection within the genome but appears to have little or virtu-
ally no function and does not seem to contribute to the phenotype.
Mitochondrial DNA
Hundreds of mitochondria in the cell possess their own DNA. In a
zygote, they are from the cytoplasm of an oocyte (maternal in
mebooksfree.com
38 Human฀Genetics
origin). The mitochondrial DNA is circular and is often designated

as mtDNA. It codes for two types of ribosomal RNAs, protein sub-
units of some of the enzymes e.g. cytochrome B and cytochrome
oxidase, involved in oxidative phosphorylation. It also codes for nu-
merous tRNAs. Recently, mitochondrially mediated diseases are be-
ing recognised, e.g. Leber optic atrophy. It has been shown to be due
to a defect in detoxification of cyanide owing to mutations in mito-
chondrial DNA. This involves gene for electron transport protein
NADH-coenzyme Q oxidoreductase. Since mitochondria have an
important role in cell metabolism, mitochondrial DNA mutations
are observed in central nervous system, heart and skeletal muscle.
Pedigree in Fig. 3.4 shows mitochondrial inheritance/cytoplas-
mic inheritance. The disorder affects both males and females but is
transmitted only through females.
Chromosome
The width of chromosome is much larger than the diameter of DNA
molecule. With this consideration, there must be tight coiling of
DNA helices. The Solenoid model of the chromosome structure was
proposed by Finch and Klug. It is believed that a total length of DNA
in chromosomes, if extended, runs into metres while a total length
of human chromosome complement is about half a millimetre. This
means that there may be several orders of DNA coiling in chromo-
somes. They are as under:
1. Primary coiling of DNA double helix.
2. Secondary coiling around histone beads, i.e. nucleosomes.
3. Nucleosomes undergo tertiary coiling to form chromatin fibres.
4. Chromatin fibres in turn form loops.
5. These loops further coil tightly to form a chromosome, which we
observe under a microscope (Fig. 3.5).
Code
The term “code” is defined as the sum of available signals by means
of which news or information can be formulated and transmitted to
the recipient.
Figure 3.4 Pedigree showing mitochondrial inheritance.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 3.5 Schematic representation of “Solenoid model” of DNA coiling.
Triplet code
In 1961, Nierenberg and Matthaei took the first step to find key to the
genetic code. They added RNA containing only the nitrogenous base
uracil (U) to a mixture of amino acids, enzymes and ribosomes; the
result was synthesis of a simple protein containing only the amino
acid phenylalanine, even though many other amino acids were avail-
able in the mixture. With this, the investigators arrived at the conclu-
sion that triplet UUU codes for the amino acid phenylalanine.
The basic function of a gene is to direct synthesis of protein.
There are 20 different amino acids in protein. DNA molecule stores
genetic information in the form of a triplet code, which is a se-
quence of three bases that code for one amino acid. As there are
four bases—A, T, G and C—there can be 43 5 64 such combina-
tions. The sequence of these three bases is also called genetic code
or codon. For some amino acids, there is more than one triplet
code. In such cases, codes are sometimes called degenerate. What
happens if there is mutation of gene? Then the resulting code may
be read as “nonsense” and no amino acid shall be coded. Alterna-
tively, the code may be read as “missense”; in this case, a different
amino acid is substituted resulting in an abnormal protein. Two of
the codons, UAA and UAG, are called Ochre and Amber, respectively.
They are found in micro-organisms. They do not code for any
amino acid.
Ribonucleic Acid (RNA)

It differs from DNA basically in three respects:
1. It has sugar ribose in place of deoxyribose of DNA.
mebooksfree.com
40 Human฀Genetics
2. Of the four bases, three are common in DNA and RNA. They are
adenine, cytosine and guanine. The fourth base in DNA is thy-
mine; in RNA, it is uracil.
3. RNA molecule is usually single stranded, while DNA has two
strands.
Types of RNA
RNAs are of three types:
1. mRNA—messenger RNA
2. tRNA—transfer RNA
3. rRNA—ribosomal RNA
Messenger RNA and Heterogeneous Nuclear RNA

(hnRNA)
The primary product of transcription is a heterogeneous nuclear
RNA (hnRNA) molecule. It has been shown that hnRNA contains
coding and non-coding sequences. Coding sequences are called
“exons”, while non-coding sequences are called “introns”. Non-
coding sequences are removed by excision, i.e. cut and removed.
Coding sequences (exons) are then spliced together to form a ma-
ture form of RNA called messenger RNA (mRNA). The mRNA
undergoes couple of modifications to become mature. Firstly, it
acquires a methylated cap at the 5’ end. Secondly, at the 3’ end, a
long sequence “poly-A tail” gets attached. The methylated cap con-
sists of a cluster of methyl groups. It possibly protects mRNA against
degradation at the 5’ end. Poly-A tail consists of a long sequence of
about 200 adenine residues. It helps in transporting mRNA from
the nucleus to the ribosomes in the cytoplasm. This is attested by the
fact that mRNA, which lacks poly-A tail, does not reach cytoplasm.
Transfer RNA (tRNA)
The message derived from DNA is mRNA, but this mRNA message
cannot be directly read by amino acids. Crick and Hoagland first
thought of an intermediate RNA molecule serving the purpose.
This molecule is called tRNA. A tRNA molecule is single stranded.
It has about 73–93 nucleotides and a molecular weight of about
25,000. A particular tRNA attaches to its specific amino acid and
then transports it to the ribosome, the site of protein synthesis. In
other words, for each amino acid the tRNA is different. For some
amino acids, more than one tRNA has been identified; for example,
more than five tRNAs are known for leucine. A single stranded
tRNA molecule is folded upon itself forming hairpins. Many tRNAs
show unusual bases like inosine, pseudouracil or methylated forms
of normal bases. All tRNAs possess a terminal sequence of CCA at
mebooksfree.com
the 3’ end. This is called amino

acid arm. Apart from this, tRNA
possesses three loops:
1. TC loop containing pseudo-

uracil residue
2. DHU loop containing dihy-
drouridine
3. Anticodon loop containing
specific triplet of bases com-
plementary to codon of
mRNA (Fig. 3.6)
Ribosomal RNA (rRNA)
Figure 3.6 Clover leaf model of
Ribosomes are tiny particles of tRNA molecule.
ribonucleoprotein in cyto-
plasm. In eukaryotes, they oc-
cur in two sizes—60S in mitochondria and 80S in cytoplasm. Ribo-
somes consist of two unequal subunits. Ribosome, in cytoplasm, may
lie free or attached to endoplasmic reticulum. They are also present
in the nucleus in the form of nucleolus. Ribosome consists of rRNA
and ribosomal protein. Electron micrographs of protein-synthesiz-
ing cells show ribosomes associated in a string-like manner; these
are called polyribosomes. The latter are formed by attachment of
ribosomes to a single molecule of mRNA. Ribosomal RNA present
in subunits of ribosome is in a highly folded form. Approximately,
70% of rRNA is double stranded. Apart from being structural com-
ponent of ribosomes, rRNA is involved in protein synthesis. The 3’
end of 16S rRNA has a sequence complementary to mRNA ribo-
some binding site. The 5S rRNA in larger subunit of ribosome pos-
sesses a sequence complementary to the TC loop sequence of tRNA.
This permits binding of tRNA to ribosomes.
TRANSCRIPTION AND TRANSLATION
Transcription (Fig.฀3.7 )
It is a process whereby information is transmitted from DNA to the
mRNA. This occurs in the following manner:
1. Two strands of DNA double helix separate.

2. Against the single strand of DNA (opened up), there is synthesis
of mRNA molecule. This occurs with complementary base pair-
ing—cytosine pairs with guanine, thymine with adenine, but
mebooksfree.com
42 Human฀Genetics
Figure 3.7 Diagrammatic representation of eukaryotic transcrip-

tion unit and the way it operates.
Scan to Play Transcription
adenine pairs with uracil (since RNA does not have thymine but
has uracil).
3. The mRNA then migrates from the nucleus to the cytoplasm.
Translation (Fig.฀3.8 )
It is a process of translating information from mRNA into protein
synthesis. For this, the mRNA formed within the nucleus comes out
into the cytoplasm:
1. Here it gets associated with ribosomes. These are the sites of pro-
tein synthesis. A group of ribosomes associated with an mRNA
molecule is called polyribosome.
2. mRNA serves here as a template and hence is also called template
RNA.
3. Amino acid to be incorporated in protein gets activated by ATP.
4. tRNA present in the cytoplasm receives activated amino acid at
one end.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 3.8 Translation of genetic information into protein synthesis.
Scan to Play Translation
5. tRNA at its other end has three bases, complementary to the

mRNA bases.
6. Thus mRNA triplet through tRNA triplet picks up a required
amino acid.
7. The ribosome with tRNA 1 amino acid moves along mRNA mol-
ecule. This links the amino acid in a polypeptide chain. After
being formed, the polypeptide chain is released and the ribo-
some moves to a new point along the mRNA molecule.
GENE
Until 1977, gene was thought to be a segment of DNA molecule pos-

sessing a code for amino acid sequence of a polypeptide chain. This
model, however, appears to be inadequate to elucidate the precise
mechanism of gene operation.
There are about 50,000–100,000 DNA sequences that code for
RNA or protein products in humans. These are called structural
genes. They range from 1000 to 2 lakh base pair (bp) size. On
analysis, a structural gene (Fig. 3.9) reveals coding sequences called
exons,which are interrupted by non-coding sequences called introns.
Introns are initially transcribed but are not represented in mature
mRNA or in the final protein product. The gene also possesses ex-
tensive flanking regions. They are important in regulation and the
“start” and “stop” signals.
Let us now consider the structure of human globin gene to under-
stand gene structure (Fig. 3.9). Human globin gene presents three
mebooksfree.com
44 Human฀Genetics
Figure 3.9 Schematic representation of the structural gene in humans.
exons (coding sequences) and two introns (non-coding sequences).

Upstream (5’ end) from the gene there is a flanking region containing
two specific sequences. They play a significant role in regulation. They
are as follows:
1. CAT box. It is located 70 bp upstream from the beginning of first
coding sequence (exon).
2. TATA box. It is located between the CAT box and the site of ini-
tiation of transcription.
Downstream (3’ end), there is a second flanking region, contain-
ing a sequence AATAAA. This sequence appears to be a signal for
addition of poly-A tail to the end of mRNA strand.
It would be interesting at this stage to know about what happened
in 1970. Khorana and his colleagues successfully synthesised a gene
de novo. They assembled 77 base pairs of gene that codes for pro-
duction of alanine tRNA in yeast. The artificial gene so synthesised,
though structurally correct was non-functional because it lacked
“start” (initiator) and “stop” (termination) signals. However, with
some more research, they succeeded in synthesizing fully functional
artificial gene.
Generalisation of Gene Structure

1. In genes, coding sequences are split by intervening sequences.
2. The exon–intron patterns of split genes appear to be strikingly
conserved during evolution, e.g. a and b globin genes have
arisen by duplication of a primitive precursor about 500 million
years ago. Each of them has two introns at precisely the same lo-
cations.
3. Within exons, alterations in sequence occur slowly, approxi-
mately at the rate of 10–9 substitutions per codon per generation
through natural selection.
mebooksfree.com
The concept of “split gene” was introduced by Richard J. Roberts

and Phillip A. Sharp; they were awarded Nobel Prize in 1993 for the
same.
(Attributed to: Paloma (Attributed to: Chemical

Baytelman.) Heritage Foundation.)
HTF Islands
A restriction enzyme called HpaII contains one or more CpG dinu-
cleotides in the nucleotide recognition sequence necessary for DNA
cleavage. Methylation of cytosine in this dinucleotide pair prevents
cleavage of DNA by restriction enzymes. The CpG dinucleotides are
non-randomly distributed in the genome. The clusters of under
methylated CpG dinucleotides are found near transcription initia-
tion sites at 5’ end of many genes. These are called methylation free
HpaII tiny fragments or HTF islands. However, all genes do not have
HTF islands and not all the HTF islands are associated with genes.
Jumping Genes
Also called “transposons or transposable genetic elements”; these
are regions of DNA that can jump to and fro within single chromo-
some or an adjacent one. The discovery of jumping gene goes to the
credit of Barbara McClintock, an American geneticist during her
maize plant study. Later on, similar moving genetic elements were
also discovered in bacteria. In bacteria, these are involved in rapid
spread of antibiotic resistance genes. Transposons are supposed to
be ubiquitous. These mobile nucleic acid elements are of great sig-
nificance in search for vectors. The latter are carrier molecules that
help in transport of the desired genes into the host cell.
mebooksfree.com
46 Human฀Genetics
Pseudogenes
These are sequences that show a striking similarity with functional
genes, but are not transcribed. Probable reason being that their
regulatory regions have been altered by mutation. They are thought
to represent vestigial remains of the gene that was functional at
some stage of evolution. Some pseudogenes do not have introns;
they are called “processed pseudogenes”. They represent cDNA
(complementary DNA) sequence synthesised on mRNA template. It
is then reinserted into the genome.
Control of Gene Action in Prokaryotes

“Operon”
In 1961, Jacob and Monod worked extensively on Escherichia coli
(prokaryote) at Pasteur Institute. They postulated that apart from
structural genes, there is another class called control genes. These
are regulator genes and operator genes. They regulate the expres-
sion (action) of structural genes. In short, they govern the amount
of (protein) product produced by gene (Fig. 3.10).
A unit of functional gene consists of an operon that in turn com-
prises operator gene and structural gene. The operator gene con-
trols the action of the structural gene. The regulator gene produces
a substance called “repressor”, which inhibits the operator gene.
Therefore, when the regulator gene is in functional state, no pro-
teins are produced by the structural gene. It shall function only
when the regulator gene is switched off. This is achieved by the in-
activation of the repressor by another substance. It is called inducer.
In human beings, an example of operon mutation is possibly su-
crose intolerance. However, gene activity appears to be controlled
more likely by the flanking regions, i.e. CAT and TATA box regions
as read earlier in this chapter.
Figure 3.10 Concept of operon by Jacob and Monod (1961).
mebooksfree.com
MUTATION
It is defined as any change in sequence of genomic DNA. In the

normal course, DNA replication is highly precise; however, any er-
ror that involves this process is copied in subsequent replications.
Mutation occurs by any of the following three mechanisms: substitu-
tion, deletion and insertion.
Single base substitution or “point mutation”
In this, there is a single base change in DNA sequence. This alters
the triplet code and causes replacement of amino acid. Fortunately,
since the code is degenerate (more than one triplet codes for amino
acid), all the single base substitutions shall not alter the amino acid
sequence in the final protein product. For example, leucine and
arginine are specified by six different codons, and so a single base
substitution in this will alter only one of the triplets but the remain-
ing five remain normal. About 20%–25% of the single base muta-
tions belong to this type. In the rest of the 75%, there is a change in
amino acid and thus an alteration in the final protein product. Such
a protein may not have any biological activity. If the gene is respon-
sible for a particular enzyme, the enzyme may be synthesised in
lesser quantity. Rarely, will a mutation cause increased synthesis of
an enzyme, e.g. Hektoen variant of G6PD.
Deletion or insertion
The deletion or insertion of a base leads to an alteration in the read-
ing frame of DNA strand and thus the amino acid sequence. This is
called “Frame shift”. Usually, such massive alteration does not result
in active proteins.
Mutations and Their Effects on Gene Product

They are described as follows.
Chain termination mutations
DNA transcription normally ceases when a termination codon is
reached. A mutation that creates a termination codon can cause
premature cessation of transcription. In another situation, if the
mutation destroys a termination codon then it allows transcription
to continue till the next termination codon is reached.
Splice mutations
These are mutations that affect a normal mechanism by which introns
are excised and exons are spliced together during the formation of
mRNA. It leads to complete failure of synthesis of the gene product.
mebooksfree.com
48 Human฀Genetics
Mutations involving regulatory sequences

Mutations that involve CAT box and TATA box regions upstream of
the structural gene can cause reduced transcription of the se-
quence. One can say that mutations may lead to a state where the
protein product is synthesised, but this protein is functionally inac-
tive. This happens in haemophilia A patients. They have Factor VIII
of coagulation, but not a functionally active one.
Gene Mapping
It can be broadly divided into two. The first is “chromosome map-
ping”, i.e. assigning a particular gene or a DNA sequence to a spe-
cific chromosome. The second is a finer piece of information. It
includes physical relationships to flanking DNA sequence polymor-
phisms and the detailed structure of the gene, i.e. “DNA mapping”.
Chromosome mapping
Chromosome mapping may be accomplished by somatic cell hybri-
disation or in situ hybridisation (see details under Chapter 2).
DNA mapping
For this purpose, numerous techniques are available, such as pulsed
field gel electrophoresis (PFGE), chromosome linking/jumping,
YAC contigs and so on.
Pulsed Field Gel Electrophoresis (PFGE)
The routine agarose gel electrophoresis can resolve DNA fragments of
about 20,000 bp length. Using PFGE, one can separate DNA frag-
ments of 2,000,000 bp in size. The digestion of DNA with restriction
enzymes such as Not 1 and Pvu 1 results in producing larger DNA frag-
ments. This is because these enzymes have 6–8 bp nucleotide recogni-
tion sequences, which occur less frequently in DNA. This allows con-
struction of maps of relatively larger stretches of DNA that are not
amenable to resolution by routine restriction mapping methods.
Chromosome Jumping
It is a technique used in the physical mapping of genomes. Circular
DNA is produced by digesting DNA fragments with restriction en-
zyme in presence of a plasmid, cut with the same restriction enzyme.
The circular DNA thus obtained is cut again with second restric-
tion enzyme that does not cleave in plasmid sequence. This plasmid
sequence acts as a tag and allows cloning of the ends of the original
DNA fragments that along with complementary libraries can be
used to map markers, which are many kilo bases away. This is called
chromosome jumping/linking.
mebooksfree.com
YAC Contigs
Yeast artificial chromosome (YAC) has allowed cloning of large seg-
ments of genomic DNA. This is essential in mapping genes, and
their flanking regions have 2,000,000–3,000,000 base pairs length,
for example, genes of cystic fibrosis, neurofibromatosis and dystro-
phin, etc. Cloning of large genomic DNA fragments into YACs has
been used in long-range physical mapping for gene cloning by pro-
duction of overlapping YAC clones or contigs.
Gene Cloning
If a gene in question is required in large quantities, the genetic engi-
neer inserts the gene he wishes to clone into carrier molecule capable
of passing through a membrane called “vector”. The vector, like a leg-
endary Trojan horse, penetrates the membrane of the host cell, carry-
ing with it the desired gene to be cloned. If the host cell accepts the
vector and the genetic command of the smuggled gene, it then starts
to copy this gene with its own synthesis apparatus. Under suitable con-
ditions, the host cell begins to produce protein molecules that corre-
spond to the genetic information provided by the cloned gene. Thus,
the cloned gene is “expressed” or translated into proteins.
Gene Bank
It is the collection of artificial, recombined (recombinant) DNA
molecules that taken together possess the complete genetic infor-
mation for a given organism. These DNA fragments are preserved
in the form of plasmids, either in bacterial cultures or in bacterio-
phages. “Gene bank” is constructed by cutting open the hereditary
material of a particular cell with the help of restriction enzymes.
The individual pieces of DNA are then incorporated into the bacte-
rial plasmids and introduced into the host bacteria. As long as the
bacterial culture thrives and grows (by reproduction), the plasmid
DNA and the foreign DNA inserted into it also increases. In case of
need, it can be isolated from the bacterial culture. This can be use-
ful in maintaining the species that are on the verge of being extinct.
Indian National Gene Bank

It provides facility for long-term ex situ conservation of base collec-
tions. It is set up by National Bureau of Plant Genetic Resources
(NBPGR). It has four components, which are as follows:
1. Seed repository: The seeds are dehydrated at 15°C and 15% RH

to around 5% moisture content, sealed in laminated aluminium
foils under vacuum and preserved at –20°C.
mebooksfree.com
50 Human฀Genetics
2. Tissue culture repository: Healthy (disease free) tissue cultures

of recalcitrant seeds (not able to withstand dehydration and low
temperature) and plant species, developed from meristem
explants are maintained using growth-limiting media and by
suitably sub-culturing them.
3. Cryopreservation facility: Samples of “synthetic seeds”, embryos,
gametes can be preserved by this technique. This is possible ei-
ther by immersion in liquid nitrogen (–196°C) or by keeping in
its vapour phase around –150°C. This is however according to the
protocols using computerised freezing–thawing rates and also
chemical cryoprotectants.
4. Clonal repository: Germplasm collections of vegetatively propa-
gated crops like ginger, turmeric, sweet potato and banana are
being maintained.
India is one of the biodiversity rich countries. The plant wealth in

India and in Indian Gene Bank can be imagined that it held 132,619
dehydrated, sealed seed samples till 1994. Accessions still under
multiplication and characterisation in NBPGR network recorded
that time were 120,226, and more than that 188,263 were still under
multiplication and upgrading at Indian PGR system.
Recombinant DNA
Among recent advances in the field of genetics, recombinant DNA
occupies a prominent position.
Definition
It is an artificially synthesised DNA that is constructed by insertion
of foreign DNA into DNA of an appropriate organism so that for-
eign DNA is replicated along with the host DNA.
Restriction enzyme
Restriction endonucleases are enzymes that can cleave DNA at spe-
cific sites. They were discovered by Hamilton Smith and his associ-
ates in 1970. Today more than 200 of them are known.
Vectors
They are used to carry foreign DNA fragments. They are as follows:
plasmids, phages, cosmids and yeast artificial chromosomes.
Plasmids
Plasmid is a circular extrachromosomal element in bacteria. It can
replicate independently. Plasmids vary in size. One of the plasmids
from E. coli known as pBR 322 is 4362 bp (base pair) in length. Plas-
mids have an advantage as a vector in that they have a limited
mebooksfree.com
number of unique restriction sites and can also carry resistance to

particular antibiotics. This character is used to identify recombinant
clones.
Phages (Bacteriophages)
These are viruses that infect bacteria and multiply within bacteria.
Subsequently, they cause lysis of bacterial cell. This releases a phage
progeny that then infects another bacteria. Phages have an advan-
tage over plasmids that much larger fragments of DNA can be
cloned in them. Plasmids can be used as vectors up to 8 kb (1 kb 5
1000 bp). Phages can be useful for fragments up to 15 kb; for larger
fragments of 35–45 kb, cosmids are used.
Cosmids
These are plasmids in which the maximum DNA has been removed to
permit largest possible insert for cloning but still have DNA essential
for in vitro packaging into phage particle. In short, they are phage–
plasmid hybrids capable of carrying relatively large DNA inserts.
Yeast artificial chromosomes
YACs consist of plasmid possessing DNA sequences essential for
(i) centromere formation and (ii) telomere formation and other
DNA sequences known as autonomous replication sequences. YACs
can incorporate DNA fragments up to 1000 kb (kilobase) in size.
The choice of vector used in cloning depends on number of factors
such as the restriction enzyme used and the size of DNA fragment
to be inserted.
Recombinant DNA procedure
It involves five steps (Fig. 3.11):
1. DNA is cut into fragments by restriction endonuclease enzyme.

2. Incorporation of these fragments in a suitable vector using DNA
ligase.
3. Transformation of host organism, e.g. E. coli by recombinant vec-
tor, i.e. the recombinant vector (plasmid) is reinserted into the
host cell by exposing the host (bacterial) cell to calcium salts.
This turns the cell permeable to plasmid.
4. The host cells containing vectors are put in a culture medium to
produce clones, i.e. obtain multiple copies of foreign DNA frag-
ments incorporated in recombinant vector.
5. Selection of clones possessing proper DNA fragment.
Applications of recombinant DNA technology
1. It gives us a rational approach to the understanding of molecu-
lar basis of numerous diseases, e.g. sickle cell disease, familial
mebooksfree.com
52 Human฀Genetics
Figure 3.11 Constructing recombinant plasmid and transformation of

host cell.
hypercholesterolaemia, thalassaemias, cystic fibrosis and Hun-

tington chorea, etc.
2. Using this technology, human proteins can be produced for
therapeutic purposes, e.g. insulin and growth hormone.
3. Production of proteins for vaccination, e.g. hepatitis B.
4. Proteins can be produced for diagnostic tests, e.g. AIDS test.
5. Gene therapy for sickle cell disease or thalassaemias or other diseases.
DNA probe
The process of making recombinant DNA involves the insertion of
a large number of random restriction fragments into plasmids. This
obviously makes it important to be able to recognise a particular
gene. It is possible, if mRNA of the desired type is available. With the
help of an enzyme, reverse transcriptase, a complementary DNA
(cDNA) can be transcribed from a known RNA. The enzyme, re-
verse transcriptase, is obtained from RNA tumour viruses. The final
product of the transcription is a radioactive cDNA molecule, also
referred to as DNA probe. The probe hybridises to the specific gene
or its mRNA under suitable conditions.
POLYMERASE CHAIN REACTION
The PCR was discovered by Kary Mullis and developed by Saiki and
others in 1985. It has revolutionised both the diagnostic as well as
mebooksfree.com
therapeutic ability of physicians. It has become a powerful tool in

the field of molecular biology. Before we turn to PCR, let us acquire
little background knowledge of DNA synthesis.
The DNA synthesis requires a template (to be copied), a
primer, which is extended as a newly synthesised DNA, dNTPs, Mg
and an enzyme—DNA polymerase. The DNA is synthesised by
polymerase action, i.e. by adding one nucleotide at a time and the
chain extends.
Primer: It is a short stretch of nucleotides having complementary
sequences. It attaches to a long template molecule at specific re-
gion. The 3’ end of the primer gets extended by addition of an ap-
propriate nucleotides, i.e. T (thymine) if the template has A (ade-
nine), G (guanine) if the template has C (cytosine). The 5’ end of
the primer remains fixed. The new DNA is synthesised only in 5’–3’
direction.
PCR: Polymerase chain reaction is an in vitro method of synthe-
sis of nucleic acids, wherein, a specific DNA segment is amplified
rapidly without concomitant replication of the rest of the DNA
molecule. Thus in PCR, a limited region of a DNA molecule is
amplified. Basic requirement for this assay is nucleotide sequence
information at two ends of the part to be amplified. Then a pair
of oligonucleotide primers (about 20–30 nucleotide long) are
then synthesised. One of them is complementary to upper/one
strand of DNA at one end and the other primer is complementary
to the other end of the lower/other strand of the DNA to be
amplified.
The reaction tube [containing test DNA, primer pair, dNTPs, Mg,
buffer and thermostable DNA polymerase (Taq polymerase) en-
zyme] is put in a thermal cycler that is programmed to carry out
amplification.
Standard Reaction
The reaction is conducted in 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes; the follow-
ing components are added and the reaction volume is made up to
100 µl.
1. Template (100 ng–1 µg DNA) ... 10 µl

2. Buffer (containing KCl, Tris-HCl, MgCl2
... 10 µl
elatine)
3. Primer 1 (20–50 pmol) ... 10 µl
4. Primer 2 (20–50 pmol) ... 10 µl
5. dNTP mix (200 µm of each dNTP) ... 10 µl
6. Taq polymerase (2.5 units) ... 0.5 µl
mebooksfree.com
54 Human฀Genetics
Two drops of mineral oil are then added to overlay the reaction
mixture to avoid evaporation.
Procedure
The amplification procedure involves three steps: (1) denaturation,
(2) annealing and (3) extension (Fig. 3.12).
1. Denaturation: Since the test DNA is double stranded, it has to be
converted into single stranded one. This is achieved by heating
the DNA at 92–95°C for about 30–60 seconds. This breaks the
hydrogen bonds between the complementary bases, thus separat-
ing the two strands. This does not damage the DNA in any way.
Figure 3.12 Schematic representation of polymerase chain reaction

(PCR).
mebooksfree.com
2. Annealing: The cycler is then set to a lower temperature i.e.

55–65°C for about 30–60 seconds. Since the primer concen-
tration is very high in the tube, the primer will anneal with
A5T and C5G base pairing, to the test DNA at the specified
locations (as per primer). The high concentration of the
primers prevents reannealing of the original (test) DNA
strands. The annealing temperature is critical and depends
upon the composition of the DNA sequence and the length of
primers.
3. Primer extension (DNA synthesis): In this step, the annealed
primers are extended. The DNA chain, as learnt earlier, grows in
5’–3’ direction. The nucleotides are added one at a time. The
nucleotide sequence of new DNA is decided by the sequence of
template DNA. Since the primers are designed to extend in op-
posite directions, the intervening DNA (between the two prim-
ers) is synthesised.
Usually this step is carried out at 72°C, because most of the com-
mercially available thermostable DNA polymerases have optimum
activity at this temperature. The incubation time at this temperature
depends upon how farther the primers are placed along the DNA
molecule.
These three steps make up one cycle in PCR reaction. At the
end of this, the original DNA molecule under consideration is
quantitatively doubled. The thermal cycler is programmed to re-
peat the cycle 25–30 times. With each cycle, the desired DNA
(between two primers) is doubled. Therefore, it is possible to
selectively amplify any given DNA several million times in few
hours.
Analysis of PCR Product

This is one of the most important steps. Sometimes, the primer/s
bind to non-specific locations if the annealing temperature is low-
ered, which favours annealing of mismatched bases. Analysis is ac-
complished as under:
•฀ Estimation of Size: The PCR product is subjected to the agarose
gel electrophoresis and its size is estimated by running known
DNA size markers. The newly synthesised DNA should be of the
size between the extreme ends of primers. Mostly it is sufficient to
conclude between the positive and negative results.
•฀ Nested PCR: The PCR product can be reamplified using a new
primer pair that is located within the ends of the first primer pair.
This PCR product is shorter than the first PCR product.
•฀ Hybridisation: A short oligonucleotide may be synthesised, which
is complementary to one of the DNA strands of the PCR product.
mebooksfree.com
56 Human฀Genetics
Such oligonucleotide is radiolabelled, and the hybridisation

signal can then be obtained on autoradiography.
•฀ Restriction Enzyme Mapping: The PCR product may be subjected
to restriction digestion in order to confirm the identity of the
product. This also gives us information regarding RE site gained
or lost due to mutation/s.
•฀ Cloning and Sequencing: Alternatively, the PCR product can be
cloned in an appropriate vector and its authenticity can be veri-
fied by nucleotide sequencing. The sequencing of PCR product
can be done even without cloning.
Advantages of PCR
1. The technique is rapid as well as sensitive.
2. A small quantity of template DNA (5–10 ng) is also sufficient.
3. A highly purified DNA sample is not essential.
4. Number of samples can be used e.g. peripheral blood, bone
chips, single sperm, hair follicle and even paraffin embedded
tissues.
Problems of PCR
False Positive Reaction: Any contamination in the sample can be
amplified giving false positive signal. This could be from the previ-
ous reaction or from the exogenous source.
False Negative Reaction: This may be due to very low yield or the
absence of the specific product. The conditions of PCR amplifica-
tion may be altered to overcome this. If essential, even the sequence
of the primers can be changed.
Applications of PCR
It can be used in:
1. Diagnosis
2. Therapeutics
3. Criminology, etc.
Amplification Refractory Mutation System

(ARMS) PCR
It is a special type of PCR in which the 3’ end base of the primer is
mutant specific. The sequence of the primer is selected in such a
way that its 3’ end base matches with the mutant base under ques-
tion. Thus two primers, a mutant and a normal, are used.
mebooksfree.com
SOUTHERN BLOT TECHNIQUE
It is used in DNA analysis. The technique was evolved in 1975 by

Edwin Southern at Edinburgh. The steps involved in this technique
are as follows (Fig. 3.13):
1. DNA is cleaved by restriction enzymes.
2. DNA fragments are separated by agarose gel electrophoresis.
Small fragments move faster than the large ones.
3. DNA is then denatured with alkali. This makes the DNA single
stranded.
4. Denatured DNA (single stranded) is then transferred on nitro-
cellulose filter by blotting.
5. Now to identify and localise a particular fragment on the filter, a
radioactive labelled DNA probe p32 is used.
6. Probe is allowed to hybridise with DNA fragments in “Southern
blot” and subsequently autoradiographed (Fig. 3.13).
Figure 3.13 The Southern blot technique.
mebooksfree.com
58 Human฀Genetics
NORTHERN BLOTTING
In this technique, mRNA is isolated and run on an electrophoretic

gel and is transferred to a filter. This is called Northern blotting.
Hybridisation of the Northern blot with a radiolabelled probe allows
determination of the size as well as the quantity of the mRNA tran-
script. Some single gene disorders in which no mutation has been
identified in exons (coding sequences), an alteration in the size of
mRNA transcript possibly goes in favour of mutation in non-coding
regions (introns) of the gene, like at splice junction of an intron–
exon border.
DNA FINGERPRINTING TECHNOLOGY
A British geneticist Dr. Alec Jeffreys pioneered DNA fingerprinting

technology in 1985. It has now become a routine method for crime
investigations in all parts of the world. It is used for identification of
the criminals. Using DNA from the suspect and from the site of
crime, if the two match perfectly, one can conclusively say that the
suspect under consideration is the criminal. However, there are two
prime questions before an ordinary person accepts the statement.
The first, how reliable is the technology and secondly, how fool
proof are its conclusions. To answer these questions, one can reca-
pitulate some well-known facts.
People differ from each other only at about 1% nucleotide loca-
tions. In human genome, there are over 3 billion nucleotides. Even
1% of 3.3 billion amounts to 33 million such locations. Considering
that at each of these locations, there are four alternative nucleotides
that may occur. Further, one knows that there are two DNA strands
that make up DNA of a person. Making all the permutations and
combinations, one can safely assert that the complete DNA sequenc-
ing of any two individuals on the earth cannot be identical unless
they are identical twins.
Hypervariable Regions of the Genome. In our genome, there are
hundreds of specific regions. At each of these, the nucleotide ar-
rangement differs from individual to individual. Literally, thousands
of possible types could be observed. With this technology, one can
reliably type individuals at several such regions either sequentially
or simultaneously. Combining these observations, one gets almost
an error-free DNA profile to identify an individual.
Introduction of DNA typing in courts rests upon similar genetic
principles. It has high level of discrimination among individuals and
can be performed with many source materials, e.g. bones, skin, hair
follicles, saliva, epithelial swabs, etc. Therefore, it is superior to
mebooksfree.com
traditional blood typing. Stability of DNA molecules allows genetic

typing even from fossilised or decomposed materials. This has
helped in establishing identity from fragmented material from the
war victims, exhumed bodies or even from mummified bodies. Iden-
tification of members of Czar family through DNA typing of exca-
vated bodies from the burial ground is a glaring example of this
technology.
Sir Alec Jeffrey’s discovery was instrumental in determining the
nature of gene loci that can be subjected to such typing offering
higher degree of discrimination. In our genome, short stretch of
nucleotides are repeated one after another several times. The stretch
can be as short as a single base pair or can be long enough to be of
hundreds of nucleotides. What differs between people is the number
of repeats of such sequences. The hypervariability (extreme varia-
tion) comes from how many nucleotides are within a single repeat
and how many times this unit is repeated close to each other.
In 1970s, an approach was developed according to which it is
possible to shear a long DNA molecule so that each end of such
repeat regions have signatures, which indicate the exact/specific
location of the cut DNA molecule. It is called digestion, with spe-
cific restriction enzymes that cut DNA molecule into small number
of nucleotides (4–6 bp) found in a specific order. Since 99% of the
nucleotides in the genome are invariable between people, it is pos-
sible to ascertain which restriction enzyme would cut the DNA at
unique positions in all the people. The DNA molecule (genomic)
when digested with specific restriction enzyme, the digestion prod-
uct consists of thousands of pieces bearing signature of the specific
recognition sequence of nucleotides, characteristic of the enzyme
used for digestion. The pieces thus obtained are sorted out by size
in an electric field through the technique called electrophoresis.
Synthetically produced short nucleotide sequences/probes unique
to specific regions of genome are now available. Using them for
hybridisation with DNA fragments of specific regions, one can iso-
late regions of specific interest. This is Southern blot technique,
named after Dr. Edwin Southern. It detects variation (polymor-
phism) of restriction enzyme digested DNA lengths and is called
Southern blot RFLP analysis.
The pairing task (hybridisation) can be accomplished by using
either multilocus probe that will identify simultaneously repeat re-
gions from a large number of genomic regions or single locus
probe, identifying only a single region. Probe is radioactively la-
belled, so that it can be observed on autoradiography. Each frag-
ment thus derived has a repeat region of variable number of tandem
repeats (VNTRs). They are flanked on each side by unique DNA
sequences of constant lengths. The size variations of the fragments
are indicators of how many repeat units such regions contain. This
mebooksfree.com
60 Human฀Genetics
technique needs large DNA strands so that sheared DNA molecules

are intact. However, in heavily decomposed body or an old and
badly preserved one, it is difficult to obtain large intact DNA frag-
ment. Solution being simple, DNA extracted from even a single cell
may be subjected to PCR amplification. It needs artificially pro-
duced DNA templates or PCR primers. PCR product is then sub-
jected to Southern blot RFLP analysis, to know number of repeat
units and the sequence composition of such repeated regions.
In one case in Finland, the victim’s body was decomposed and the
DNA sample from the anal swab was not suitable for RFLP analysis.
The geneticist who helped the investigation in this case recovered
small quantity of DNA from saliva residues on a cigarette butt and
rim of the wine glass. The DNA samples were subjected to PCR am-
plification. The PCR product was typed for several STR markers to
show match with the blood from the suspect.
As against single locus typing with RFLP/PCR-based analysis, if
the same analysis is done with multilocus probes, the DNA pro-
files on an autoradiograph appear like bar codes on tags of items
in departmental store. Matching of individuals can then be done
by the extent to which the bands are shared. The perfect match-
ing of all fragment sizes indicates identical origin of DNA. A par-
tial band sharing implies their biological relationship. Since even
a single multilocus probe usually reveals many bands, the chance
of establishing identity from perfectly matching parallels are
similar to that of the conventional fingerprinting. It is for this
reason that Sir Alec Jeffrey in his paper in 1985 coined “DNA fin-
gerprinting”.
Applications
1. DNA fingerprinting has been widely used in forensic science.
2. Number of genetic disorders are now recognised by this technol-
ogy before their clinical onset.
3. Tissue matching, essential before transplantation, can be done
with this technique.
4. The entire Human Genome Project relies upon these techniques
to find gene locations.
5. Gene therapy, the future modality of treatment, also rests upon
the fidelity and reliability of these techniques.
DNA SEQUENCING
Determination of the nucleotide sequence of a DNA fragment is

called DNA sequencing. Commonly used approach being dideoxy
chain termination method. It involves making single stranded DNA
mebooksfree.com
templates of DNA fragment under consideration. This is done by

using a special phage vector. Add on aliquot of this template DNA
to four different reaction mixtures that contain DNA polymerase, a
short primer sequence and four deoxynucleotides that are radio-
labelled. One of the four dideoxynucleotide is added to each of the
four separate reaction mixtures. The dideoxynucleotide competes
with the respective deoxynucleotide inhibiting the DNA polymerase.
This leads to DNA fragments of different lengths that terminate in
their respective dideoxynucleotide.
When the products are run on a gel, a ladder of DNA sequences
of differing lengths ending in the respective dideoxynucleotide is
produced. The DNA sequence complementary to the single-
stranded DNA template can be read directly from autoradiography
of the gel.
GENE CHIP
Gene chips are devices not larger than postage stamps. They are
based on a glass substrate wafer and contain many tiny cells, about
400,000 is common. Each holds DNA from a different human
gene. The array of cells makes it possible to carry out large number
of genetic tests on a sample at one time. At the moment, the de-
vices are used in pharmaceutical laboratories to investigate which
genes are involved in various normal and disease processes and to
speed up the slow and painstaking process of finding new drugs. It
is hoped that it will soon be possible for doctors to use these de-
vices to run simple tests on patients during examinations in order
to diagnose diseases with a genetic base or to find a treatment tai-
lored to an individual’s genetic makeup. The concept is seen as
having vast potential, and more than a dozen firms are trying out
various cost-effective ways of making the chips. The devices are
often called DNA chips, or generally by the term biochips. They are
more formally referred to as microarrays, and the process of testing
the gene patterns of an individual is sometimes called microarray
profiling.
One of the first applications of high-powered “gene chip” tech-
nology is in an important psychiatric syndrome, in which scientists
reported the discovery of genes that may prove key to understand-
ing schizophrenia.
People, not populations, will be treated with tailor-made drugs
that suit their genetic makeup; gene chips will identify who is at
more risk of disease, so they can have more frequent checkups;
similar chips will distinguish one type of cancer from another, so the
best treatment is chosen; gene transplants will be used to correct
mutations that cause metabolic disorders.
mebooksfree.com
62 Human฀Genetics
HUMAN GENOME PROJECT
It is one of the most exciting and widely publicized project in the

history of biomedical research. It was initiated in October 1990, with
three major goals:
1. Genetic marker map
2. Physical map
3. Entire 3 billion base pairs sequence of the human genome.
The marker map was completed many years ago. It includes many
thousand polymorphisms such as
a. RFLPS – Restriction fragment length polymorphisms
b. STRPS – Short tandem repeat polymorphisms
c. VNTRS – Variable number of tandem repeats
Among these, useful polymorphisms are placed at an interval of
1 cM (centimorgan) – a distance between 2 loci, named after
T.H. Morgan). In addition about 4 million SNPs (single nucleotide
polymorphisms) have been found in the entire genome. They have
lower mutation rate than polymorphisms. They are amenable to
computerized automated processing and hence useful in human
genetic mapping. The second goal of physical map of known STS
(sequence tagged sites) placed at 100 KB intervals through the en-
tire genome was also complete. These were especially useful in posi-
tional cloning experiments.
The third and the most important goal was to complete genome
sequence. This was followed in both public and private sectors.
In February 2001, both the groups announced completion of 90%
sequencing with high degree of accuracy. This “rough draft” of
genome contained most of our genes. Finally in 2003, complete and
highly accurate sequence was announced i.e. completion of human
genome project. This happens to be exactly 50 years after Watson
and Crick described the structure of DNA.
With completion of Human Genome Project, the positional clon-
ing is now possible with existing physical map. Numerous disease
genes have been identified. Cloning of disease genes has improved
genetic diagnosis and has also a potential to manifests gene prod-
ucts by recombinant DNA technology. This will provide improved
health care and more specific drugs and gene therapy.
The complete genome sequence will provide ultimate genetic blue-
print of the human being. Using similar technique of sequencing we
can study medically significant bacteria and viruses. Sequencing of
experimental organisms e.g. yeast, fruit fly, mice, rats can be done.
Homology between sequence of these organisms and the human
genome will offer us better understanding human disease genes.
mebooksfree.com
In short completion of human genome project is the beginning

of new era in the biomedical research.
Summary
Structure of Nucleic Acid: It consists of long chains of molecules called
nucleotides; each having nitrogenous base, a sugar moiety and phosphorus
molecule. The bases are of two types: Purine and pyrimidine. Purine bases
are adenine and guanine, and pyrimidine bases are thymine, cytosine and
uracil.
There are two types of nucleic acids—DNA and RNA. DNA has sugar
called deoxyribose and is mainly found in nucleus. RNA contains sugar
called ribose, found mainly in nucleolus and cytoplasm.
Among pyrimidine bases, DNA has thymine and RNA has uracil; other
bases are common.
DNA Structure (Watson–Crick Model): JD Watson, FHC Crick and MHF
Wilkins suggested that DNA consists of two chains of nucleotides. The
chains are held together by hydrogen bonds. The chains have polarity and
they are said to be anti-parallel. The bases of DNA pair with specificity. Ad-
enine pairs with thymine and cytosine with guanine. During division, each
strand builds up its complement, i.e. replication occurs.
Types of DNA
• Unique sequences: These are genes coding for specific proteins.
• Satellite DNA: It consists of short tandem repeats coding for ribosomal
and transfer RNAs. These are clustered in heterochromatic regions of
chromosomes 1, 9, 16 and long arm of Y.
• Interspersed repetitive DNA sequences: These are of two types—
(i) short interspersed repetitive sequences of about 300 bp (base pairs) called
“Alu repeats”; and (ii) long interspersed repetitive sequences or LI family
about 6000 bp long. Their function is not known. Both Alu and LI family
sequences have been implicated in mutations in inherited human diseases.
Mitochondrial DNA: It is circular, designated as mtDNA. It codes for two
types of ribosomal RNAs, protein subunits of some enzymes, e.g. cyto-
chrome B, cytochrome oxidase.
Chromosome: “Solenoid model” proposed by Finch and Klug. It is thought
that there may be several orders of DNA coiling such as—
• Primary coiling of DNA double helix.
• Secondary coiling around histone beads, i.e. nucleosomes.
• Nucleosomes undergo tertiary coiling to form chromatin ibres.
• Chromatin ibres form loops.
• Loops further coil to form chromosomes.
Triplet Code: The sequence of three bases that codes for an amino acid is
called codon or triplet code. Four bases A,T, G and C make 43 5 64 com-
binations. In mutation, a particular code may be read as “nonsense”—no
amino acid shall be coded or as “missense”—a different amino acid shall be
coded and abnormal protein shall be produced.
UAA and UAG are called “Ochre” and “Amber”; they do not code for any
amino acid.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
64 Human฀Genetics
Summary—cont’d
Ribonucleic Acid (RNA): Types—messenger (mRNA), transfer (tRNA) and
ribosomal (rRNA).
Messenger RNA and Heterogeneous Nuclear RNA (hnRNA): Primary
product of transcription is hnRNA. It has “exon”-coding sequences and
“introns”-noncoding sequences. The latter are removed and the former, i.e.
exons, are spliced together to form mRNA. It then acquires methylated cap
at 5’ end and poly A tail at 3’ end, and subsequently comes out of nucleus
and reaches ribosomes in cytoplasm.
Transfer RNA (tRNA): It is single stranded and is folded forming hairpins. It
has three loops, “Clover leaf Model”—TC loop (containing pseudouracil
residue); DHU loop (containing dihydrouridine); and Anticodon loop (contain-
ing specific triplet complementary to codon of mRNA).
Ribosomal RNA (rRNA): Ribosomes occur as tiny particles in two sizes 60s
and 80s. Ribosome has rRNA and ribosomal protein. They form string-like
structure of polyribosome. Ribosome has two subunits. The rRNA in sub-
units of ribosome is highly folded. Its 3’ end has sequence complementary
to mRNA ribosome binding site. The 5S rRNA in larger subunit of ribosome
has sequence complementary to the TC loop sequence of tRNA. This allows
binding of tRNA to ribosomes.
Transcription: A process of information transfer from DNA to mRNA; it in-
volves the following—
• The two strands of DNA separate.
• Against each single strand of DNA, mRNA is synthesised. This occurs
with complementary base pairing, i.e. cytosine pairs with guanine, thy-
mine with adenine; however, adenine pairs with uracil.
• mRNA migrates to cytoplasm.
Translation: A process of translating information from mRNA into protein
synthesis and involves the following—
• mRNA gets associated with ribosomes (sites of protein synthesis).
• mRNA serves as a template.
• Amino acid to be incorporated is activated by ATP. tRNA receives this
activated amino acid. tRNA (with activated amino acid) has at its other
end triplet complementary to mRNA. Thus, mRNA triplet through tRNA
triplet picks up required amino acid.
• The ribosome with tRNA 1 amino acid moves along mRNA, linking amino
acids in polypeptide chain.
Gene
• It is thought that there are 50,000–100,000 DNA sequences that code for
RNA or protein products.
• The structure of human globin gene presents three exons (coding se-
quences) and two introns (non-coding sequences). At 5’ end, it has CAT
box—70 bp upstream from the first exon and TATA box—located be-
tween CAT box and site initiation of transcription. At 3’ (downstream), it
shows sequence AATAAA, i.e. signal for addition of poly-A tail.
Generalisations:
• Genes are coding sequences split by intervening sequences.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
• The exon–intron pattern of split genes is conserved during evolution.
• Alterations in exons occur slowly at the rate of 1029 substitutions per
codon per generation.
HTF islands: These are methylation-free HpaII tiny fragments called HTF
(HpaII tiny fragments) islands. They contain one or more CpG dinucleotides
near transcription initiation site at 5’ end of many genes.
Jumping genes: Discovered by Barbara McClintock, these are also called
transposons; they can jump to and fro within a chromosome or to the adja-
cent one. In bacteria, they cause rapid spread of antibiotic resistance genes.
Pseudogenes: These are strikingly similar to functional genes, but are not
transcribed.
Operon: Postulated by Jacob and Monod; the concept is that there are
control genes such as regulator genes and operator genes. They regulate
the action of structural genes, i.e. amount of protein produced by gene.
Mutation: It is change in sequence of genomic DNA. It can be—
i) Single base substitution or point mutation.
ii) Deletion or insertion: They may cause “frame shift”.
iii) Chain termination mutations: May increase or reduce the amount of pro-
tein product.
iv) Splice mutations: Mutations involving excision of introns and splicing of
exons.
v) Mutations of regulatory sequences.
Gene Mapping
Chromosome Mapping: Assigning a particular gene to a specific chromo-
some.
DNA Mapping: Relationship of flanking DNA sequence polymorphisms.
Pulsed Field Gel Electrophoresis (PFGE): Helps in separation of larger DNA
fragments (2 million bp) and their mapping.
YAC Contigs: Yeast artificial chromosome (YAC) helps in cloning of larger
DNA fragments, e.g. genes of cystic fibrosis, neurofibromatosis, dystrophin,
etc.
Gene Cloning: Desired gene is inserted into the host cell through the vector
(carrier molecule). The host cell starts to copy this gene and begins to pro-
duce protein molecules.
Gene Bank: It is a collection of artificial, recombined (recombinant) DNA
molecules.
Indian National Gene Bank: Set up by National Bureau of Plant Genetic
Resources (NBPGR). It has four complements—
i) Seed repository
ii) Tissue culture repository
iii) Cryopreservation facility
iv) Clonal repository
Recombinant DNA
i) It is artificially synthesised DNA.
ii) It is constructed with the help of restriction enzymes and vectors.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
66 Human฀Genetics
Summary—cont’d
Vectors used are plasmids, phages, cosmids, YACs, etc.
Steps:
a. DNA is cut with restriction endonuclease enzyme.
b. Fragments are incorporated into vector.
c. Recombinant vector is inserted into host cell.
d. These host cells are cultured to produce clones.
e. Selection of clones with proper DNA fragments.
Applications of recombinant DNA:
a. To understand molecular basis of diseases.
b. Production of insulin and other such products.
c. Production of proteins for diagnostic test, e.g. AIDS test.
d. Production of proteins for vaccination.
Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR): It involves—
i) Denaturation of DNA: Converting it into single stranded (92–95°C)
ii) Annealing: Primer anneals at speciic sites (55–65°C).
iii) Primer extension: Nucleotides are added, one at a time (72°C).
Analysis of PCR Product: Estimation of size, hybridisation, restriction
enzyme mapping, cloning and sequencing.
i) Merits: (a) Sensitive; (b) small amount of DNA is required; (c) sample can
be blood, bone chip, hair follicle, sperm or any other tissue.
ii) Demerits: (a) False positive reaction or (b) false negative reaction.
Applications of PCR: It is used in diagnostics, therapeutics, criminology, etc.
Southern Blot: In this, DNA is cleaved, the fragments are separated by
electrophoresis and DNA is denatured (turned single stranded). This DNA
is taken to nitrocellulose filter by blotting. Radioactive probe (P32) is used
to localise particular fragment. Probe hybridises with DNA fragments to be
followed by autoradiography.
Northern Blot: In this, mRNA is isolated and run on an electrophoretic gel
and is transferred to a filter. Its hybridisation with a radiolabelled probe allows
determination of the size and quantity of mRNA transcript.
DNA Fingerprinting: Pioneered by Alec Jeffreys; it forms a powerful tool in
criminology, comparing the DNA of the suspect with the sample collected at
the site of crime. It is helpful in the diagnosis of genetic disorders on sub-
clinical level. It helps in tissue matching before transplantation.
Gene Chip: These are devices as small as postage stamps, based on a
glass substrate; these have many tiny cells that hold DNA from different hu-
man genes. This enables to carry out large number of genetic tests on a
sample at one time. They have wide applications in pharmaceutical industry.
They are more formally called microarrays.
Human Genome Project: It started in 1990 and was completed in 2003.
There were three major goals of the project:
i) Genetic marker map
ii) Physical map
iii) Sequencing of all 3 billion base pair
Completion of Human Genome Project marked beginning of new era in the
field of biomedical research.
mebooksfree.com
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What is operon?
2. What is mutation?
3. What is point mutation?
4. Is the following statement true—”A normal female is mosaic”?
5. What is nucleotide?
6. The DNA has all of the following bases except:
a. Adenine b. Uracil
c. Guanine d. Thymine
7. Which one of the following is not a pyrimidine base?
a. Adenine b. Uracil
c. Cytosine d. Thymine
8. What is triplet code?
9. Name different types of RNA.
10. What is hnRNA?
11. What is transcription?
12. What is translation?
13. What is gene?
14. What are jumping genes?
15. What are pseudogenes?
16. What is “frame shift mutation”?
17. What does PFGE stand for?
18. What is recombinant DNA?
19. What is plasmid?
20. All of the following are vectors used to carry DNA fragments except:
a. Plasmid b. Yeast artificial chromosomes
c. Cosmids d. cDNA
21. What does PCR stand for?
mebooksfree.com
Chromosomal
Aberrations

Genesis and effect of
• Numerical and structural aberrations
• Sex chromosomal abnormalities
• Down syndrome, Turner syndrome, Klinefelter syndrome
.
Aneuploidy, Trisomies, Hermaphroditism, Chimaera
,'
The normal chromosomal complement in a male is 46,XY and in

a female 46,XX. Any deviation either in number or structure of
the chromosomes is referred to as chromosomal aberration. In this
context, it will be worthwhile to note certain terms.
Diploid: Refers to normal chromosome number in human beings,

i.e. 2n = 46.
Haploid: Refers to n = 23; it is found in gametes.
Polyploid: Multiple of n, i.e. 23 such as triploid = 69 or tetraploid =
92 chromosomes. These are referred as polyploidy.
Aneuploid: Any number that is not exactly a multiple of 'n', i.e. 23,
such as 2n - 1 or 2n + l; the former is found in Turner syndrome
(45,XO) and the latter in Down syndrome (47 chromosomes with
21 trisomy). It is to be noted that the monosomy involving auto-
somes is lethal. The only exception being a rare instance where
an infant with monosomy 21 survived.
Genesis of "Aneuploidy ": It results from non-disjunction during meio-
sis. This causes unequal distribution of chromosomes in daughter
cells. Instead of a member of homologous chromosome pair, the
pair goes to one daughter cell, and the other daughter cell is de-
void of this chromosome. When this gamete with an abnormal
68
Chapter 4 — Chromosomal Aberrations 69
Figure 4.1 An outcome of non-disjunction during gametogenesis.
number of chromosomes 2n – 1 (22) or 2n 1 1 (24) combines

with another normal gamete, the resultant abnormality is aneu-
ploidy, like 45,XO (Turner syndrome) or 47,XXY (Klinefelter
syndrome; Fig. 4.1). In the same manner, trisomies of autosomes
are also formed, e.g. trisomy 21 or Down syndrome. Non-disjunction
may occur at first or second meiotic division. It can also occur during
cleavage (i.e. after zygote formation) resulting in trisomic and mono-
somic cell lines. An autosomal monosomy, however, does not persist
but trisomy may continue.
STRUCTURAL ABERRATIONS
Structural rearrangements in chromosomes essentially result from

breaks followed by reconstitution. The factors responsible for
these are mainly (i) ionizing radiations, (ii) chemical agents and
(iii) viruses.
Structural aberrations are classified as under:
1. Stable, e.g. deletions, inversions, translocations, isochromosomes, etc.
2. Unstable, e.g. dicentric, ring chromosomes.
Among these, the aberrations that may be transmitted from parent
to child include inversions or translocations.
Deletion
This involves loss of a part of chromosome. It is of two types
(Fig. 4.2):
1. Terminal deletion
2. Interstitial deletion
mebooksfree.com
70 Human Genetics
Figure 4.2 Chromosomal aberration – deletion: (A) Terminal deletion of

P arm of chromosome. (B) Interstitial deletion of P arm of chromosome,
e.g. Wilms tumour with aniridia (11p-).
Terminal Deletion
It involves a single break, and the terminal part of the chromosome
is lost, e.g. Cri-du-chat syndrome.
Cri-du-chat syndrome or 5p-: This results from the deletion of the
short arm of chromosome 5. It was first described by Lejeune and his
associates. It is called Cri-du-chat syndrome because the cry of affected
baby mimics mewing of a cat. Typical facial appearance, microcephaly,
hypertelorism and anti-mongoloid slant of palpebral fissures form its
classical features. Low-set ears, micrognathia are also found (Fig. 4.3).
Interstitial Deletion
It involves two breaks, and the intervening portion of the chromo-
some is lost, e.g. Prader–Willi syndrome (PWS), Wilms tumour with
aniridia. They are called microdeletion syndromes.
Figure 4.3 Photographs showing Cri-du-chat syndrome.
mebooksfree.com
Microdeletion syndromes
In the so-called microdeletion syndromes like in PWS, there is dele-
tion of 3–4 million base pairs (3–4 Mb) of chromosome when this
deletion is inherited from father. The phenotype presents short
stature, hypotonia, obesity, small hands and feet with mild to moder-
ate mental retardation and hypogonadism.
If the deletion is inherited from the mother, the child develops
“Angelman syndrome”, which is characterised by severe mental
retardation, seizures and an ataxic gait. Now the question is—
why there is difference. The portion of the chromosome 15
involved in both the syndromes is referred to as the “critical
region”. To explain this difference between paternal and maternal
inheritance of the deletion (involving chromosome 15) leading to
two different entities, we need to understand what is “genomic
imprinting”.
Genomic imprinting refers to differential activation of genes de-
pending upon the parent from whom they are inherited. The tran-
scriptionally inactive genes are said to be “imprinted”. In the critical
region of chromosome 15, several genes are transcriptionally active
only on chromosome inherited from father, and they are inactive on
the chromosome inherited from mother. Similarly, other genes in
this region are transcriptionally active only on the chromosome
inherited from mother and inactive on the paternal chromosome.
This means, if the single “active” copy of these genes is lost due to
deletion, then no gene product is produced, resulting into disease.
With the advent of high resolution banding (HRB), it is now
possible to identify number of such deletions that were missed
microscopically before HRB. Similarly, FISH techniques have
made it possible to detect submicroscopic deletions known as
microdeletions. There are often less than 5 Mb. For example,
PWS was described in 1950; however, it was in 1981 that the pre-
cise location of the defect was identified with advanced banding
techniques. In 50% cases, it involves deletion of paternal chro-
mosome bands 15q, 11–q13. Microdeletion of the maternally-
derived chromosome 15 produces genetically distinct Angelman
syndrome. Table 4.1 shows microdeletion syndromes; however,
some of these may be caused by single gene mutations in the
chromosome regions.
Translocation
They are of two types (Fig. 4.4), which are described as follows:
1. Robertsonian translocation: This involves two acrocentric chro-

mosomes, for example, D/G translocation. The short arm of
mebooksfree.com
72 Human Genetics
Table 4.1 Microdeletion Syndromes
Chromosomal
Syndrome Deletion Clinical Features
Angelman 15q11–13 Mental retardation, ataxia, seizures
Prader–Willi 15q11–13 Mental retardation, obesity, short stature,

hypotonia, small hand and feet, typical
facies
Miller–Dieker 17q13.3 Lizencephaly, characteristic facies
Wilms tumour 11q13 Mental retardation, aniridia, predispo-

with aniridia sition to Wilms tumour, genital defects
Rubinstein–Taybi 16q13.3 Mental retardation, characteristic facies,

vertebral abnormalities, pulmonary
stenosis, “butterfly” vertebrae
Langer–Giedion 8q24 Characteristic facies, sparse hair,

exostosis, mental retardation
Smith–Magenis 17q11.2 Mental retardation, hyperactivity

dysmorphic features, self-destructive
behaviour
Figure 4.4 Types of translocations.
a D group chromosome (13–15) fuses with the short arm of a

G group chromosome 21. The fragment formed by their fusion
is lost. This process is also called centric fusion. This type of trans-
location is found in about 4% of Down syndrome cases. Almost
50% of such translocation Down syndrome cases have parents as
mebooksfree.com
translocation carriers (balanced translocation). Another 50%

account for a de novo event in the baby. Recurrence risk is high
in the former and low in the latter.
2. Reciprocal translocation: In this, there is an exchange of chromo-
some material distal to breaks, and it involves non-homologous
chromosomes. This amounts to a balanced translocation, and no
chromosome material is lost. This, however, leads to the produc-
tion of abnormal gametes presenting an unbalanced chromo-
somal complement, which in turn results in either spontaneous
abortion or a baby with congenital malformations. In short, in
case of repeated spontaneous abortions or a child with unbal-
anced translocation one can think of parents/couple having a
balanced translocation carrier state.
Insertion
It is a rare non-reciprocal type of translocation that involves three
breaks. A fragment is transferred from a chromosome to a non-
homologous chromosome. Two breaks release the fragment from
one chromosome and one break occurs in another chromosome to
admit this fragment (Fig. 4.5).
Inversion
It is of two types—pericentric inversion and paracentric inversion. Inver-
sion involves two breaks along the chromosome. In pericentric inver-
sion, both the arms p and q are involved, while in paracentric inversion
only one arm either p or q is involved. Inversion does not give rise to
abnormal phenotype in that individual. However, during meiosis ab-
normal gametes are formed giving rise to abnormal progeny.
Figure 4.5 Structural aberrations in chromosomes: (A) Insertion, (B) Peri-

centric inversion, (C) Paracentric inversion. X, Y, Z in (A) indicate sites of
break.
mebooksfree.com
74 Human Genetics
Isochromosome
This involves abnormal split along the centromere leading to separa-
tion of arms. For example, i (Xq), i.e. isochromosome X (Fig. 4.6).
It is found in some of the Turner syndrome patients.
Ring Chromosome
It involves two breaks at the terminal portions of the chromosome
followed by fusion of the cut ends. This is found in about one-fifth
of the cases of Turner syndrome (Fig. 4.7).
Factors Playing Role in Chromosomal

Aberrations
1. Maternal age: Advanced maternal age (above 35 years) is one of
the significant factors associated with Down syndrome. It is be-
lieved to be responsible for non-disjunction during meiosis I.
Figure 4.6 Formation of isochromosome.
Figure 4.7 Formation of ring chromosome.
mebooksfree.com
This results in trisomy 21 (Down syndrome). Some studies indi-

cate a possible role of late paternal age in the aetiology of Down
syndrome.
2. Non-disjunction gene: The possibility of such a gene in human
beings is being thought over. “Non-disjunction gene”, however, oc-
curs in other organisms. It may be responsible for non-disjunction
in humans too.
3. Radiation: In 1977, Uchida presented data showing a correlation
between radiation and non-disjunction in experimental animals.
Various studies have indicated that radiation certainly increases
frequency of Down syndrome.
4. Chromosomal abnormality: A balanced translocation in parents
may result in an offspring with chromosomal aberration.
5. Autoimmune disorders: Though their precise role in the patho-
genesis of non-disjunction is not very clear, it is believed that
there exists a correlation between them. An association of high
titre of thyroid autoantibody in mothers and Down syndrome in
their children indicates the role of autoimmune disease in non-
disjunction.
Now, we shall consider a few classical clinical syndromes presenting
chromosomal aberration. Basically, this may involve an autosome or
sex chromosome. Among several conditions identified so far, we shall
consider only those that are relatively common. Table 4.2 shows chro-
mosomal abnormalities in some well-recognised clinical patterns.
AUTOSOMAL ABNORMALITIES
Autosomal monosomies are fatal and such conceptus ends in abor-

tion. Autosomal trisomies involving chromosome 13, 18 and 21
form well-recognised clinical entities and
have been described in following pages.
Down Syndrome (Trisomy 21,

Mongolism)
It was first identified by Langdon Down
in 1866. However, the chromosomal de-
fect was unidentified till 1959. In this
year, Lejeune and his associates found
that patients with Down syndrome have
47 chromosomes instead of the normal
46. The extra chromosome was identified
from the “G” group. It was designated as
chromosome 21, a small acrocentric (Attributed to: St. George’s
chromosome. University of London.)
mebooksfree.com
76 Human Genetics
Table 4.2 Chromosomal abnormalities in some

well-recognised clinical patterns
Chromosomal
Syndrome Abnormality Clinical Manifestations
Trisomy
Down Trisomy 21 Mental retardation, hypotonia, simian

syndrome crease and characteristic facies
Edward Trisomy 18 Mental and motor retardation, microgna-

syndrome thia, “rocker bottom feet”, congenital
heart disease
Patau Trisomy 13 Mental retardation, microcephaly, mi-

syndrome crophthalmia, cleft-lip/palate, polydactyly
Trisomy 8 Clinodactyly, other skeletal deformities,

strabismus, moderate mental retardation
Deletions
Wolf–Hirschhorn 4p- Mental retardation, epilepsy, cleft lip/

syndrome palate, coloboma, hypospadias
Cri-du-chat 5p- Mental retardation, microcephaly,

syndrome hypertelorism, cry like mewing of cat
De Grouchy 18q- “Carp-mouth”, mental retardation,

syndrome abnormal ears and tapering fingers
De Grouchy 18p- Mental retardation, dental decay, ocular

syndrome and CNS abnormalities
Ring 21r Anti-mongoloid slant of eyes, hypertonia,

chromosome micrognathia, growth retardation and
Anti-mongolism skeletal abnormalities
Clinical features
Mental retardation forms one of the predominant features in Down
syndrome. The IQ level ranges between 25 and 50. Other features
include small stature, hypotonia of muscles and brachycephaly with
flat occiput. The ears are low set and malformed, and the eyes show
epicanthal folds producing a characteristic mongoloid slant; there
may be nystagmus and the iris shows speckles. The flat nose presents
a low nasal bridge (Fig. 4.8). The mouth is often open with tongue
protruding. The tongue may be furrowed. The palate is often high
arched, and the dentition may be delayed. Hands are short and
broad, and there may be clinodactyly (incurving) of the little finger.
Cardiovascular defects are also found in about one-third of the cases.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 4.8 A boy with Down syndrome (trisomy 21). Note the epicanthal
folds, depressed nasal bridge, low-set ears, open mouth.
Dermatoglyphics
Simian crease forms one of the classical features. It is found in about
50% of Down syndrome cases. There may just be a single crease on
the fifth finger. Axial triradius may be in the centre of palm in 85%
of cases. There is often a wide gap between the first and second toe.
About 50% patients show a hallucal dermal pattern as a tibial arch.
Cytogenetics
In almost 95% cases, there is trisomy 21 (Fig. 4.9). About 4% of the
individuals show translocation, t (14q21q). Long arm of chromo-
some 21 is translocated to long arm of chromosome 14. In these
patients having translocation, the number of chromosomes is 46,
although they are trisomic for 21 chromosome. In about 1% cases,
chromosomal complement is 46/47, i.e. they have mosaicism. They
Figure 4.9 Karyotype of Down syndrome patient showing trisomy 21 (arrow).
mebooksfree.com
78 Human Genetics
show two cell lines, a normal cell line of 46 and an abnormal cell
line of 47 chromosomes (with trisomy 21). These patients (mosaics)
are less severely affected. Mental retardation is relatively lesser as
compared to a typical trisomy 21.
Risk of down syndrome
Incidence of Down syndrome in the population is 1 in 800. In Israel,
it is 1 in 400; in Malaysia, it is 1 in 500. This is probably related
to girls’ early age of marriage. In Israel, girls are married off at
8–9 years. Possibly the physical and mental trauma they undergo
may be contributing to high incidence (Survey by Mathru Mandir,
Chennai, India, 1998). To calculate the risk to a mother of having
a Down baby is a problem of genetic counselling. It depends upon
a number of factors:
1. Maternal age.
2. Does the couple already have a baby with Down syndrome?
3. What is the karyotype of the baby (typical trisomy 21 or transloca-
tion)?
4. Is one of the parents a translocation carrier?
Prenatal diagnosis of the condition can be made with the help of
chorionic villus biopsy or by amniocentesis.
Trisomy 18 or Edward Syndrome

It was described by Edwards in 1960. It is also called E-trisomy. It is
the second most common autosomal trisomy with prevalence of
nearly 1 in 6000 live births. About 95% of the foetuses abort, only
5% of trisomy 18 conceptions survive to term. Trisomy 18 patients
have prenatal growth deficiency. They have characteristic facial fea-
tures and limb abnormalities clenching the diagnosis. Those who
are born do not live beyond few months. Few may survive to about
15 years. E-trisomy presents with mental retardation and failure to
thrive. Patients present with hypertonia, prominent occiput, reced-
ing jaw, low-set malformed ears. Ears may be small with unravelled
helices; mouth is small. They have short sternum, clenched fists and
rocker-bottom feet. Congenital heart defects, such as ventricular
septal defect (VSD), may be present. Other significant congenital
anomalies are omphalocoele, diaphragmatic hernia and at times
spina bifida.
High mortality rate in this condition is attributed to combined
effect of factors such as aspiration pneumonia, predisposition to
infections, apnoea and also congenital heart defects. Those trisomy
18 patients who survive infancy show developmental disabilities. The
degree of delay of milestones is much more pronounced than in
Down syndrome. Most of the children are unable to walk.
mebooksfree.com
Cytogenetics
About 95% of babies with Edward syndrome present with complete
trisomy 18. A small percentage shows mosaicism. Maternal age has a
significant effect. Studies have indicated that nearly 90% cases among
the patients of trisomy 18 have maternally-derived extra chromosome.
Trisomy 13 or D Trisomy or Patau Syndrome

It was first identified by Patau and his colleagues. The life span of
patient is very much like that of trisomy 18. About 95% of the live
born babies die during infancy. Those who survive infancy show
significant growth retardation and severe mental retardation.
Clinical features
Clinically, it presents sloping forehead, hypertelorism, microphthal-
mia, coloboma iridis and postaxial polydactyly. Cleft lip, cleft palate
are often present (Fig. 4.10). Facial cleft may also be seen in some
patients. Congenital malformations involve cardiovascular system
and urogenital system such as bicornuate uterus and polycystic kid-
neys. Severe central nervous system malformation such as holopros-
encephaly may be seen occasionally. Cutis aplasia, a scalp defect on
the posterior side along the occipital bone, may be present.
Cytogenetics
Nearly 80% of the trisomy 13 patients show an extra chromosome
13; however, others have trisomy involving only the long arm of
chromosome 13 translocated. The risk of Patau syndrome increases
with advanced maternal age, as in other trisomies (i.e. trisomy 18
and trisomy 21). About 95% of the trisomy 13 conceptions end up
in spontaneous abortions.
SEX CHROMOSOME ABNORMALITIES
These may be presented in the form of trisomy XXY and XYY show-
ing male phenotype, or monosomy involving X chromosome such
as 45,X showing a female phenotype. Mosaicism involving X chro-
mosome is more frequent than seen in autosomes. About 50% of
Turner syndrome patients and 15% of Klinefelter syndrome patients
show mosaicism. Let us consider details of these two sex chromo-
some syndromes.
Turner Syndrome
It is also referred to as X monosomy. It was first described by Turner
in 1938. However, the precise nature of cytogenetic abnormality was
mebooksfree.com
80 Human Genetics
Figure 4.10 Patau syndrome (trisomy 13).
identified in 1959 by Ford et al. at Harwell. They demonstrated 45,X

karyotype in Turner syndrome patients.
Clinical features
The phenotype in these patients is female. They have a short stat-
ure, webbing of neck, and cubitus valgus, i.e. reduction in the carry-
ing angle at elbow (Fig. 4.11). Among other features, these patients
have a low posterior hair line (Fig. 4.12) broad chest with widely
spaced nipples. They have a high arched palate, lymphoedema over
feet. There may be some of the following congenital malformations
mebooksfree.com
Figure 4.11 Turner syndrome case showing short stature and webbed
neck.
Figure 4.12 Note the webbing of neck in Turner syndrome patient.
involving various systems. In cardiovascular anomalies, there may be

coarctation of aorta or VSD. In the urinary system, there may be
horseshoe kidney, renal hypoplasia, or aplasia or duplication of
ureters, etc. The genital system shows streak-like gonads (ovaries)
consisting of connective tissue. There are no ovarian follicles. The
uterus may be small. Secondary sexual characters do not develop.
mebooksfree.com
82 Human Genetics
Figure 4.13 Karyotype of Turner syndrome showing only one X chromo-

some.
Primary amenorrhoea is usually present. Axillary and pubic hair are

sparse. Normal breast development does not occur at puberty, and
the external genitalia is of juvenile type.
Cytogenetics
The study reveals that about 60% of Turner syndrome patients show
45,X karyotype (Fig. 4.13). Others present a wide range of structural
alteration involving X chromosome or mosaicism. The most com-
mon X alteration is in the form of 46, X, i (Xq). This is isochromo-
some involving long arm of X chromosome. Ring chromosome
Xr is also not uncommon.
Investigations
1. Barr body examination reveals that patients are chromatin negative.
2. Dermatoglyphic study shows high total ridge count and distal
axial triradius.
3. Karyotype shows 45,X in about 60% cases and others with struc-
tural abnormalities of X chromosome (Figs 4.14 and 4.15).
Their intelligence is normal or slightly less than normal. Failure to
develop secondary sexual characters often brings them for consul-
tation. Anabolic steroid therapy around 10–12 years of age helps
them to gain height. Oestrogen administration helps development
of secondary sexual characters.
mebooksfree.com
Polysomy X
It may be in the form of XXX,
XXXX or XXXXX karyotype.
Trisomy X presents with a fe-
male phenotype, which is al-
most normal. Usually, they are
detected on examination and
investigations for infertility and
mental retardation. Somatic
cells show two chromatin bod-
ies. Among other polysomies
(i.e. patients with four or five X
chromosomes), patients de-
velop severe mental retardation
and have multiple physical de-
fects (Fig. 4.16).
Klinefelter Syndrome
This condition was first de-
scribed by Harry Klinefelter in
1942. The karyotype of these
patients is 47, XXY. This was
demonstrated by Jacobs and
Strong in 1959. It presents a
peculiar situation in which an
individual with male phenotype Figure 4.14 A female patient pre-
is X-chromatin positive. This sented with short stature, wide gap
aroused interest in the investi- between 1st and 2nd toe bilaterally,
gators who subjected these pa- small 3rd and 4th toes, hyperconvex
tients to chromosome analysis. and upturned nails, revealed multi-
ple cell lines on karyotyping, i.e.
Clinical features 46,XX (10%)/45,X (10%)/46,XX(iq)
Patients are tall, thin, eunuch- (60%)/46,XX (ter rea) (20%).
oid. They have long legs and
poorly developed secondary
sexual characters. Testis are
smaller in size; scrotum and
penis may show hypoplasia.
There is associated gynaeco-
mastia in some cases. Pubic, Figure 4.15 (A) Iso-Xq and (B) ter rea.
chin, chest and axillary hair
are absent or poorly devel-
oped. They have normal intelligence; however, verbal IQ is low
(Fig. 4.17). Testicular biopsy shows hyalinisation of seminiferous
mebooksfree.com
84 Human Genetics
Figure 4.16 Karyotype: 47,XXX—Superfemale.
tubules. Spermatogenesis is absent,

and the patients are sterile. Barr body
study, as seen earlier, shows chromatin-
positive cells. Hormonal profile of
these patients reveals low serum testos-
terone and higher FSH and LH levels.
Cytogenetics
Karyotype is usually 47,XXY (Fig. 4.18).
In about 15% cases, mosaicism is found,
i.e. 46,XY/47,XXY. Testicular develop-
ment and mental status in mosaics may
be normal. In 60% patients, additional
X chromosome is derived from meiotic
or postzygotic non-disjunction involving
maternal X chromosome, i.e. 47,XmXmY.
In the remaining 40%, non-disjunction
of X and Y chromosomes occurs during
(first meiotic division of) spermatogen-
esis. This means, the chromosome com-
plement is 47,XmXpY. Variants of Kline-
felter syndrome such as 48,XXXY or
48,XXYY or 49,XXXXY show additional
X chromosomes with severe dysmor- Figure 4.17 Photograph of a
phism and mental retardation. Klinefelter syndrome patient.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 4.18 Karyotype of Klinefelter syndrome showing 47,XXY complement.
XYY Males
In this, an additional Y chromosome is found in a male phenotype.
These individuals often show an emotional immaturity and impul-
sive character. This possibly associates them to anti-social behaviour.
In fact in earlier studies, this karyotype was found with greater fre-
quency among prisoners. It probably results from non-disjunction at
second meiotic division producing YY sperm. Somatic cells of these
individuals show two fluorescent spots on quinacrine dihydrochlo-
ride staining instead of a normal one.
SEX DEVELOPMENT ERRORS WITH NORMAL

CHROMOSOMES
In some individuals, it is difficult to assign sex because they have
ambiguous genitalia. They do not have external genitalia clearly as
a male or a female. In majority of them, there is only one type of
gonad, either testis or ovary. Genital anomalies vary through a wide
spectrum from hypospadias in male to hypertrophied clitoris in
female. They may have normal sex chromosomes, but do present
single gene defects or environmental factors leading to anomalies.
Karyotyping forms an essential investigation in these patients for
counselling.
mebooksfree.com
86 Human Genetics
True Hermaphroditism
It is rare but known. A true hermaphrodite has ambiguous genitalia
of varying degree. It ranges from individuals who appear to be
almost like a normal male to those who appear almost like a female.
On exploration of gonad, one may find ovary on one side and testis
on the other. There may be a mixture of testicular and ovarian
tissue giving rise to ovotestis on both sides or on one side, while the
other side shows a normal gonad. In these persons, one can expect
mosaicism with two cell lines XX/XY. Some of them do show such
mosaicism, but some however, show the XX complement.
Psudohermaphroditism
As against a true hermaphrodite, a pseudohermaphrodite has only
one type of gonadal tissue. A male pseudohermaphrodite possesses
testis as gonads and shows XY chromosome complement. Female
pseudohermaphrodites have an ovarian tissue and XX chromosome
complement.
Female pseudohermaphroditism
It occurs with the frequency of about 1 in 25,000 births. The most
common cause of female pseudohermaphroditism is congenital
adrenal hyperplasia. It is inherited as an autosomal recessive disor-
der. It is characterised by a deficiency of cortical enzymes. As a re-
sult, the hormonal output from adrenal cortex is low. This, in turn,
increases adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) secretion from the
pituitary. ACTH now causes adrenal hyperplasia. Hyperplastic adre-
nals elaborate androgens, which cause the masculinisation of fe-
male foetus leading to female pseudohermaphroditism. External
genital examination shows hypertrophy involving clitoris; labia ma-
jora show rugosity and may even be partly fused.
Another event that may cause masculinisation of female foetus is
the excess amount of sex hormones entering foetal circulation from
mother. An overactive adrenal cortex of the mother or if the mother
has received hormonal therapy, both events may lead to pseudoher-
maphroditism.
Male pseudohermaphroditism
It may be an outcome of any of the following errors:
1. Gonadal dysgenesis in embryonic development

2. Gonadotropins abnormality
3. Inborn errors in biosynthesis of testosterone
4. Androgen target cell abnormalities
mebooksfree.com
Among these, the androgen insensitivity in target cells leads to

what is commonly called testicular feminisation. Testicular femini-
sation syndrome is an X-linked disorder. In this, the patient has
an XY chromosome complement. External genitalia shows female
form, a blind vagina and there is no uterus or uterine tubes. Tes-
ticular tissue may be in abdomen or in inguinal canal. The recep-
tor protein coded by allele at locus TFM forms a complex with
testosterone. If this complex is not formed, then the hormone
cannot enter the nucleus. Therefore, TFM has also been called a
major sex determining gene in man. Testicular feminisation in its
incomplete form may show clinically and genetically heteroge-
nous types. They can be studied by analysis of androgen receptor-
binding activity.
Role of Y Chromosome
The Y chromosome possesses H–Y antigen gene and male determin-
ing segment. The latter is responsible for development of testes. In
turn, testes produce hormones responsible for masculinising ef-
fects. Experimentally, this has been proved by removal of testes from
a foetal rabbit; the foetus developed into a female in spite of the XY
chromosome constitution. Thus, Y chromosome necessarily ac-
counts for maleness. It will not be inappropriate to mention about
XX males at this stage. Males with XX karyotype (Fig. 4.19) occur
with a frequency of about 1 in 15,000 male births. A possible expla-
nation for XX male is as follows. They are probably XX/XXY mosa-
ics, in whom the Y chromosome-bearing cell line has not been
identified. This may hold true because XX males resemble Klinefel-
ter syndrome. Another explanation is that during exchange be-
tween X and Y chromosomes in meiosis, male determining material
associated with short arm of Y is translocated to X chromosome.
Hence, despite the XX complement these individuals have a male
phenotype.
CHIMAERAS
So far we have seen what is a mosaic. Let us now consider another

term “chimaera”. Chimaera is an individual having two or more
genetically different cell populations derived from more than one
zygote. Originally, chimaera was named after a Greek mythological
monster. It had the head of a lion, body of a goat and tail of
a dragon. There are two types of naturally occurring chimaeras
in man. Both are rare. These are (i) dispermic chimaeras and
(ii) blood group chimaeras.
mebooksfree.com
88 Human Genetics
Figure 4.19 XX male, patient also had gynaecomastia that was operated.
Dispermic Chimaera
This is the result of double fertilisation. Two genetically different
sperms (from different fathers) fertilise two ova. This results in the
formation of two zygotes. If both contribute to the formation of an
individual, it results in dispermic chimaera.
Blood Group Chimaera

It can be formed by an exchange of cells across the placenta, be-
tween dizygotic twins. For example, the twins are non-identical, one
of them has 80% XY cells and 20% XX cells. In the blood group
analysis, many of his RBCs are of group B and few red cells belong
mebooksfree.com
Figure 4.20 Experimental production of chimaera.
to blood group A. The other twin member shows 80% XX cells and
20% XY cells. Her blood groups are—majority red cells show group
A, while few red cells are of group B. Skin grafting usually takes up
between identical twins, but in dizygotic twins it can take up satisfac-
torily if they are chimaeras.
Chimaeras have been produced in plants and in experimental ani-
mals too. To obtain chimaeras in animals is relatively difficult. How-
ever, they have been produced in mice. Eggs from pregnant mice are
removed in the early stage of development. Two eggs from different
strains are inserted in the presence of culture medium. After 1–2 days,
the united eggs are transferred to the pregnant mouse to complete the
development. Chimaeric mice can also be obtained by inserting
mouse teratocarcinoma cells in mouse blastocyst (Fig. 4.20).
Summary
• Normal chromosome number in human beings is 46, it is called diploid.
• Haploid (n), i.e. 23 chromosomes; found in gametes.
• Polyploid refers to multiple of n, i.e. 3n 5 69 (triploid) or 92 (i.e. tetraploid).
• Aneuploid refers to any number that is not exact multiple of n or 23, e.g.
2n 1 1 5 47 chromosomes (Down syndrome) or 2n – 1 5 45, a comple-
ment found in Turner syndrome 45,XO. Cause being “non-disjunction” at
meiosis/gametogenesis.
Chromosomal aberrations can be numerical or structural aberrations:
Monosomy—45,X (Turner syndrome); Trisomy—47,XX 1 21 (Down syn-
drome).
• Trisomies: Trisomy 18, 13, 8 are known.
• Structural aberrations: 5p2, Cri-du-chat syndrome; 18q2, De Grouchy
syndrome is known.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
90 Human Genetics
Summary—cont’d
• Structural aberrations could be: (i) Deletions—terminal or interstitial
deletion, e.g. Wilms tumour with aniridia; (ii) translocation—reciprocal or
Robertsonian; (iii) insertion; (iv) inversion, either pericentric or paracentric;
(v) isochromosome; (vi) ring chromosome.
• Factors responsible for chromosomal aberrations include:
1. Maternal age
2. Nondisjunction gene
3. Radiation
4. Chromosome abnormality
5. Autoimmune disorder/s
Autosomal Abnormalities
Down Syndrome—21 Trisomy (Langdon Down, 1866): MR with IQ be-
tween 25 and 50, brachycephaly, lat occiput, depressed nasal bridge, epican-
thal folds, nystagmus, simian crease on hands, CVS defects, etc. Karyotype:
21 trisomy, translation, 14q 21q.
Trisomy 18 or Edward Syndrome: MR, prominent occiput, receding
jaw, low-set ears, VSD, diaphragmatic hernia, spina biida may be found.
Ends in abortion or failure to thrive.
Trisomy 13 or Patau Syndrome: Sloping forehead, hypertelorism, mi-
crophthalmia, polydactyly, cleft lip, cleft palate anomalies of CVS, CNS and
urogenital systems.
Sex Chromosome Abnormalities

Turner syndrome: Described by Turner in 1938. The patients have female
phenotype, short stature, webbing of neck, cubitus valgus, high arched pal-
ate, amenorrhoea, poor secondary sexual characters. They may have co-
arctation of aorta, VSD, renal hypoplasia, etc. Karyotype is 45,XO or may
present with isochromosome or ring chromosome involving X.
Polysomy X: Triplet X, i.e. 47, XXX; have MR and infertility.
Klinefelter syndrome: Harry Klinefelter described it in 1942. The patients
are tall, thin, eunuchoid, having poor secondary sexual characters, hypoplastic
gonad, azoospermia and low serum testosterone level. Gonadal biopsy shows
hyalinisation of seminiferous tubules. Karyotype shows 47,XXY complement.
XYY males: They have male phenotype, have impulsive character and
may be associated with antisocial behaviour. This results from non-disjunc-
tion at second meiotic division producing YY sperm.
Hermaphroditism/Intersex
True hermaphrodite: It is rare. Gonads are testis on one side and ovary
on the other side or may have ovo-testis. Karyotype shows mosaicism with
XX/XY cell lines.
Female pseudohermaphroditism: Pseudohermaphrodite has only one
type of gonad; female pseudohermaphrodites have ovaries and XX chromo-
somes complement. Common cause is congenital adrenal hyperplasia, with
deiciency of cortical enzymes. There is masculinisation of female foetus,
hypertrophy of clitoris and labial fusion. It is an autosomal recessive trait.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Male pseudohermaphrodite: Testicular feminisation syndrome is an
X- linked disorder. External genitalia shows female form; however, vagina
ends blindly, and there is no uterus or uterine tubes. The gonad is testis.
They may be in abdomen.
Y chromosome: It possesses H-Y antigen gene and male determining
segment responsible for testicular development. Foetal testes secrete tes-
tosterone that has masculinising effect on external genitalia.
Chimaera: Refers to an individual having two or more genetically different
cell populations derived from more than one zygote. Naturally occurring two
types are—
i) Dispermic chimaera: Two genetically different sperms (from two dif-
ferent men) fertilize two ova. Both zygotes contribute to form dispermic
chimaera
ii) Blood group chimaera: Exchange of cells across placenta between
dizygotic twins leads to blood group chimaera.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. Edward syndrome is:
a. Trisomy 21 b. Trisomy 18
c. Trisomy 13 d. Trisomy 8
2. Cri-du-chat syndrome is:
a. Deletion involving short arm of chromosome 5
b. Deletion involving long arm of chromosome 5
c. Interstitial deletion of short arm of chromosome 11
d. Deletion of terminal part of long arm of chromosome 11
3. What is aneuploidy?
4. Monosomy involving which chromosome is compatible with life?
5. What are the types of translocations?
6. What is Robertsonian translocation?
7. What is reciprocal translocation?
8. Why individuals with reciprocal translocation present with normal
phenotype?
9. Why individuals with reciprocal translocation having normal phenotype
produce abnormal offspring?
10. What is isochromosome?
11. Which one of the following syndrome patients exhibit webbing of neck?
a. Klinefelter syndrome b. Down syndrome
c. Turner syndrome d. Edward syndrome
mebooksfree.com
92 Human Genetics
12. Which one of following karyotype is found in Klinefelter syndrome

patients?
a. 45,XO b. 47,XXY
c. 47,XXX d. 47,XYY
13. Which one of the following holds true about XYY males?
a. They are highly intelligent
b. They are impulsive and have criminal tendency
c. They have short stature
d. Their extra Y makes them more fertile
14. Match the following:
Condition Karyotype
1. Turner syndrome a. 47,XYY
2. Cri-du-chat syndrome b. Trisomy 18
3. Criminal tendency c. 45,XO
4. Edward syndrome d. 5p-
15. What is true about male pseudohermaphroditism?
a. They have 46,XX chromosome complement
b. They have ovotestis as gonads
c. They have testis as gonads
d. They have 47,XXY chromosome complement
16. What is chimaera?
mebooksfree.com
Developmental
Genetics

• Factors influencing development
• Genes involved in the process of development
• Sex determination and differentiation
HOX genes, PAX gene, Zinc finger gene, Hyaditiform mole
Human development is a highly complex process with poor under-

standing in many areas. It is significantly influenced by both genetic
and environmental factors. Under suitable environment, genes in-
herited from both the parents determine the fate of undifferenti-
ated cell cluster derived from the zygote. By about 12 weeks, it ac-
quires a recognisable human form. For the discoveries concerning
genetic control of early embryonic development, Nobel Prize was
awarded jointly to Edward B. Lewis, Christiane Nusslein-Volhard
and Eric F. Wieschaus in 1995.
In this chapter, we shall concentrate upon the genetic control
of the physiological processes in the initial period of 12 weeks. In
this respect, we deal with the branch called developmental genetics.
The entire prenatal period is divisible into three periods-
pre-embryonic, 30 hours-19 days; embryonic, 4-12 weeks; and
foetal, till birth. During pre-embryonic period, there is prolifera-
tion of the cells followed by formation of bilaminar and trilaminar
disc. In embryonic period, craniocaudal and dorsoventral orienta-
tion of the embryonic disc is gained. Analogues of all major organ
systems are laid down. During foetal period, further growth and
development occurs in all the systems forming a viable
human being.
93
94 Human฀Genetics
FERTILISATION
It is a process in which male and female gametes fuse to form zy-

gote. This occurs in Fallopian tube. About 200–300 million sperms
are deposited in the female genital tract. Some of them ascend up
reaching the site of fertilisation. Of these, some cross coronaradiata
and zona pellucida. One of these enters the cytoplasm of an oocyte.
After this, the oocyte completes its second meiotic division, its
nucleus now forms female pronucleus. By now sperm head trans-
forms into a male pronucleus. The two pronuclei fuse to restore
diploid number of chromosomes (2n 5 46). The zygote then un-
dergoes cleavage, i.e. a series of rapid mitotic divisions forming
16-cell stage, in about 3 days. It is called morula. Subsequently, it
forms blastocyst. It consists of inner cell mass or embryoblast and
outer trophoblast. The embryoblast then organises to form initially
bilaminar and then trilaminar embryonic disc. The process is called
gastrulation.
During the subsequent period, primitive streak is formed in the
caudal half of the embryo. Endoderm, mesoderm and ectoderm
(i.e. three germ layers) are formed. The period of 4–8 weeks is a
critical period during which organogenesis occurs.
FACTORS INFLUENCING DEVELOPMENT
Knowledge regarding genetic factors influencing, maintaining and

directing embryogenesis is limited. Studies in Drosophila melanogaster
(fruit fly) led to identification of several genes that play a significant
role in early developmental processes. These genes produce pro-
teins called transcription factors. They control RNA transcription
from DNA template by binding to specific regulatory DNA se-
quences. They form complexes that initiate transcription by RNA
polymerase.
The transcription factors can switch genes “on and off” by
activating or repressing gene expression. Some of these tran-
scription factors, through specific genes, control fundamental
embryological processes such as induction, segmentation, mi-
gration, differentiation, programmed cell death or apoptosis.
This is mediated by growth factors and chemical agents known
as morphogens. They stimulate the cell receptors and show concen-
tration gradient across a structure such as a limb bud. In chick
limb bud, fibroblast growth factor and bone morphogenetic pro-
tein have been identified as growth factors. The main morpho-
gen involved in digit formation in a limb bud is identified as
retinoic acid.
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 5 —฀Developmental฀Genetics 95
GENES INVOLVED IN DEVELOPMENT
There are three gene families so far identified in vertebrates that

influence development. These are Hox genes, paired box genes and
zinc finger genes.
Homeobox (Hox) Genes

The homeotic genes in Drosophila determine segment identity. Their
mutations cause major structural abnormalities, for example, in-
stead of antenna, leg development occurs. The homeotic genes
contain a conserved 180 base pair sequence called homeobox. This is
the characteristic of the genes involved in spatial pattern control
and development. The Hox genes are important transcription fac-
tors that specify cell fate and establish regional axis. Four homeobox
gene clusters have been identified in humans (Table 5.1). Each
cluster contains series of closely linked genes.
Mutations involving homeobox genes have not been identified
in humans; possibly they are so devastating that they might be
leading to abortion. Mutations of Hox genes in transgenic mice
present with multiple and severe malformations involving skull
and face.
Paired Box (Pax) Genes

The paired box is a highly conserved DNA sequence that codes
about 130 amino acids. The genes that contain paired box are called
Pax genes. They were first identified in Drosophila. They encode
DNA-binding proteins. These proteins are transcription control fac-
tors and have an important role in development. So far, eight Pax
genes have been identified in humans and mice. In mice, mutations
involving Pax1, Pax3 and Pax6 lead to severe vertebral malforma-
tions, pigment abnormalities and small eyes, respectively.
Table 5.1 Homeobox Gene Clusters Identified in

Humans
Cluster Chromosomal Location Number of Genes
Hox1 (Hoxa) 7p 11
Hox2 (Hoxb) 17q 9
Hox3 (Hoxc) 12q 9
Hox4 (Hoxd) 2q 9
mebooksfree.com
96 Human฀Genetics
In human beings, mutations in-

volving DNA-binding domain of Pax3
cause Waardenburg syndrome, char-
acterised by deafness, white forelock
and heterochromia involving iris
(Fig. 5.1). It is an autosomal domi- Figure 5.1 Patient of Waarden-
nant trait. Mutations in Pax6 lead to burg syndrome showing het-
aniridia, i.e. absence of iris. Rear- erochromia.
rangements involving Pax3 have been
found in a childhood tumour, the alveolar rhabdomyosarcoma.
These rearrangements are caused by translocation that interrupts
Pax locus and forms a novel hybrid transcript.
Zinc Finger Genes

This describes a finger-like projection formed by amino acids, lo-
cated between two cysteine residues, which forms a complex with
zinc ion. Recently, it has been shown that an interruption involving
a multiple zinc finger gene called GL13 on chromosome 7 causes
Greig cephalopolysyndactyly. It is an autosomal dominant disorder.
It is characterised by cranial and hand malformations, e.g. webbed
digits. Mutation in Wilms tumour gene (WT1), located on 11p, pres-
ents with renal malignancy.
MULTIPLE MALFORMATION SYNDROMES
The mutations in transcription control genes provide an explana-

tion for unrelated abnormalities in the multiple malformation
syndromes. In embryogenesis, the concept of developmental field
gives explanation accounting for these apparently unrelated em-
bryonic primordia reacting to the genetic or environmental in-
sult. The developmental field includes all organs or tissues having
common embryological origin. Thus, an ectodermal dysplasia
caused by single gene mutation may present with abnormalities
involving teeth (enamel), hair, nails and sweat glands. Likewise in
axial mesodermal dysplasia that occurs as a sporadic event in a
family, organs of mesodermal origin such as kidneys, heart and
vertebrae present an abnormal development. Similarly, VATER
association features vertebral, anal, tracheo-oesophageal and rec-
tal abnormalities.
Abnormalities in Waardenburg syndrome can be explained by
abnormality involving neural crest cells. Thus, knowledge of embry-
ology, genetics and dysmorphology helps us in getting rational ex-
planation for congenital multiple malformation syndromes.
mebooksfree.com
Hydatidiform Mole
In this abnormal conception, the placenta consists of a proliferating
disorganised mass called hydatidiform mole. It may be partial or
complete.
Complete hydatidiform mole

Here, the chromosome analysis reveals 46 chromosomes, but of ex-
clusively paternal origin. Complete mole results from fertilisation of
empty ovum (without nucleus) by either two sperms (dispermy) or
by a single sperm that undergoes endoreduplication. An opposite situ-
ation may exist in which an unfertilised egg undergoes develop-
ment. The process is called parthenogenesis. This occurs in lower ani-
mals (e.g. arthropods) and is not reported in human beings. The
complete hydatidiform mole may undergo malignant change and
give rise to choriocarcinoma. It is amenable to chemotherapy; if
untreated may prove fatal.
Partial hydatidiform mole

The chromosome complement of the tissue from the partial mole
reveals triploidy, i.e. 69 chromosomes. Using DNA polymorphisms,
it is found that out of these, 46 chromosomes are paternal and 23
are maternal in origin. This can be due to dispermy (fertilisation by
two sperms) or endoreduplication, i.e. duplication of haploid sperm
chromosomes. Usually, it ends in abortion.
Role of Parental Chromosomes: It is observed in mice that
when all the nuclear genes are derived from mother, the embryo
develops normally but the extra embryonic (i.e. trophoblast) de-
velopment is poor. In contrast, if all the nuclear genes are pater-
nal in origin, then the embryo fails to develop; however, the tro-
phoblast development proceeds unimpaired. The situation is
comparable to what is observed in a complete and a partial hyda-
tidiform mole.
SEX DETERMINATION AND DIFFERENTIATION
The sex of an individual is determined by Y chromosome. Presence

of Y chromosome leads to male and its absence results in female
development.
Though sex chromosomes are present from the time of fertilisa-
tion, differentiation into a male or a female does not occur till
seventh week. The embryonic gonad and the genital duct system of
Mullerian and Wolffian ducts are in indifferent stage. From seventh
mebooksfree.com
98 Human฀Genetics
week onwards, the sequence of events initiated by testis determin-

ing factor (TDF) prompts development of indifferent gonad into
testes.
It was shown in 1990 that testis determining factor/gene (TDF) is
located on “p” (short) arm of the “Y” chromosome close to pseudo-
autosomal region. This gene is now said to be located in the sex de-
termining region of the Y chromosome (SRY). Several observations
indicate that the SRY gene is the primary factor determining male-
ness. It is supported by the following:
1. In XX males, SRY sequences are present. They are infertile phe-
notypic males with 46, XX karyotype.
2. The mutations involving SRY sequences are found in some
XY females. They are infertile phenotypic females with 46,
XY karyotype.
3. Transgenic XX mice that have a tiny portion of Y, containing SRY
gene develop into males.
The close proximity of SRY gene to pseudoautosomal region
means that occasionally it may be caught in recombinational event.
This accounts for XX males. FISH studies show evidence of Y chro-
mosome sequences at the distal end of the X chromosome.
The expression of SRY gene leads to development of medulla of
indifferent gonad into the testis. Its Leydig cells produce testoster-
one. It promotes differentiation of Wolffian duct that forms ele-
ments of internal genitalia in males, i.e. ductus deferens, epididy-
mis, seminal vesicle, ejaculatory ducts, etc. The masculinisation of
the external genitalia is mediated by dihydrotestosterone. The latter
is produced by the action of 5-a-reductase on the testosterone. The
Sertoli cells of the developing testes produce a hormone called Mul-
lerian inhibitory factor. This inhibits Mullerian ducts development
and they regress.
In the absence of SRY gene expression, the cortex of an indiffer-
ent gonad develops into an ovary. The Mullerian ducts form inter-
nal genitalia. The external genitalia evolves into female form due to
absence of dihydrotestosterone. An absence of testosterone also
causes regression of Wolffian duct system.
INACTIVATION OF X CHROMOSOME
Out of the two “X” chromosomes in female, one undergoes inactiva-

tion to form Barr body. This is called lyonisation, named after Dr.
Mary F. Lyon who explained the X inactivation in her Lyon’s hy-
pothesis. For details refer to Chapter 3, Molecular Genetics.
mebooksfree.com
Summary
Developmental Genetics: It deals with genetic control of physiological processes
in the initial period of development. The entire prenatal period is divisible into three
periods—(i) Pre-embryonic period; (ii) Embryonic period; and (iii) Foetal period.
Factors Influencing Development: There are several genes that play a sig-
nificant role in the early developmental process. They produce proteins called
transcription factors. These transcription factors can switch genes “on and
off” and control fundamental developmental processes such as induction,
segmentation, migration, differentiation, apoptosis (programmed cell death).
All these are mediated through growth factors and morphogens, e.g. main
morphogen involved in digit formation in a limb is identified as retinoic acid.
Genes Involved in Development
Three gene families have been identified. Hox, Pax and Zinc finger genes.
(i) Homeobox (Hox) genes: Four homeobox gene clusters have been iden-
tified in humans—Hox1 (Hoxa) at 7p; Hox2 (Hoxb) at 17q; Hox3 (Hoxc) at
12q and Hox4 (Hoxd) at 2q; these are their chromosomal locations. Muta-
tions involving Hox genes are so devastating that they lead to abortion.
(ii) Paired box (Pax) genes: Pair box codes for about 130 amino acids. So
far eight Pax genes have been identified. In humans, Pax3 mutations
cause Waardenburg syndrome, an autosomal dominant (AD) trait, while
Pax6 mutations lead to aniridia. Pax3 rearrangements have been
observed in alveolar rhabdomyosarcoma.
(iii) Zinc finger genes: Recently, an interruption in multiple zinc finger gene
GL13 on chromosome 7 has been observed in Greig cephalopolysyn-
dactyly, an AD trait.
Multiple Malformation Syndrome

The concept of developmental field gives explanation accounting for apparently
unrelated embryonic primordia reacting to the genetic and environmental insult,
e.g. ectodermal dysplasia, a single gene mutation presenting with abnormali-
ties involving teeth, hair, nails and sweat glands. Similarly, VATER association
features vertebral, anal, trachea-oesophageal and rectal abnormalities.
Hydatidiform mole: An abnormal conception in which placenta prolifer-
ates into a disorganised mass called hydatidiform mole. It is of two types—
i) Complete hydatidiform mole: It shows 46 chromosomes on karyotyp-
ing, but all of them are paternal in origin. This results from fertilisation of an
empty ovum (non-nucleated) by either two sperms (dispermy) or by single
sperm that undergoes endoreduplication. In contrast, an unfertilised egg
may undergo development, the process is called parthenogenesis.
ii) Partial hydatidiform mole: It shows triploidy, i.e. 69 chromosomes with
46 of paternal and 23 of maternal origin. It ends in abortion.
Sex Determination and Differentiation

It is determined by Y chromosome at fertilisation; however, till seventh week
the gonads and genital ducts are in indifferent stage. ‘p’ arm of Y chromosome
Continued
mebooksfree.com
100 Human฀Genetics
Summary—cont’d
has testis determining factor (TDF). It is located in sex determining region of Y

chromosome (SRY). SRY gene leads to development of medulla of indifferent
gonad into testis. Leydig cells secrete testosterone that leads to differentiation
of Wolffian ducts into internal genitalia of males, i.e. vas deferens, seminal
vesicles, ejaculatory ducts, etc. The dihydrotestosterone causes masculinisa-
tion of external genitalia. In the absence of SRY gene, indifferent gonad forms
ovary.
Inactivation of X chromosome: One of the X chromosomes in female
becomes inactive to form Barr body. It is called Lyonisation.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What are Hox genes?
2. What are Pax genes?
mebooksfree.com
Modes of
Inheritance 6
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Mendelian฀inheritance฀(Single฀gene฀disorder)
•฀Basis฀of฀autosomal฀dominant฀and฀recessive฀traits
•฀Basis฀of฀sex/X-linked฀inheritance
KEY WORDS
Autosomal฀dominant,฀Autosomal฀recessive,฀X-linked฀recessive,฀Genetic฀
isolates,฀Fragile฀X,฀Pleiotropy
We realise that the genetic disorders can be classified into three

categories:
1. Chromosomal disorders: These occur because of abnormality in
the number or structure of chromosomes, e.g. trisomy 21, mono-
somy of X or Cri-du-chat syndrome (5p-), etc.
2. Single gene disorders: These are due to a single mutant gene.
They are also called Mendelian disorders. These have four basic
patterns of inheritance—autosomal dominant, autosomal reces-
sive and X-linked inheritance either recessive or dominant.
3. Multifactorial inheritance: In this, the disorder is a result of inter-
action of gene and environmental factors such as infectious
agents, drugs or ionising radiations, etc.
ANALYSIS OF GENETIC DISORDERS
Family History
While dealing with a genetic case, the first step is recording the fam-
ily history of the index case/proband. Proband is an affected person
who has brought the family to the attention of a clinician. Proband
101
mebooksfree.com
is also called propositus (if male) or proposita (if female). The pro-
cedure starts with gathering information of the disorder, age at on-
set, duration of complaints and any other major illness. The second
step is to collect information regarding the first-degree relatives, i.e.
parents, siblings and offsprings of the proband. The following infor-
mation is to be recorded—name, surname, date of birth, age, age
and cause of death and relevant description of the disease if any.
However, the following questions should help in the initiation of a
dialogue with the patient or his relatives:
1. Does any relative suffer from similar trait?
This will help in deciding the pattern of inheritance and subsequently
working out the recurrence risk of the disorder.
2. Does any relative show any other disease that is not present in
proband?
For example, in case of dissecting aneurysm caused by Marfan syn-
drome, kindly ask about cardiac anomalies, ocular malformation or
skeletal abnormality in relatives.
3. Ask for any condition with which any of the relatives has suffered
or is suffering.
Such a condition might have been unnoticed. For example, a propositus
of pheochromocytoma can be suspected of having von Recklinghausen
disease if patient’s brother has scoliosis and mental retardation, since
both are manifestations of this disease.
4. Is the proband an outcome of consanguineous marriage?
Special attention should be given to this, because it (consanguinity) may
lead to an autosomal recessive trait.
5. What is the ethnic group of the family?
This is important because certain traits are common in some ethnic
groups. African blacks show haemoglobinopathies such as HbS, HbC,
b-thalassaemia and conditions like G6PD deficiency with much
greater frequency.
The following points need to be emphasised while recording

history:
1. Infant deaths, stillbirths and abortions to be noted with time of
abortion, any obvious deformity in foetus or stillborn baby or in
deceased infant. This may significantly alter the risk to subse-
quent pregnancy.
2. Illegitimacy should be borne in mind and proper enquiry with
the family doctor or medicosocial worker of that area (in smaller
place) may reveal facts.
3. “Nothing on my side” from anyone, during history taking, should
arouse suspicion and should be verified with care.
4. Record addresses of relevant family members as this is very important
in order to contact them during follow-up whenever it is required.
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 6 —฀Modes฀of฀Inheritance 103
Table 6.1 Symbols for Pedigree Charting
Pedigree
It depicts the family data. It is a shorthand method of giving relevant
information and also the mode of transmission of the disorder in
the family. There are standard symbols used in drawing a pedigree.
Table 6.1 shows symbols used in pedigree charting. In pedigree, the
position of proband is shown by an arrow.
MENDELIAN INHERITANCE (SINGLE GENE

DISORDERS)
They are caused by a single mutant gene. They follow one of the
following four patterns of inheritance:
1. Autosomal dominant inheritance
2. Autosomal recessive inheritance
3. Sex/X-linked dominant inheritance
4. X-linked recessive inheritance
mebooksfree.com
Usually, sex-linked inheritance means X-linked one because

Y chromosome does not show any Mendelian genes except H-Y anti-
gen genes. This forms the only trait transmitted from father to sons.
Terms “dominant and recessive” are used for the sake of conve-
nience of pedigree analysis. These terms do not differentiate
the genetic mechanism. When we say “dominant,” it means that
gene expresses clinically even in heterozygote state, i.e. in single
dose. Similarly, the term “recessive” implies that double dose, i.e.
homozygosity is essential for clinical manifestation of the trait.
Kindly note that genes are never dominant or recessive. It is their
effect, i.e. the trait/disorder, which is dominant or recessive.
Autosomal Dominant Inheritance

An autosomal dominant trait expresses in a heterozygote state. Ho-
mozygotes of it are severely affected because of a double dose of
abnormal gene. It is often possible to trace an autosomal dominant
trait through many generations. In fact, in South Africa, numerous
cases of porphyria variegata have been traced back to a couple in
17th century. Porphyria variegata is metabolic disorder presenting
skin blisters owing to increased sensitivity to sunlight. The urine
becomes “port wine” coloured on standing due to porphyrins that it
contains.
Pedigree analysis
In case of an autosomal dominant trait, pedigree shows the following
criteria (Fig. 6.1):
1. An affected person has an affected parent, exception being mu-
tant gene.
2. An affected person has normal and abnormal offsprings in equal
proportion, i.e. there is 50% chance of dominant trait being
transmitted to offsprings from affected parent.
3. Both males and females are equally affected.
4. The trait appears in every generation without skipping. An excep-
tion to this could be the trait impairing reproductive capacity of
an affected person.
5. Normal children of an affected person do not transmit the
disease.
Unaffected parent in dominant trait
In a dominant trait, usually parent is affected, but a normal parent
can be expected under the following three conditions:
1. If the trait occurs because of a mutant gene (Table 6.2).
In general, the frequency of mutation is 5 3 10–6 mutations per
gene per generation. For frequency of mutation giving rise to
mebooksfree.com
Figure 6.1 Pedigree of an autosomal dominant disorder.
Table 6.2 Percentage of Patients with New Mutations in

Some Autosomal Dominant Traits
Achondroplasia 80% Neurofibromatosis 40%

Tuberous sclerosis 80% Marfan syndrome 30%
Treacher Collin syndrome 60% Myotonic dystrophy 25%
an autosomal dominant trait, it works out to be 1 in 100,000

births. The dominant mutations usually involve gene coding for
two classes of proteins:
(a) Regulatory proteins, e.g. membrane receptors.
(b) Structural proteins, e.g. collagen, haemoglobin.
2. Gene, though present in the parent, has low expressivity and so
the parent appears to be normal (variability in expression of
gene is described later in this chapter).
3. Another reason could be extramarital paternity. It accounts for
about 3%–5% in the United States.
Two features associated with autosomal dominant disorder are as follows:

1. Delayed onset, e.g. Huntington chorea or adult polycystic kidney.
Both the conditions manifest in adult life, although the mutant
gene responsible for the trait is present at birth.
2. Variable clinical expression, e.g. multiple endocrine adenoma
peptic ulcer syndrome. Here persons in the same family carrying
mebooksfree.com
Figure 6.2 Genetic risk in an autosomal dominant disorder.
the same abnormal gene may show hyperplasia of different endo-

crine glands giving rise to a varied clinical picture. There may be
an involvement of pancreas, parathyroid, pituitary, etc. Accord-
ingly manifestations in these individuals are different, e.g. hypo-
glycaemia, peptic ulcer, multiple lipomas of skin, kidney stones,
bitemporal hemianopsia, etc.
Now let us consider the way transmission occurs in a dominant
trait from parents to offsprings. Let us assume “A” as a mutant
(dominant) gene and the normal allele being represented by letter
“a” (Fig. 6.2).
An affected heterozygous parent with another normal partner
shall have a progeny with a 50% chance of being affected and a 50%
chance of being normal. Let us consider the result of mating be-
tween the heterozygotes. This would result in a homozygous af-
fected child. However, two persons both having the same rare
dominant trait, chances are rare. All children of such homozygous
person should have the trait.
HUNTINGTON DISEASE (HD)
Huntington disease claims the distinction of being the first genetic

disease mapped to a specific chromosome with the help of RFLP
marker. In 1983, J. Gusella and his colleagues mapped the disease
gene to short arm of chromosome 4. Nearly 10 years later this gene
was cloned.
Huntington disease occurs with frequency of 1 in 20,000 Europe-
ans and is less frequent in other populations. It is an autosomal
dominant trait. It usually presents in age group of 30–50 years. It is
characterized by progressive loss of motor control and dementia.
mebooksfree.com
Patients have difficulty in swallowing. Aspiration pneumonia, car-

diorespiratory failure and subdural haematoma (due to trauma) are
frequent causes of death in these patients. Choreic movements are
often present in these patients.
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) shows substantial loss of neu-
rons. There is decreased glucose uptake in brain. This forms an
early sign of the disorder and can be detected by positron- emission
tomography (PET). Though it involves many parts of the brain, it
especially affects corpus striatum. Antipsychotic and antidepressant
drugs help in controlling symptoms to large extent. Total clinical
course of Huntington disease (HD) from diagnosis to death is about
15 years. Juvenile Huntington disease – refers to onset of HD before
20 years and 80% of them are paternally transmitted.
Waardenburg Syndrome
It is an autosomal dominant trait. It may appear as a de novo event.
Advanced paternal age has been observed as a factor in these fresh
mutation cases. In cases, the mutations involved Pax3 gene located
at 2q35. Mutations may involve other genes also, such as MITF gene
at 3p 12.3 – p 14.1 or EDNRP or EDN3 or SOX10. The incidence is
1 in 42,000 births. Clinical features include lateral displacement of
inner canthi with a broad and high nasal bridge, medial flare of
eyebrows, partial albinism, white forelock, hypochromic iridis, deaf-
ness, etc. (Fig. 6.3).
Achondroplasia
It is an autosomal dominant disorder. A homozygous offspring
shows severe skeletal deformities and usually dies during infancy. A
heterozygote has a short stature, large head size, prominent fore-
head and scooped out nasal bridge. The limbs are short. Achondro-
plastics usually have normal intelligence. Marriages between two
achondroplastics are also known. About 80% cases are the result of
new mutations.
Figure 6.3 A girl with Waardenburg syndrome, showing lateral dis-

placement of inner canthi, broad nasal bridge, hypochromic iridis with
coloboma.
mebooksfree.com
Tuberous Sclerosis
It is an autosomal dominant trait manifesting in number of systems
in variety of ways. It is an example of pleiotropy. It presents with a
classical facial rash known as adenoma sebaceum, which may be
confused with acne; however, microscopically it is angiokeratomas.
It consists of blood vessels and the fibrous tissue. The patient also
has learning difficulties and suffers from epilepsy. Nearly 80% cases
are due to new mutations.
Treacher Collin Syndrome

It is also called mandibulofacial dysostosis. The condition is named
after Treacher Collin who described two cases of this disorder in
1900. The condition manifests with anti-mongoloid slant of palpe-
bral fissures, malar hypoplasia and mandibular hypoplasia associated
lower eyelid defects. Ear abnormalities involve external, middle and
internal ear (Fig. 6.4). Defects in the latter two account for deafness.
Cleft palate may also be present. Some patients show congenital
heart disease, cryptorchidism and mental deficiency. The condition
follows autosomal dominant inheritance. In about 60% cases, there
is fresh mutation. A recent study of affected families shows nearly
100% penetrance.
Figure 6.4 A girl with Treacher Collin syndrome.
mebooksfree.com
At this stage, I would like to draw your attention to two terms, co-
dominance and intermediate inheritance. When both alleles of a pair are
fully expressed in heterozygote, they are called codominant. For ex-
ample, take an individual with AB blood group. He has both A and
B antigens on his red blood cells. The allelic genes A and B are,
therefore, codominant. Let us now consider another situation. In
sickle cell anaemia, a heterozygote for abnormal allele does not
have severe symptoms as found in homozygote. The heterozygote,
however, possesses both, haemoglobin S as well as normal haemo-
globin. In other words, a heterozygote shows intermediate expres-
sion between abnormal homozygote and normal homozygote. It is
called sickle cell trait.
Autosomal Recessive Inheritance

The recessive trait is expressed only in homozygote state. The homo-
zygote receives one abnormal (recessive) gene from each parent.
The trait typically appears only in sibs. The pedigree analysis of an
autosomal recessive trait presents following features:
Features for autosomal recessive trait (Fig.฀6.5)
These are as follows:
1. The trait appears in sibs and not in parents or offsprings.
2. About 25% of the sibs of the proband are affected, i.e. the risk is
1 in 4.
3. Both males and females have an equal chance of getting affected.
4. Parents of proband may be consanguineous.
A heterozygote for an autosomal recessive trait is called carrier. The
word carrier has different connotation in medicine and genetics. In
medicine, carrier is an individual harbouring an infective agent
without clinical manifestation of the disease. In genetics, carrier
Figure 6.5 Pedigree of autosomal recessive trait.
mebooksfree.com
means an individual in heterozygote state for gene determining in-

herited disorder who is essentially healthy at the time of examina-
tion. Meticulous clinical examination may reveal some features in
favour of the disease. Alternatively, biochemical examination often
reveals carrier state.
Now let us see situations in which parental carrier state reflects
over progeny:
1. If both parents are carriers and both are heterozygote bearing
one recessive gene “F” and one normal gene “f”, mating result
is—25% normal, 50% heterozygote carriers and 25% homozy-
gote affected children (Fig. 6.6).
2. If one parent is heterozygote carrier and the other is homozygous
affected, the progeny is as follows (Fig. 6.6): half the children will
be affected and rest 50% will be heterozygote carriers. In this
situation, the pedigree mimics an autosomal dominant inheri-
tance.
3. If both parents are affected, i.e. they are homozygous for the ab-
normal gene, all the children will be (homozygous) affected.
Many inborn errors of metabolism follow this type of inheri-
tance. This includes phenylketonuria, mucopolysaccharide disor-
ders, such as Hurler syndrome and Tay–Sachs disease. Among com-
mon autosomal recessive entities comes cystic fibrosis, sickle cell
anaemia; and rarer ones include Laurence-Moon-Biedl syndrome,
Seckel syndrome, etc.
Cystic fibrosis (CF)
It was recognised in 1936 as a separate clinical entity. It is the most
common autosomal recessive disorder in Caucasians. Earlier it was
called mucoviscidosis because of thick, viscid, mucous secretions that
accumulate, block airways and cause secondary infections. Recur-
rent respiratory infection is mostly the cause of death.
Figure 6.6 Genetic risk in an autosomal recessive disorder.
mebooksfree.com
Incidence
In Caucasians, incidence is 1 in 2000/3000. It is rarer in other
populations as 1 in 17,000 in North Americans.
Life Expectancy
Till 1955, it was 5 years; now it is about 25 years.
Clinical Presentation
It presents with chronic lung disease, recurrent respiratory infection
being the cause. Damage to lung leads to back pressure on right
ventricle. This leads to cardiac failure. In almost 85% of patients
with CF, pancreatic function is adversely affected. Pancreatic ducts
are blocked (viscid secretions). Pancreatic enzyme secretion is re-
duced, leading to malabsorption. This also increases fat content of
the stools.
Infertility in males is due to blockage of vas deferens. Other fea-
tures include meconium ileus (blockage of small bowel), cirrhotic
liver, rectal prolapse and so on.
Diagnosis
1. Elevated levels of sodium and chloride in sweat.
2. Measurement of immunoreactive trypsin (IRT) level in blood is
elevated because of blockage of pancreatic duct.
3. Gene mapping of CF locus. The CF locus is on the chromosome
7q31 as found by linkage analysis.
The gene is known as Cystic Fibrosis Transmembrane Conductance
Regulator (CFTR) gene. Its protein product is called CFTR. This
protein is involved in the chloride transport and mucin secretion
through the cell membrane. The most common mutation in CFTR
gene is caused by deletion of the 508th codon. It is symbolised
as D508.
Genetic Isolates
In some groups, one finds the frequent occurrence of otherwise
rare recessive disorders. For example, the frequency of Tay–Sachs
disease in general population is 1 in 360,000. However in the Ashke-
nazi Jews, the frequency of this disorder is 1 in 3600. In other words,
the frequency of Tay–Sachs disease in Ashkenazi Jews is 100 times
higher than general population.
This disease is characterised by neurological degeneration and
cherry red spots in the fundus of eye. The age of onset is around
6 months. Affected children lack an enzyme, hexosaminidase A.
Another example of rare recessive trait in genetic isolate is tyros-
inaemia. It is a lethal hepatic disorder found in French–Canadian
mebooksfree.com
Figure 6.7 Hairy pinna, a trait associated with Y chromosome.
children of Quebec. Carrier frequency is 1 in 30 in this genetic

isolate.
X-linked Inheritance
Sex chromosomes are different in males and females. Male chro-
mosome complement shows X and Y sex chromosomes, while fe-
male has two X chromosomes. This means when we talk about
sex-linked inheritance, it can be either X-linked or Y-linked in-
heritance. Genes on Y chromosome show holandric inheritance.
The Y chromosome bears H-Y antigen gene, which is of signifi-
cance. The only recognizable trait of hairy pinna is associated with
Y chromosome (Fig. 6.7). In short, this virtually means sex-linked
inheritance is synonymous with X-linked inheritance. Under X-
linked inheritance, it can be either recessive or dominant. As such
X-linked dominant traits are relatively rare, so let us now consider
X-linked recessive inheritance.
Males are said to be hemizygous in respect of X-linked gene since
they have only one X chromosome. An X-linked recessive trait is
determined by a gene carried on the X chromosome. It manifests in
females only when it is in double dose (homozygous state). There-
fore, females are rarely affected. A heterozygous female forms a
carrier. In males who are hemizygous for X-linked genes, the trait
expresses in single dose. This means males with single mutant gene
on their X-chromosome are affected.
There are numerous conditions under X-recessive traits, e.g.
haemophilia, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, colour blindness,
mebooksfree.com
G6PD deficiency, etc. Let us consider the progeny in case of

haemophilia.
1. Mother XHXh and father XHY.
2. Mother XHXH and father XhY. Here “H” stands for dominant allele
and “h” for recessive gene for haemophilia on X chromosome.
The outcome of this mating in the first situation (Fig. 6.8) is that
half of the daughters are normal, while the other half are carriers of
the trait. Similarly, half of the sons are normal and the other half are
affected.
In the second situation (Fig. 6.9), all the daughters are heterozy-
gote carriers and all the sons are normal.
Features of X-linked recessive inheritance (Fig.฀6.10)
Features of X-linked inheritance are as follows:
1. The trait affects males (rarely females).
2. The trait is transmitted from an affected male through all his
daughters to half of their sons.
3. No male to male transmission occurs, since father contributes
only Y chromosome to his sons.
4. In a kindred, affected males are related to each other through
carrier females.
Haemophilia
It is an X-linked recessive trait. The incidence of the disorder is 1 in
10,000 male births. In this, males are affected and females are carriers.
The chance of a female getting affected is remote. The basic defect is that
these individuals have a deficiency of factor VIII (anti-haemophilic
Figure 6.8 Checkerboard showing offsprings of carrier mother and normal

father in case of haemophilia.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 6.9 Checkerboard showing offsprings of an affected male and

normal female in haemophilia.
Figure 6.10 Pedigree of X-linked recessive
globulin) in the blood. Because of this defi-

ciency, the blood does not clot. On injury,
these persons bleed profusely. Clinical mani-
festation includes severe arthritis because of
haemorrhages within the joints. This particu-
lar X-linked disorder caught attention be-
cause Queen Victoria was a carrier of the
disorder.
Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD)
It is an X-linked recessive trait, character-
ised by progressive muscular weakness. It is
named after a French neurologist Guil- (Attributed to: St. George’s
laume Duchenne who described it in 1861. University of London.)
mebooksfree.com
Mutations involving the same gene lead to a milder condition called

Becker Muscular Dystrophy (BMD).
Incidence
It is 1 in 3500 males, while BMD is encountered with the frequency
of 1 in 20,000.
Clinical Features
Mostly DMD boys present between 3 and 5 years. They have muscu-
lar weakness manifesting as an awkward gait, difficulty in climbing
and inability to run. A typical problem is found when the child wants
to rise from the floor. The child attempts it by pushing on or “climb-
ing up” his legs and thighs. It is called Gower sign. Delay in learning
to walk around 18 months in DMD boys (normal child does it
around 12 months) usually brings them for consultation.
Lumbar lordosis is seen in advance cases. Increasing difficulty in walk-
ing confines them to wheelchair by the age of 11 years in most cases. It
is followed by joint contracture, respiratory failure and rarely cardiac
failure. The mean age about which death occurs is 18 years. IQ, mean
value is 83. The intellectual impairment is as a result of pleiotropic effect
of DMD gene mutation. BMD presents in milder form with an average
age of onset, 11 years. Patients remain ambulant till adult life.
Diagnosis
1. Creatine kinase level in serum is elevated; in normal boys—
200 i.u.; in DMD boys between 1000 and 20,000 i.u.
2. Muscle biopsy shows increased variation in fibre size in early stages,
and necrosis followed fibrous replacement in subsequent stages.
DMD locus and Gene: The DMD locus has been mapped to Xp 21
by linkage analysis. In two-third cases, one can identify gene deletion.
The protein product of DMD gene is called dystrophin. DMD gene is
the largest gene so far identified in humans. It consists of 2300 kilo-
bases of the genomic DNA. It has 79 exons. Its site of expression is
muscle; in some patients, it is in neurons of the cerebral cortex.
Hot Spots: They are the deletion sites in DMD gene detected after
Southern blot analysis with cDNA probes. The first is located in the
first 20 exons of the gene, while the other is in the centre of the
gene between 45 and 53 exons.
Management
There is no effective and satisfactory treatment available today; how-
ever, several approaches have been tried. These are:
1. Direct injection of recombinant DNA.
2. Myoblast implantation.
3. Transfection with retroviral or adenoviral vectors containing a
dystrophin minigene.
mebooksfree.com
X-linked Dominant Inheritance

In contrast to the X-linked recessive trait, the X-linked dominant
trait occurs more frequently in females. It is twice as common in
females as in males. The affected male transmits the trait to all his
daughters and none to his sons. This distinguishes X-linked domi-
nant inheritance from an autosomal dominant inheritance. Pedi-
grees in both types of dominant inheritance otherwise resemble
closely. Tracing progeny of an affected female does not offer a clue
in distinguishing between an autosomal and an X-linked dominant
inheritance. Examples of X-linked dominant inheritance are: Xg
blood group, Vitamin D-resistant rickets, hypophosphataemia, etc.
Features of X-linked dominant inheritance (Fig.฀6.11)
1. Trait is more frequent in females than in males who present rela-
tively milder expression of the disorder.
2. Affected male transmits the trait to all his daughters and not to
his sons.
3. Affected homozygote female transmits trait to all children.
4. An affected heterozygote female transmits the trait to half her
children of either sex. This mimics autosomal dominant trans-
mission; hence, to distinguish between autosomal and X-linked
dominant inheritance, one has to follow progeny of affected
male.
Fragile X
At this stage, it is worth mentioning a unique feature in medical
genetics called “Fragile X syndrome”. It is unique in the sense that
it is caused by a combination of a mutant gene with an associated
cytogenetic abnormality. It is clear that the mutant gene is X-linked,
but it is difficult to say whether it is dominant or recessive.
Clinical presentation of a fragile X case includes large prominent
ears, large sized testes after puberty along with mental retardation.
In fact, fragile X syndrome forms one of the important causes of
Figure 6.11 Pedigree of X-linked dominant disorder.
mebooksfree.com
mental retardation in males. Cytogenetic study needs little modifica-

tion in the procedure of karyotyping. The culture medium used to
grow cells is deficient in folic acid and thymidine. Low concentra-
tion of these substances in a medium gives better results. Affected
males show fragile X in about 35% cells. Carrier females may not
show fragile X at all. In some cases even if they show fragile X, it is
with low frequency. It is often located at the end of the long arm of
X chromosome (Xq 27–28). It was observed for the first time by
Lubs in the USA. It may be noted that fragile sites do occur along
other chromosomes apart from X chromosome, but their signifi-
cance is unknown to date.
Gene: Expression and Penetrance

Wide diversity in the expression of a gene causing a disorder may
lead to problems in correct diagnosis and interpretation of pedi-
gree, especially in an autosomal dominant trait. Expressivity of a
gene refers to a degree of expression, and in clinical terms it can
be mild, moderate or severe form of the disease. The word pene-
trance implies whether the gene will be expressed or not. If a per-
son has the mutant gene responsible for the trait, but it fails to ex-
press, the trait is said to show reduced penetrance. In fact,
penetrance follows what can be called all-or-none law. If the trait
caused by the same gene shows different forms/severity in different
members, it is said to exhibit variable expressivity. Clinical severity
of the disorder in different members shows variety of phenotypic
effects.
Pleiotropy
Normally, each gene has one primary effect, i.e. it directs synthesis
of a polypeptide. However, when a single gene or a gene pair pro-
duces multiple phenotypic effects, it is called “pleiotropy”. There
are plenty of examples among various clinical syndromes under this
category. In an autosomal recessive disorder called phenylketonuria
(PKU), an enzyme phenylalanine hydroxylase is deficient. This en-
zyme deficiency is a primary defect. It leads to multiple secondary
effects. They are severe mental retardation, PKU (passing phenyl
ketones in urine), hypopigmentation, etc. Galactosaemia forms an-
other example of pleiotropy. It is characterised by lack of an enzyme
galactose-1-phosphate-uridyl-transferase. Secondary effects of the
enzyme deficiency being cirrhosis of liver, cataract, mental retarda-
tion and galactosuria. In such events, the secondary untoward ef-
fects can be prevented by deletion of the specific component from
diet, such as phenylalanine-free diet be given to a baby with PKU.
This will prevent mental retardation.
mebooksfree.com
In some syndromes, signs and symptoms are related to a single

structural defect. For example, in osteogenesis imperfecta type 1,
the basic defect is in collagen synthesis. This accounts for multiple
secondary effects like brittle bones, osteosclerosis, blue sclerae, etc.
In yet another condition called Marfan syndrome, the primary de-
fect lies in synthesis of elastic fibres. This exhibits in pleiotropic
manifestations such as skeletal, ocular and cardiovascular anoma-
lies.
Genetic Heterogeneity
This is in contrast to pleiotropy. In genetic heterogeneity, several
genes produce one effect. On clinical examination, the traits appear
to be indistinguishable. However, each trait on genetic analysis re-
veals a different picture. Each trait could be because of mutation at
different sites or a different type of mutation at the same locus, for
example, deafness. In 1976, Fraser studied this condition. Accord-
ing to him, there are about 16–18 types of autosomal recessive deaf-
ness. Under autosomal dominant type, we have Waardenburg syn-
drome, in which deafness is associated with white forelock, pale
irides. Another autosomal dominant condition showing deafness as
a feature is first arch syndrome. Likewise, there are X-linked condi-
tions with associated deafness. In short, deafness is a common pre-
senting clinical manifestation in all of them. Each condition, how-
ever, arises from an involvement of genes at different loci or
different mutation at the same locus. This is called “genetic hetero-
geneity”. There are several examples of this; they include muscular
dystrophies and osteogenesis imperfecta, the latter having four ma-
jor types.
Sex-Limited Traits
We realise that if a trait is determined by an X-linked gene, then it
will not affect males and females in equal proportion, i.e. the sex
ratio will not be 1:1. In other words, if the sex ratio deviates from
1:1, it indicates an X-linked disorder. Such a deviation, however, is
not only associated with X-linked but also with autosomal genes.
The traits that are determined by autosomal transmission but are
expressed only in one sex are called sex-limited traits.
One of them is precocious puberty. This affects males. They are
heterozygous. These individuals develop secondary sexual charac-
ters and an increment in height much early, around 4–5 years. As
compared to normal boys of their age, they are taller in the initial
period. Early fusion between epiphyses and diaphyses, however,
makes them finally short men. The trait shows an autosomal domi-
nant inheritance.
mebooksfree.com
Sex-Influenced Traits
The trait is said to be sex-influenced when it expresses in both males
and females but with different frequencies. For example, baldness is
expressed in males as an autosomal dominant trait. Congenital ad-
renal hyperplasia is more commonly expressed in females.
Multifactorial Inheritance
A multifactorial trait is defined as one that results from a combina-
tion of factors, genetic as well as non-genetic, each exhibiting a mi-
nor role. It is believed to account for much of the normal variations
seen in families, and numerous common disorders too.
The term polygenic inheritance is commonly used alternatively
with multifactorial inheritance. This is because it is often difficult
to decide whether environmental factors are operational in
bringing about the defect or whether all the genes determining
the trait have small additive effects. The family patterns of many
normal traits and genetic defects go in favour of multifactorial
inheritance.
Among normal traits, we have family patterns peculiar of multi-
factorial inheritance. For example, height or stature of an individ-
ual, intelligence quotient (IQ) and total ridge count (TRC). All
Figure 6.12 A child with cleft lip and cleft palate (multifactorial inheritance).
mebooksfree.com
three traits are measurable, i.e. stature in centimetres of height,

TRC as number of ridges, and IQ as points. Both genetic as well as
environmental factors appear to be instrumental in governing all
the three traits that are mentioned above.
Some of the common congenital malformations show multifacto-
rial inheritance. For example, cleft lip, cleft palate (Fig. 6.12), club
foot, congenital dislocation of hip joint (CDH), congenital heart
disease (CHD), and neural tube defects such as anencephaly and
spina bifida, etc. Non-genetic factors operational under multifacto-
rial inheritance include teratogenic agents. They are:
1. Drugs, e.g. thalidomide, anti-convulsants, anti-cancer drugs, anti-
malarials, etc.
2. Infections, e.g. rubella virus.
3. Ionising radiations, e.g. X-rays and administration of radioactive
substances such as I131, P32 and Au198.
Summary
The genetic disorders are classified into three categories: (i) chromo-
somal disorders; (ii) single gene disorders and (iii) multifactorial inheritance.
Analysis of Genetic Disorder: It involves the following steps—
Family history: Does any relative suffer from similar trait? Does any relative
show any other disease? Ask for any condition in past (gone unnoticed). Is
proband an outcome of consanguinity? What is ethnic group?
Record of the following:
i) Infant deaths, stillbirth and abortions.
ii) Illegitimacy is to be borne in mind.
iii) Address and contact numbers of family members.
Pedigree: It depicts the family data and gives information about mode of
inheritance.
Mendelian Inheritance (Single Gene Disorders)
Caused by single gene mutation; they exhibit four patterns:
i) Autosomal dominant ii) Autosomal recessive

iii) Sex/X-linked dominant iv) X-linked recessive inheritance
Autosomal Dominant Inheritance: An autosomal dominant (AD) trait is
expressed in heterozygote state. Homozygotes are severely affected.
Pedigree Analysis
a. An affected person has affected parent.
b. An affected person has normal and abnormal offsprings in equal
proportion
c. Both males and females are equally affected.
d. Trait appears in every generation.
e. Normal children of an affected person do not transmit disease.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Unaffected Parent in Dominant Trait
a. If trait is due to mutant gene, e.g. achondroplasia, tuberous sclerosis.
b. Gene present in the parent has low expressivity.
c. Extramarital paternity.
An AD trait shows two features: (i) Delayed onset, e.g. Huntington chorea
and (ii) Variable clinical expression, e.g. multiple endocrine–adenoma–
peptic ulcer syndrome.
Features of Autosomal Recessive (AR) Trait: Expressed in homozygous
state only.
i) The trait appears in sibs and not in parents.
ii) About 25% sibs of proband are affected.
iii) Both males and females are equally affected.
iv) Parents of the proband may be consanguineous.
If both parents are carriers, the children shall be 25% normal, 50% het-
erozygote carriers and 25% homozygote affected. Many inborn errors of
metabolism follow AR inheritance, e.g. PKU, mucopolysaccharidosis,
cystic fibrosis, etc.
Cystic Fibrosis (CF): Occurs as a common AR trait in Caucasians. It pres-
ents with recurrent respiratory infection, pancreatic dysfunction, malabsorp-
tion and infertility in males. Diagnosis is possible with (i) elevated Na and
Cl levels in sweat; (ii) raised immunoreactive trypsin (IRT) in blood; and (iii)
gene mapping. CF locus is at 7q31. The gene is Cystic Fibrosis Transmem-
brane Conductance Regulator (CFTR) gene.
Genetic Isolates: A group that has frequent occurrence of otherwise rare
disease, e.g. Tay–Sachs disease in Ashkenazi Jews. The disease fre-
quency is 100 times more than the general population. Other example is
tyrosinaemia found in French–Canadian children of Quebec.
X-linked Inheritance: H-Y antigen gene is the only significant gene, and
hairy pinna as the only recognizable trait associated with Y chromosome.
In short, sex-linked inheritance is synonymous with X-linked inheritance.
Features of X-linked Recessive Inheritance:
a. Trait affects males (rarely females).
b. Trait is transmitted from affected males through his carrier daughters
to half of their sons.
c. No male-to-male transmission occurs.
d. In kindred, affected males are related through carrier females.
Haemophilia: An X-linked recessive trait affecting males. It occurs with
frequency of 1 in 10,000 male births. Basic defect is deficiency of factor
VIII (anti-haemophilic globulin) in blood. Blood does not clot. An injury
causes profuse bleeding and haemorrhage in joints leads to severe arthri-
tis. Queen Victoria was carrier of the disorder.
Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD): An X-linked recessive trait char-
acterised by progressive muscular weakness, named after a French neu-
rologist Guillaume Duchenne. Incidence is 1 in 3500 male births. Features
are muscular weakness, awkward gait, Gower sign, lumbar lordosis, and
later on joint contractures, respiratory failure and cardiac failure. Diagnosis:
Creatinine kinase level is elevated, muscular biopsy reveals increase in
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
fibre size, later on necrosis and fibrous replacement. DMD Locus and
Gene: Locus is at Xp21 and the protein product of DMD gene is dystro-
phin. DMD gene is the largest gene in man with 2300 kb size. There are
deletion sites in DMD gene, detected on Southern Blot. Management:
Direct injection of recombinant DNA, myoblast implantation and transfec-
tion with retroviral vectors containing dystrophin minigene.
X-Linked Dominant Inheritance: It is more frequent in females. An af-
fected male transmits the trait to all his daughters and none to his sons,
e.g. vitamin D resistance rickets, hypophosphataemia.
Pedigree Features:
• Trait is more frequent in females.
• Affected male transmits the trait to all his daughters and not to his
sons.
• Affected female, if homozygote, transmits trait to all her children.
Fragile X: This syndrome is unique; it is caused by combination of mutant
gene with an associated cytogenetic abnormality. Clinical features include
prominent ears, large testes, mental retardation. Karyotype reveals fragile
X in 35% of cells at Xq 27–28.
Gene Expression and Penetrance: Expressivity of gene refers to the degree
of expression; it can be mild, moderate or severe. The word penetrance
implies whether the gene will be expressed or not (follows all-or-none law).
Pleiotropy: It refers to multiple phenotypic effects caused by single gene or
gene pair, e.g. Phenylketonuria. It is an AR trait with deficiency of phenyl-
alanine hydroxylase enzyme as primary defect. It leads to multiple second-
ary defects such as mental retardation, phenylketonuria, hypopigmenta-
tion, etc. In some syndromes, e.g. osteogenesis imperfecta type I, the
basic defect is in collagen synthesis; this leads to multiple secondary ef-
fects such as brittle bones, blue sclerae and so on.
Genetic Heterogeneity: It is in contrast to pleiotropy, i.e. several genes
produce one effect. Clinically the traits are indistinguishable. However,
each trait on analysis reveals mutation at different sites or different types
of mutation at the same locus, e.g. deafness. Fraser has demonstrated
16–18 types of autosomal recessive deafness.
Sex-Limited Traits: The traits that are determined by autosomal transmis-
sion but are expressed in one sex only, e.g. precocious puberty in males.
Sex-Influenced Traits: Trait is so called when it expresses in both males
as well as females but with different frequencies, e.g. baldness is ex-
pressed in males, congenital adrenal hyperplasia in females.
Multifactorial Inheritance: Trait that results from combination of both fac-
tors, genetic as well as non-genetic, e.g. height/stature, intelligence quotient
(IQ), total ridge count (TRC). Some common congenital malformations
are—cleft lip, cleft palate, congenital dislocation of hip, etc.
mebooksfree.com
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What are the criteria of an autosomal dominant trait?
2. How will you explain an unaffected parent in dominant trait?
3. All of the following are autosomal dominant traits except:
a. Tuberous sclerosis b. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy
c. Treacher Collin syndrome d. Neurofibromatosis
4. What are the features of pedigree of an autosomal recessive trait?
5. What is the connotation of the word “carrier” in genetics?
6. Which one of the following mode of inheritance is found in cystic fibrosis?
a. Autosomal recessive b. Autosomal dominant
c. X-linked recessive d. Multifactorial
7. Which one of the following is the site of CF locus?
a. 13q14 b. 11p21
c. 7q31 d. Xq22
8. What does CFTR stand for?
9. What is genetic isolate?
10. Why sons of an affected haemophilic father are normal?
11. Duchenne muscular dystrophy is transmitted as:
a. Autosomal recessive trait b. Autosomal dominant trait
c. X-linked recessive trait d. X-linked dominant trait
12. What is peculiar of DMD gene?
13. What are “hot spots”?
14. What is the unique feature of fragile X syndrome?
15. What is pleiotropy?
16. What is meant by sex-limited trait?
17. What is meant by sex-influenced trait?
18. Name four traits with multifactorial inheritance.
19. What is pedigree?
20. Match the following:
Clinical Entity Mode of Inheritance
1. Cystic fibrosis a. Autosomal dominant
2. Hypophosphataemia b. Autosomal recessive
3. Tuberous sclerosis c. X-linked dominant
4. Duchenne muscular dystrophy d. X-linked recessive
mebooksfree.com
Biochemical
7 Genetics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Basis฀of฀inborn฀errors฀of฀metabolism
•฀Haemoglobinopathies฀and฀types฀of฀haemoglobin
•฀Genesis฀of฀thalassaemias
KEY WORDS
Phenyl฀ketoneuria฀(PKU),฀Mucoplysaccharidosis฀(MPS),฀G6PD฀฀
deiciency
Biochemical events in the living organism whirl around DNA and

proteins encoded by it. The proteins make either structural protein
or enzymes that govern various metabolic processes. The proteins
synthesised in the body influence growth as well as differentiation.
Any alteration in DNA information (i.e. gene mutation) will result
in the production of variant protein, and this in turn has pheno-
typic effect. Such an effect may involve an amino acid substitution,
altering structural protein such as haemoglobin. The phenotypic
effect of it may be in the form of its altered affinity for oxygen or
tendency to sickle. An alteration in amino acid sequence in an en-
zyme may alter its activity, usually decreasing it, but occasionally this
alteration in enzymic structure may enhance its activity. Genetically
determined variations also manifest in altered response to drugs in
some individuals. In short, let us now define the extent and scope
of biochemical genetics and also what we shall discuss under this
chapter:
1. Gene mutations leading to inborn errors of metabolism.
2. Haemoglobinopathies and normal haemoglobin.
3. Polymorphisms revealed by an altered response to drugs.
124
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 7 —฀Biochemical฀Genetics 125
INBORN ERRORS OF METABOLISM

Grouped under this heading are the bio-
chemical disorders in which there is an
enzyme defect (Table 7.1). This defect is
genetically determined. It produces al-
teration in the metabolic process. The
first example of this was cited by Garrod
in 1902, as alkaptonuria. He noted that
the excretion of alcapton or homogen-
tisic acid in these patients is because of
the failure of breakdown of benzene ring
of tyrosine. However, it took long time for
the first specific enzyme defect to be (Source: Metabolism: Clinical and
demonstrated leading to an inborn error. Experimental: Archibald Edward
In 1952, Gerty Cori demonstrated that Garrod: the physician father of
lack of glucose-6-phosphatase leads to biochemistry; Anna Piro, Antonio
Von Gierke disease. Tagarelli, Giuseppe Tagarelli, Paolo
Lagonia, Aldo Quattrone. Elsevier,
April 2009.)
Table 7.1 Few Important Inborn Errors of Metabolism

Clinical
Disorder Enzyme Inheritance Manifestations
Acatalasia Catalase AR May present as oral

gangrene
Albinism Tyrosinase AR may be Lack of pigment in skin,

X-linked hair and eyes (Fig. 7.1)
Alkaptonuria Homogentisic AR Arthritis

acid oxidase
Cystinuria Not known AR Renal stones,

aminoaciduria
Galactosaemia Galactose-1- AR Mental retardation,

phosphate uridyl- cataract, cirrhosis
yltransferase
Gaucher Glucocerebrosi- AR Hepatosplenomegaly,

disease dase thrombocytopenia and
anaemia
G6PD Glucose-6- X-linked Haemolysis in

deficiency phosphate response to some drugs
dehydrogenase
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Table 7.1 Few Important Inborn Errors of Metabolism—cont’d
Clinical
Disorder Enzyme Inheritance Manifestations
Hunter Sulphoiduronate XR Hepatosplenomegaly,

syndrome sulphatase mental retardation,
skeletal abnormalities
Hurler a-Iduronidase AR Same as above, in

syndrome addition there is
corneal clouding
Isoniazid slow N-acetyltransfer- AR Neurological

inactivator ase problems
Niemann–Pick Sphingomyelin- AR CNS damage, cherry red

disease ase spot on macula and hep-
atosplenomegaly
Phenylketon- Phenylalanine AR Microcephaly, mental

uria hydroxylase retardation
Porphyria More hepatic AR Acute abdominal pain

(acute ALA synthetase episode, neurological
intermittent) problems, excessive ex-
cretion of amino-levulinic
acid (ALA) in urine
Tay–Sachs Hexosaminidase-A AR Convulsions, mental

disease retardation, blindness
Vitamin-D Renal defect in XD Rickets

resistant phosphate
rickets reabsorption
Wilson Not known AR Cirrhosis of liver, Kayser–

disease Fleischer ring in cornea,
neurological problems
(Adapted and Modified from: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition,
Table 10.1, Page 152, Churchill Livingstone.)
Figure 7.1 A case of albinism showing lack of pigment in skin, hair and eyes.
mebooksfree.com
Genesis of Inborn Errors of Metabolism

Alteration in the DNA sequence is the basic defect responsible for
inborn errors of metabolism. It causes change in the structure of an
enzyme or protein coded by it. This defective enzyme shall have:
1. reduced activity because its affinity towards substrate is reduced, or
2. the structurally different enzyme molecule may be unstable with
resultant error in metabolism.
Pathogenesis in these disorders is explained as under:
1. Accumulation of precursor due to lack of enzyme activity, e.g.
phenylketonuria.
2. The end product of metabolism being less, manifests accordingly,
e.g. congenital adrenal hyperplasia.
In non-metabolic errors, the genesis of disease could be different,
e.g. familial hypercholesterolaemia. In this, the cell surface recep-
tors are defective for low density lipoprotein (LDL). As a result,
LDL-bound cholesterol remains outside the cell. In yet another
non-metabolic error called I-cell disease, the enzymes do not reach
lysosomes resulting in lysosomal malfunction.
Phenylketonuria (PKU)
The specific enzyme defect in this disorder was demonstrated by
Jervis in 1953. The defective enzyme found was phenylalanine hy-
droxylase. Steps in phenyl-alanine metabolism and the related disor-
ders are shown in Fig. 7.2.
In PKU, lack of phenylalanine hydroxylase causes phenylalanine
to follow an alternative pathway. This converts it into phenylpyruvic
acid and other toxic metabolites. These are excreted in the urine.
Manifestation
A child born with PKU is normal at birth, but subsequently as it receives
phenyl-alanine in diet, toxic metabolites of phenylalanine metabolism
accumulate causing damage. This leads to mental retardation.
In addition, phenylalanine is not converted into tyrosine. So this
reduces proportion of melanin. This results in PKU child present-
ing with blond hair, blue eyes and lack of pigment in the brain, e.g.
in substantia nigra.
Diagnosis
It can be accomplished by:
1. Ferric chloride test: Detection of phenylpyruvic acid in urine.
2. Guthrie test: It is bacterial inhibition assay to detect excess of
serum phenylalanine.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 7.2 Phenylalanine metabolism in body. The related disorders are:

(1) phenylketonuria, (2) alkaptonuria, (3) dyshormonogenesis and (4) albinism.
Treatment
The ideal way to treat these children would be to offer them defective
enzyme. Somehow it is not possible and hence we resort to other alter-
natives, i.e. to eliminate phenylalanine from the diet. Since it forms one
of the essential amino acids, it cannot be removed from the diet com-
pletely. So, what one can do is to give a controlled amount of phenyl-
alanine in the diet, simultaneously monitoring the blood level of this
amino acid. Early detection of the defect is essential, otherwise mental
retardation results. Amount of damage once caused is irreversible.
Mucopolysaccharidoses (MPS)
It is a group of lysosomal storage disorders. It results from defective
degradation of carbohydrate side chain of acid mucopolysaccharides.
It causes accumulation of glycosaminoglycans, which leads to prob-
lems in the central nervous system, vascular system or skeletal system.
There are about a dozen conditions described under this group. Of
these, two claim their position in the following descriptions.
Hunter syndrome
It was first described in 1917. It is inherited as an X-linked disorder.
The deficient enzyme is sulphoiduronate sulphatase. There is ac-
cumulation of dermatan and heparan sulphates causing multiple
problems in the body.
mebooksfree.com
Clinical features
The clinical features include typical gargoyle face and short stature asso-
ciated with skeletal malformations. The children are mentally retarded.
The disorder is progressive and is manifested as severe or mild form.
Hurler syndrome
It was first demonstrated in 1919. It follows autosomal recessive in-
heritance. The deficient enzyme responsible for this condition is
a-iduronidase. There is defective degradation of mucopolysaccha-
rides causing accumulation of heparan and dermatan sulphates. It
presents a similar clinical picture as in Hunter syndrome except that
corneal clouding is found in Hurler syndrome. Hurler syndrome is
usually fatal in childhood. It is believed that transfusion of plasma
or leucocytes may serve as a source of deficient enzyme in these
patients. This may show a temporary improvement.
HAEMOGLOBINS AND HAEMOGLOBINOPATHIES
Geneticists owe a lot to haemoglobins, which have offered a molecu-

lar basis of human genetics. Haemoglobin is a transporter of oxy-
gen. There is a group of disorders of haemoglobins called haemo-
globinopathies. To understand them, it becomes essential for us to
study the structure, function and formation of haemoglobin.
Structure of Haemoglobin
It is a protein in red blood cells. It is engaged in the transport of
oxygen. The molecular weight is 64,500 (daltons). The molecule
has two components, the first one is the “haem” part responsible for
oxygen transport. It is similar in all types of haemoglobins. The
other component is the “globin” portion. It is this part that varies in
various forms of haemoglobins.
Haemoglobin molecule has its globin portion formed by four poly-
peptide chains. In HbA (haemoglobin in adult), there are two
a chains and two b chains (non-a chains). HbA is expressed by the
formula a2b2. Both a and b chains are almost equal in length. The
a chain has 141 amino acids and b chain has 146 amino acids—a total
of 287 amino acids. a chain is coded by a gene on chromosome 16;
b chain is coded by b gene on chromosome 11. Since they are located
on different chromosomes, mutation may involve either a chain or
b chain, but not both. The haemoglobin molecule shows eight helical
regions. The iron atom haem is attached to histidine by a bond, the
only link between haem and globin portions. Other non-a chains are
d, g and [ chains. They are more like b chains. They are present in
various forms of haemoglobins. Table 7.2 shows a few of the abnor-
mal forms found in human beings.
mebooksfree.com
Table 7.2 Some Normal and Abnormal Forms of Haemoglobins
Haemoglobin Structure Percentage in Adult

HbA a2b2 97–98
HbA2 a2b2 2–3
HbF a2g2 Less than 1
Gower I z2[2
Gower II a2[2
Abnormal forms
HbS a2b2 (b26 glu–val)

HbC a2b2 (b26 glu–lys)
HbH b4
(Adapted and Modified from: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition,
Scan to Play Haemoglobin structure
Let us consider some clinically important abnormal presentations

of haemoglobins.
Haemoglobin S: Sickle Cell Disease

It was the first abnormal haemoglobin identified. In 1949, Pauling identi-
fied physico-chemical alterations in haemoglobin S by electrophoresis.
On further analysis, it was found that b globin chain of HbS is different
from HbA. Valine replaces glutamic acid in the sixth position of b chain
in HbS molecule. This change is responsible for the difference in elec-
trophoretic mobility of HbS and HbA. In the heterozygote of sickle cell,
there is a mixture of HbS and HbA, while homozygote has only HbS type
of haemoglobin. Heterozygote presents as sickle cell trait, a milder form
that appears to be clinically normal. Homozygote presents as sickle cell
disease. These patients have red cells with a tendency to sickle. This leads
to anaemia and subsequently splenomegaly and weakness. The red cells
tend to clump/cluster. This in turn causes thrombosis/infarction and
ischaemia. The total effect is in the form of abdominal pain, splenic in-
farction, bony tenderness, haematuria, renal failure and heart failure.
Haemoglobin C
It shows a replacement along b chain very much like HbS. The replace-
ment involves glutamic acid replaced by lysine in the sixth position of
HbA from N-terminal. This form of haemoglobin is found in Africa.
mebooksfree.com
Lepore haemoglobin
In this type, the haemoglobin has normal a chain but non-a chain
has a part homologous to N-terminal of d chain and a part homolo-
gous to C-terminal of normal b chain. Together they form d b chain.
This happens because d and b genes (coding for these chains)
resemble to 136 sites out of 146. It means, they differ only at 10 sites.
The genes coding for these chains are altered. During meiosis be-
cause of mismatching, there is formation of a new gene with por-
tions of both d and b genes. This is a fusion product and is called
Lepore gene, associated with deletion of part of each locus.
The fusion product could be with b gene portion followed by
d gene portion. This is called “anti-Lepore gene”. It is associated
with duplication (Fig. 7.3).
Thalassaemias
The word thalassaemia is derived from a Greek word Thalassa mean-
ing sea. It is also called Mediterranean anaemia according to its distri-
bution. This forms a group of disorders with problems of haemoglo-
bin synthesis. The structure of haemoglobin is not defective. Let us see
what is the problem in synthesis. Haemoglobin as we know consists of
a and b chains. Now imagine a situation in which the rate of synthesis
of any one of these chains is reduced. This means if a chain synthesis
rate is lowered, there will be excess of b chains (comparatively) having
normal synthesis rate. This creates problems with maturation and sur-
vival of erythrocytes. There are two main groups:
a-thalassaemias
They are characterised by a lowered rate of synthesis or an absence of
synthesis of a chains. This naturally affects both foetal as well as adult
haemoglobin synthesis. To understand the defect, let us go back to the
gene level. The a chains are coded by a genes. There are two of them
Figure 7.3Diagrammatic representation of formation of Lepore and anti-

Lepore genes.
mebooksfree.com
Table 7.3 Correlation Between Genotype

and a Chain Synthesis
Genotype Synthesis of a Chain

—/— 0%
a–/— 25%
a–/a or a a/— 50%
a a/a – 75%
a a/a a 100%
(Adapted and Modified from: Thompson and Thompson, Genetics in

Medicine, Sixth Edition, Table 11.3, Page 195, Saunders, 2004.)
with each chromosome 16. This means, in total there are four a genes,
each accounting for 25% of a globin component. What is the effect of
these genes? In a homozygote of a-thalassaemia, all four genes are ab-
sent, so no a chain synthesis occurs. In short, if all four genes are present
a total of 100% synthesis of a chain occurs; with two genes it is 50%, and
with one gene it is 25%. The deletion/mutation of a progressively higher
number of genes accounts for more severe abnormality (Table 7.3).
b-thalassaemias
The disorder involves defect in b chain synthesis. It, therefore, affects
synthesis of HbA (adult haemoglobin). It is a result of mutation or
deletion of b gene on chromosome 11. There is one locus on each
11 chromosome, i.e. there are two genes. Homozygotes of b-thalassaemia
with both b genes altered present as thalassaemia major. Heterozy-
gotes, however, present in milder form. The homozygotes have severe
anaemia. b-Thalassaemia may result from deletion of a part of b gene
complex or it may be an outcome of Hb Lepore, i.e. d b fusion gene.
An attempt was made to treat patients of b-thalassaemias by using
5-azacytidine. It promotes g globin synthesis. This increases synthe-
sis of HbF (a2g2). The drug is also helpful in sickle cell anaemia.
Prenatal diagnosis of homozygous b-thalassaemia can be done by
foetal blood sampling around the 18th week of gestation. This helps
in genetic counselling and management of the disorder.
PHARMACOGENETICS AND DISORDERS RELATED

TO DRUGS
I am not very good at mathematics; however, the equations placed
below allow me to think. Have a look at them.
mebooksfree.com
In the first situation, the patient suffering from a disease gets

cured with the administration of drug. In the second, the same drug
is being used for the same disease, but patient has no relief. In the
third situation, the drug and the disease being the same but the result
is disastrous, patient succumbs to the disease/dies.
In short, what we analyse from these situations is that in all the
three cases, the disease and the drug were same; however, the results
are much different. In one, we found complete cure; in the second,
no relief; and in the third, the individual showed adverse reaction.
Here the variable is the person, i.e. patients’ genetic profile governs
as to how patient will respond to a particular drug. This brings us to
the term “Pharmacogenetics”.
The term pharmacogenetics was first used by Vogel. It deals with
genetically determined variations that become evident with an al-
tered response to drugs. The scope of pharmacogenetics encom-
passes investigations to reveal the cause of:
1. Antibiotic resistance in some strains of bacteria.
2. Resistance to organophosphorous compounds (used as insecti-
cides) in some insects. This has application in public health.
3. Defining potency of a drug.
4. Explaining sensitivity of some individuals to a particular drug.
Fate of Drug
A majority of drugs follow an underlying course in the body (Fig. 7.4).
Transformation of drugs involves some important processes, viz.:
1. Conjugation: It occurs chiefly in the liver. It may be glucuro-
nide conjugation. Morphine and codeine are processed in this
manner.
2. Acetylation: It also occurs in the liver and involves an addition of
acetyl group to the original molecule. Isoniazid, an anti-tubercular
drug, follows this manner of inactivation. Sulphonamides also fol-
low a similar pattern. We shall now see some of the polymorphisms
for drug response.
Acatalasia
Persons with acatalasia do not have an enzyme catalase. This enzyme
breaks down hydrogen peroxide into oxygen and water. It is present
in the blood. This condition, acatalasia, was discovered by a Japanese
mebooksfree.com
Figure 7.4 Drug metabolism in body.
clinician Takahara in 1946, while treating a girl for oral gangrene.

After the removal of gangrenous tissue, he poured hydrogen perox-
ide to sterilise the wound. He observed that blood turned brownish
black in colour on contact with hydrogen peroxide. He suggested
that it was probably due to lack of catalase in red cells of the patient,
and haemoglobin was oxidised to methaemoglobin thus giving a
brownish–black colour. Under this condition, there are three types
of individuals:
1. Person homozygous for normal gene has a normal enzyme
level.
2. Person homozygous for acatalasia gene has no enzyme in the
blood.
3. Person heterozygote has a moderate level of enzyme in the
blood.
Glucose-6-phosphate-dehydrogenase deficiency
It is inherited as an X-linked recessive disorder. In these individuals,
there is a deficiency of red cell G6PD. They suffer from haemolytic
episodes with primaquine, a drug used to prevent relapses in case of
malaria. On administration of the drug, there are no adverse effects
initially. Afterwards, the patient begins to pass dark/black urine,
develops jaundice and his haemoglobin percentage reduces. These
persons are sensitive to many drugs, e.g. phenacetin, sulphon-
amides, aspirin, furadantin, etc.
mebooksfree.com
Succinylcholine sensitivity
It is inherited as an autosomal recessive trait. Succinylcholine is a
drug that is widely used as a muscle relaxant in anaesthesia. Its mol-
ecule structurally consists of two molecules of acetylcholine. It is
rapidly hydrolysed by an enzyme serum cholinesterase. Previously it
was called pseudocholinesterase, because its hydrolytic action on
acetylcholine is slower than red cell enzyme “true cholinesterase”.
In patients having succinylcholine sensitivity, the enzyme does not
destroy the drug at normal rate. This may cause prolonged apnoea
in these patients. Now it is possible to study plasma pseudocholines-
terase by using a local anaesthetic dibucaine. It is expressed as a di-
bucaine number.
Malignant hyperthermia
It may rarely follow as an anaesthetic complication. It forms a rare
autosomal dominant trait. There is hyperpyrexia to the tune of 108°F,
usually following the use of halothane as anaesthetic agent and suc-
cinylcholine as relaxant for intubation. The basic defect is reduced
uptake and binding of calcium ions in sarcoplasmic reticulum.
Isoniazid activation
Isoniazid is used as an anti-tubercular drug. The drug is used
orally. It gets absorbed from the gut into the blood, raising the
blood isoniazid level. This is followed by inactivation and excre-
tion of the drug, reducing its blood level. Considering isoniazid
metabolism, there are two types of individuals, slow and rapid
inactivators of isoniazid. The drug is metabolised by acetylation,
and involves an enzyme, hepatic N-acetyltransferase. The slow in-
activators are homozygous for an autosomal recessive gene for the
hepatic N-acetyltransferase.
The clinical implication of the isoniazid inactivation study is that
the slow inactivators may suffer from isoniazid toxicity. This may be
manifested as polyneuritis or systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE)-
like disorder. However, rapid inactivators carry an increased risk of
hepatic damage.
Summary
Biochemical events in an organism whirl around DNA and proteins encoded
by it. Alterations in DNA (i.e. mutation) lead to variant protein production with
phenotypic effect.
Inborn Errors of Metabolism (IEM): A genetically determined enzyme
defect alters metabolic process. In 1902, Garrod demonstrated the first
example as alkaptonuria.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Genesis of IEM: An alteration in DNA sequence causes change in structure
of an enzyme or protein. The defective enzyme may have reduced activity
or may be unstable with resultant metabolic error. Pathogenesis of the
disorder can be explained in two ways—(i) Accumulation of precursor,
e.g. PKU; (ii) end product of metabolism being less has its effect,
e.g. congenital adrenal hyperplasia.
Phenylketonuria (PKU): Demonstrated by Jervis in 1953, the disorder is
due to deficiency of phenylalanine hydroxylase. This converts it into phe-
nylpyruvic acid and other toxic metabolites. Accumulation of these toxic
metabolites leads to mental retardation. Phenylalanine cannot be con-
verted into tyrosine; this reduces production of melanin and hence leads
to blond hair, blue eyes, lack of pigment in substantia nigra.
Diagnosis: (i) Ferric chloride test; (ii) Guthrie test.
Treatment: Give controlled amount of phenylalanine in the diet, simultane-
ously monitoring its blood level.
Mucopolysaccharidoses (MPS): It is a group of lysosomal storage disor-
ders, with defective degradation of carbohydrate side chain of acid muco-
polysaccharide. It leads to accumulation of glycosaminoglycans with prob-
lems in CNS, CVS and skeletal systems, e.g. Hunter syndrome. It is an
X-linked disorder. Enzyme sulphoiduronate sulphatase is deficient, causing
accumulation of dermatan and heparan sulphates. This presents with typical
gargoyle face, short stature, skeletal malformations and mental retardation.
Hurler syndrome: It is an autosomal recessive trait. Enzyme a-iduronidase
is deficient, causing defective degradation of mucopolysaccharides
and accumulation of dermatan and heparan sulphates. Clinically, it has
similar features as Hunter syndrome, but in addition there is corneal
clouding.
Haemoglobins and Haemoglobinopathies

Structure of haemoglobin molecule: It has a molecular weight of 64500
daltons. It consists of two parts, “haem” (O2 transporter) and “globin”. It is the
globin part that varies in various forms of haemoglobins. Four polypeptide
chains, two a and two b (non-a chain) make globin part. HbA (haemoglobin
in adult) is expressed as a2b2. a chain has 141 amino acids, and
b chain has 146 amino acids. a chain is coded by a gene on chromosome
16, and b chain is coded with b gene on chromosome 11. Since they are
located on different chromosomes, mutation may involve either one or both.
The Hb molecule shows eight helical regions with iron atom haem attached
to histidine by a bond, the only link between haem and globin fractions. Other
non-a chains found in different forms of haemoglobins are d, g and e chains.
Haemoglobin S—Sickle cell disease: Haemoglobin S (HbS) was the first
abnormal haemoglobin found in 1949. In this, valine replaces glutamic acid
in sixth position of b chain in HbS molecule. This alters its electrophoretic
mobility. A homozygote has only HbS and suffers from sickle cell disease,
while a heterozygote of sickle cell has a mixture of HbS and HbA and suffers
from a milder form called sickle cell trait. In sickle cell disease/trait, the RBCs
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
tend to clump/cluster, in turn causing thrombosis, infarction, abdominal
pain, bony tenderness, haematuria, etc.
Haemoglobin C: It is found in Africa; in this, glutamic acid is replaced by
lysine in sixth position of HbA.
Lepore haemoglobin: In this haemoglobin, a chain is normal but the non-
a chain has a part homologous to N-terminal of d chain and a part ho-
mologous to C-terminal of normal b chain. Together they form db chain.
This is because d and b gene (coding for these chains) resemble to 136
sites out of 146, thus differing only at 10 sites. A fusion product is db gene
(Lepore gene). A fusion product with b gene portion followed by d gene
portion is called “anti-Lepore gene”.
Thalassaemias
Thalassa, a Greek word means sea. It is also called Mediterranean anaemia
owing to its distribution. It is of two types—
• a-Thalassaemia: It is characterised by lowered rate of synthesis or
absence of synthesis of a chains of the haemoglobin molecule. This is
due to deletion/mutation involving a gene/s on chromosome 16. There
are total four a genes; depending on number of genes involved it will
manifest in mild or severe forms.
• b-Thalassaemia: It involves b chain synthesis. There are two b genes.
In homozygotes both genes are altered and they present as Thalassae-
mia major while heterozygote presents milder form of Thalassaemia.
An attempt to treat b Thalassaemia with 5-azacytidine that promotes
g globin synthesis have been made.
Pharmacogenetics: It deals with genetically determined variations in
response to drugs. The scope of pharmacogenetics includes antibiotic
resistance in bacteria, resistance to organophosphorus compounds in
insects, defining potency of drugs and explaining sensitivity of some
persons to a particular drug.
Fate of a Drug: Transformation of a drug involves glucuronide conjugation
or addition of an acetyl group, i.e. acetylation in liver.
Acatalasia: In this, enzyme catalase in RBCs is lacking, therefore haemo-
globin is oxidised to methaemoglobin giving brownish-black colour on
exposure. Both homo- and heterozygotes for acatalasia gene are known.
G6PD deficiency: It is an X-linked recessive disorder. The individuals with
G6PD deficiency of red cells suffer from haemolytic episodes with prima-
quine, an antimalarial drug. They are sensitive to many drugs, e.g. phen-
acetin, sulphonamides, aspirin, etc.
Succinylcholine sensitivity: It is a muscle relaxant used in anaesthesia. It is
hydrolysed by serum cholinesterase. In patients with succinylcholine sensi-
tivity, the drug is not hydrolysed at normal rate and may result in prolonged
apnoea.
Malignant hyperthermia (108°F): It is anaesthetic complication and is an AD
trait. Halothane, an anaesthetic agent, and succinylcholine, a relaxant, used in
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
intubation may lead to malignant hyperthermia in some individuals. This is

because of reduced uptake and binding of Ca ions in sarcoplasmic reticulum.
Isoniazid activation: Isoniazid is an anti-TB drug. Its inactivation involves
enzyme N-acetyltransferase. These are of two types. The slow inactivators
are homozygous for an AR gene for N-acetyltransferase and may suffer
from isoniazid toxicity, while rapid inactivators are at risk of hepatic damage.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What is meant by inborn error of metabolism?

2. What is PKU?
3. What do you mean by haemoglobinopathy?
4. What is pharmacogenetics?
5. What is the scope of pharmacogenetics?
6. Who coined the term pharmacogenetics?
7. Enumerate the processes by which drugs are dealt within the body.
8. What is acatalasia?
9. What is the mode of inheritance in G6PD deficiency?
mebooksfree.com
Genetics of
Blood Groups 8
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Basis฀of฀formation฀of฀blood฀groups฀and฀common฀blood฀group฀
systems
•฀Other฀blood฀group฀systems
KEY WORDS
ABO฀blood฀group,฀Bombay฀phenotype,฀Haemolytic฀disease฀of฀฀
newborn฀(HDN)
The first breakthrough in the history of

blood group system was in the year 1900—
Landsteiner discovered ABO blood group
system this year. Study of the blood group
system offers understanding of some of the
genetic principles, such as multiple alleles,
polymorphism, immune reactions, linkage
phenomenon, etc.
Among various components of human
blood, red cell antigen forms one of the
genetic markers. This can be used as a ge-
netic marker in population studies or in
linkage analysis. This is possible, because it (Attributed to: Bachrach
satisfies the following criteria: Studios.)
1. It forms different phenotypes.

2. It follows a simple pattern of inheritance.
3. Its frequency is different in different populations.
4. It is not influenced by environmental factors or age.
139
mebooksfree.com
CLINICAL APPLICATIONS
Clinically significant blood polymorphisms include ABO system, Rh

blood group and HLA system. In general, the term blood group
refers to red blood cell antigens. In the following conditions, they
are important:
1. Blood transfusion: In this, ABO compatibility is checked by blood
grouping and cross-matching.
2. Tissue transplantation: Here apart from ABO compatibility, HLA
typing of both the donor and the recipient is done to rule out
antigenic disparity and achieve graft survival.
3. Haemolytic disease of newborn (HDN): It is an outcome of Rh
incompatibility between the mother and conceptus. This can be
avoided by taking suitable measures (details of this are given later
in this chapter).
ABO BLOOD GROUP SYSTEM
This came into existence through the discovery by Landsteiner in

Vienna. According to this, there are two antigens on the red blood
cells. They are antigen A and antigen B. Their presence or absence
gives rise to four phenotypes; they are A, B, AB and O.
With the presence of an antigen, one can expect antibodies in the
sera of these individuals. A person with blood group “A” has an an-
tigen A on his red cells and antibody anti-B in his serum. An indi-
vidual with “O” group has neither A nor B antigen on his red cells.
So he possesses both antibodies, anti-A and anti-B in his serum.
The ABO system forms an example of multiple allelism. The al-
leles are A, B and O genes located at ABO locus on the long arm of
chromosome 9. Please note that gene O is recessive to genes A and
B, while A and B are codominants. If both A and B genes are present,
then both antigens (A and B) are formed. The O gene is an amorph,
i.e. it has no effect, thus leaving H-substance unaltered (Fig. 8.1).
The blood group antigen–antibody reaction is called isoaggluti-
nation. It is by this reaction that the blood group of an individual
can be determined with the help of standard anti-sera that are avail-
able. Table 8.1 shows the possible agglutination reaction. It can be
observed as a clumping of red cells. Theoretically, one can assume
group O as a universal donor and group AB as a universal recipient.
However, it is desired that transfusion is done of the same blood
group.
So far, numerous subtypes of A and B have been detected. Sig-
nificant among them are A1 and A2. As a result of this, the AB group
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 8 —฀Genetics฀of฀Blood฀Groups 141
Figure 8.1 Biosynthesis of H, A and B antigens. Genes O and H do not

have detectable effect.
Table 8.1 Agglutination Reaction in Various ABO Phenotypes
Reaction with
Blood Groups
Antigen Antibody
Phenotype Genotype on RBC in Serum A B AB O
A AA A Anti-B 2 1 1 2
AO
B BB B Anti-A 1 2 1 2
BO
AB AB A and B No 2 2 2 2
O OO No Anti-A
Anti-B 1 1 1 2
“1” represents agglutination; “–” represents no agglutination.
is also subdivided into A1B and A2B. Almost 85% of blood group A
consists of A1. Other variants of A and B, although known, are rare.
Diseases and ABO System

Association between a particular disease and blood group was sug-
gested first in 1953. It was observed that patients with gastric cancer
show an excess of group A individuals. Another close association was
observed between group O and duodenal ulcer. Type A individuals
also show increased tendency to clotting, eventually raising the risk
of thrombosis. This observation may prove to be significant in
thrombosis occurring in group A women on oral contraceptives.
mebooksfree.com
Bombay Phenotype or Oh Phenotype

This rare phenotype was first identified in Bombay (1952) and
hence labelled as Bombay phenotype. In this rare phenotype, the
red blood cells as well as secretions lack antigens A, B and H. The
serum contains anti-A, anti-B and anti-H antibodies. Individuals with
Oh phenotype are homozygous for gene h; and have genotype hh.
They do not form H antigen, and hence no substrate is available
for making antigen. Therefore A and B genes, although present,
cannot form the respective antigens.
Secretor Status and ABH Antigens

These antigens are found not only in red blood cells but in most
other cells of the body. They are also present in secretions like saliva.
The ability to secrete AB and H antigens is governed by “Se”, i.e.
secretor gene. The secretors have genotype as “SeSe” or “Sese”, and
account for about 78% of the population. Non-secretors have geno-
type ‘sese’. Non-secretors do not have A, B or H antigens in their
(secretions) saliva but have them on their red blood cells. The secre-
tor gene locus is on long arm of chromosome 19. The steps involved
in the synthesis of H, A and B antigens are shown in Figure 8.1.
RHESUS BLOOD GROUP SYSTEM
It is named after the Rhesus monkey because it was used in experi-

ments, which finally culminated in the discovery of this system. It
was discovered in 1940 by Landsteiner and Wiener. The Rh system
claims its place because of its role in HDN. There are both
Rh-positive and Rh-negative individuals.
Rh-positive persons are homozygous or heterozygous for gene
specifying an antigen D, while Rh-negative persons do not have an-
tigen D. The Rh locus is on chromosome 1. Fisher and Race sug-
gested that there are five Rh antigens designated as D, C, E, c, and
e. There are eight alleles. Their antigenic determinants are shown
in Table 8.2.
Rh-Null Blood Group

The persons of this blood group do not have Rh antigens on their
red blood cells. This is comparable to Oh phenotype. Rh-null per-
sons present with haemolytic anaemia indicate that Rh antigens
form an important and integral part of red cell membrane. In the
absence of these antigens, red cells become vulnerable. These indi-
viduals lack precursor that is needed as a substrate for production
mebooksfree.com
Table 8.2 Alleles of the Rh Blood Group System
Allele Antigen
0
R D, c, e
1
R D, C, e
2
R D, c, E
z
R D,C, E
r c, e
r9 C, e
r c, E
rv C, E
of antigens of Rh system. Rh-null phenotype was first encountered

in Australian aborigines. Rh-null individuals are homozygous for
gene X0r; its allele X9r is needed for synthesis of Rh as well as LW
antigens. Thus, Rh-null people also lack LW antigens.
Clinical Significance
Any Rh-negative person, on exposure to Rh-positive red blood cells,
forms anti-Rh antibodies. Care is to be taken in Rh-negative girls
and women of child-bearing age that they receive Rh-negative blood
in transfusion therapy if the transfusion is required. Rh-negative
pregnant women may be given Rh immune globulin injections dur-
ing pregnancy and just after the parturition. This will minimise the
risk of immunisation against Rh antigen in them.
Haemolytic Disease of Newborn (HDN) (Fig.฀8.2)

In HDN, foetal red blood cells die earlier due to the action of anti-
bodies formed by the mother against foetal Rh antigen. It begins in
utero but continues after birth for about 3 months—the time taken
by maternal antibodies to get cleared from newborn’s circulation.
Although it is based on genetically determined antigenic disparity
between mother and the baby, it is an acquired haemolytic anaemia,
different from hereditary ones like hereditary spherocytosis.
In the natural course, there are no antibodies against Rh antigen
in serum. During pregnancy, foetal and maternal blood pools are
isolated by placental barrier. Towards the term, however, there are
breaks occurring along this barrier. This permits transfer of foetal
mebooksfree.com
Figure 8.2 Genesis of haemolytic disease of newborn (HDN).
red cells to the mother’s blood. When the mother is Rh-negative

and foetus is Rh-positive, this transfer of Rh-positive red cells of
foetus shall evoke an antibody response in the mother. These anti-
bodies may get transferred across placenta to foetal circulation.
They get attached to foetal red blood cells. Such anti-Rh coated
cells are withdrawn from foetal circulation rendering it anaemic. To
compensate this, a large number of immature red cells called
“erythroblasts” are poured into foetal circulation. This offers it the
name erythroblastosis foetalis.
Hyperbilirubinaemia may follow after birth because of the rapid
destruction of red blood cells of newborn. This leads to deposition
of bilirubin in the brain and, if not prevented by replacement
transfusion, may cause cerebral damage. This may lead to mental
retardation.
Remedial Measures
Usually, Rh sensitisation occurs at the time of delivery. At this stage
(within few hours of delivery), if mother is injected with Rh immu-
noglobulin, it would promptly destroy Rh-positive foetal cells, be-
fore they evoke an antibody response in the mother.
OTHER BLOOD GROUP SYSTEMS
The MN blood group system was discovered by Landsteiner and

Levine in 1927. On injecting human blood in rabbits, it was found
that rabbit serum could then distinguish human red cells bearing M
and N antigens. About two decades later, Ss subdivision of MN
group was identified. MN system claims an insignificant position in
transfusion or foetomaternal incompatibility.
mebooksfree.com
Kell Blood Group

The original description of the Kell system identifies two pheno-
types—K-positive and K-negative. It is sometimes responsible for
haemolytic disease in the newborn. Kell antigen precursor is deter-
mined by gene Xk with locus on the short arm of X chromosome.
Duffy Blood Group

It was discovered in 1950. There are three alleles: Fya, Fyb and Fy0 at
Duffy locus on chromosome 1. The Fy (a-b-) phenotype is resistant
to malarial parasite, Plasmodium vivax. This gives an advantage to
FyFy genotypic individuals.
Xg Blood Group
It was identified in 1962 by Mann. It is used as an X-linked marker.
It is determined by Xg locus on the short arm of X chromosome.
It is among the few loci on X chromosome that are not involved in
X inactivation.
Lutheran Blood Group

It forms the first example of autosomal linkage and crossing over
in human beings. In 1951, Mohr shown that Lutheran blood
group and secretor loci were linked. The loci are located on chro-
mosome 19. Among the best known Lutheran genes are Lua
and Lub. The Lua gene is relatively less frequent as compared to
Lub gene.
OTHER POLYMORPHISMS IN BLOOD
They include red cell enzymes. For example, glucose-6-phosphate-

dehydrogenase forms one of the very good examples of polymor-
phism. It serves as an X-linked marker trait. The acid phosphatase
(ACP) of red cells forms another polymorphism in blood having six
phenotypes.
Haptoglobin
It belongs to a globin class of proteins that binds with haemoglobin
(Hb). It serves a job of conserving iron from red cells under destruc-
tion. Each molecule possesses two alpha (a) and two beta (b)
chains. There are three variants in the a chain polymorphism. They
are Hp1F-fast and Hp1s-slow, the third being Hp2.
mebooksfree.com
Polymorphisms are also known to occur in about over 100 plasma

proteins and also in DNA sequences detectable with restriction
fragment length polymorphisms (RFLPs).
Summary
In 1900, Landsteiner discovered ABO blood group system. The red cell
antigen forms genetic markers and is used in population studies and linkage
analysis.
Clinical Applications: Include (i) blood transfusion, (ii) tissue transplanta-
tion, (iii) haemolytic disease of newborn (HDN)
ABO Blood Group System

There are two antigens on red blood cells, A and B. Thus, there are four
phenotypes A, B, AB and O. With presence of an antigen, one expects an-
tibodies in sera; an individual with “A” blood group shall have antibody anti-
B in his serum. A person of “O” group possesses both anti-A and anti-B
antibodies in his serum. A, B and O genes are at the ABO locus on the long
arm of chromosome 9.
Isoagglutination: Antigen–antibody reaction is called isoagglutination. It
helps to determine blood group of an individual. Subtypes of A and B have
been detected as A1, A2 and A1B and A2B.
Disease Association: Patients of gastric cancer show an excess of A group
individuals. Another association exists between “O” group individuals and
duodenal ulcer.
Bombay Phenotype (Oh phenotype): Identified in Bombay (1952); the Bom-
bay phenotype shows lack of antigens A, B and H on the red blood cells as
well as secretions (e.g. saliva). The serum contains anti-A, anti-B and anti-H
antibodies. Individuals are homozygous for gene h. Genotype is hh.
Secretor Status: The ability to secrete A, B and H antigen is governed by
secretor gene “Se” on chromosome 19q. The secretors have genotype
“SeSe”, while non-secretors have genotype “sese”.
Rhesus Blood Group System

Named after Rhesus monkey used in experiments. Rh system is important
for its role in HDN. Rh-positive persons are heterozygous or homozygous for
gene coding antigen D and have antigen D on RBCs. Rh locus is on chro-
mosome 1. There are five Rh antigens D, C, E, c and e with eight alleles.
Rh-Null Blood Group: These individuals do not have Rh antigens on their
RBCs and present with haemolytic anemias because Rh antigens form an
integral part of red cell membrane.
Clinical Importance: Rh-negative pregnant women should be given
Rh-immunoglobulin injections during pregnancy and just after parturition.
Haemolytic Disease of Newborn (HDN): In this, foetal RBCs die due to
antibodies formed by mother against foetal Rh antigen. It continues for
about 3 months—time taken to clear maternal antibodies from newborn
circulation. The Rh-positive RBCs of the foetus pass across placental
breaks and evoke production of antibodies in mother. These antibodies
pass across placental barrier and destroy foetal RBCs leading HDN.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Other Blood Group Systems
These are MN blood group, Kell blood group, Duffy blood group, Xg blood
group, Lutheran blood group, etc.
Other Polymorphism in Blood

Haptoglobin: It is globin class of protein that binds with haemoglobin to
conserve iron. Likewise polymorphisms are known in over 100 plasma
proteins.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. Who discovered ABO blood group system?

2. Why red cell antigens are used as genetic markers?
3. What are the phenotypes in ABO blood group system?
4. Where is the ABO locus situated?
5. What is the status of A, B and O genes in relation to each other?
6. Which blood group is presumed to be universal donor and recipient?
7. What is Bombay phenotype?
8. Where is Rh locus situated?
9. Why Rh-null blood group persons present with haemolytic anaemia?
10. What is haemolytic disease of newborn (HDN)?
mebooksfree.com
9 Immunogenetics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Basis฀of฀cellular฀and฀humoral฀immunity
•฀Basis฀of฀HLA฀system
•฀Basis฀of฀immune฀system฀disorders
KEY WORDS
Immunoglobulins,฀Linkage฀equilibrium,฀Transplantation,฀Complement฀
SCID฀(severe฀combined฀immunodeiciency)
It deals with the genetic basis of the immunologic phenomenon in

an organism. For survival and to combat effectively the antigenic
challenge faced by an individual, he/she is provided with an im-
mune system. This allows him to recognise self and non-self. The
latter includes any foreign material/particle/bacteria or virus. This
serves as an antigen and is taken care of by the immune system. The
immune system comprises two components:
1. Cellular immunity: Conferred by T-cells, these are thymus-dependent
cells.
2. Humoral immunity: Conferred by the formation of antibody pro-
duced by B-cells; these are bursa-dependent cells. Bursa of Fabri-
cius is an organ in birds responsible for the formation of these
cells.
Both T- and B-cells are derived from the same source. The T-cells are
recognised according to their functional assignment as helper cell,
suppressor cell and killer cell. They are responsible for delayed
hypersensitivity such as rejection of grafts or delayed skin reactions.
Now let us learn some of the important terms in this respect:
•฀ Antigen: The substance that evokes an immune response.
148
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 9 —฀Immunogenetics 149
•฀ Antibody: It is immunoglobulin formed in response to antigenic

stimulus and reacts selectively with the same antigen.
•฀ Immune reaction: It is an interaction between antigen and antibody.
The immune response of an individual with the first exposure to
an antigen is called primary response; it takes relatively longer time,
may be few days. Subsequent exposure to the same antigen evokes
a rapid and more pronounced response, so-called secondary
response. This is possible through “memory cells” lymphocytes that
are primed to act vigorously with re-exposure to the same antigen.
Fig. 9.1 shows genesis of the T- and B-cells and their role in
immune system disorders. Of prime importance now is a question
about how a body responds to “n” number of antigenic substances?
This will be better elucidated as we study the immunoglobulins.
IMMUNOGLOBULINS
These are serum proteins making a fraction of about 20% of total

plasma proteins. They are produced by differentiated form of
B lymphocytes called plasma cells. According to available estimates,
a mouse can synthesise about 107 to 108 types of antibodies. In hu-
man beings, the figure goes still higher to 109.
Structure
A molecule of immunoglobulin consists of four polypeptide
chains. Two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy
(H) chains. These are held together by disulphide bonds. The
whole unit (molecule) presents a Y-shaped structure. The light
Figure 9.1 Immune system. Possible sites of blocks in immunodeficiency

diseases. (1) Reticular dysgenesis; (2) Severe combined immunodeficiency
(SCID); (3) DiGeorge syndrome; (4) Bruton type of agammaglobulinaemia.
mebooksfree.com
chains are kappa (k) and lambda (l), and the heavy chain for a
particular type of Ig is single. Table 9.1 provides information
about the immunoglobulins.
The heavy chains for various immunoglobulins are IgG – g; IgA
– a; IgM – m; IgD – d; and for IgE – [. An immunoglobulin molecule
can be cleaved by papain, a proteolytic enzyme, into three frag-
ments that can be separated by chromatography. Two fragments are
identical and have antigen binding sites. They are called fragment–
antigen–binding (FAB). The third fragment activates complement
and is called FC (Fig. 9.2 ).
Table 9.1 Human Immunoglobulins
Heavy Light Molecular Fraction Placental

Ig Class Chain Chain Weight in % Transfer
IgG g k or l 150,000 80 Yes
IgA a k or l 160,000 13 Possible
IgM m k or l 900,000 6 –
IgD d k or l 180,000 1 –
IgE e k or l 190,000 Traces –
Figure 9.2 Schematic representation of antibody molecule showing

generation by somatic recombination of V, D, J and cDNA segments.
Scan to Play Immunoglobulin structure
mebooksfree.com
Genetically determined variants of the five classes of immuno-

globulins recognised so far are:
Gm system: Associated with heavy chain in IgG
Am system: Associated with heavy chain in IgA
Km and Inv system: Associated with kappa light chain
Oz system: Associated with lambda light chain
Diversity of Immunoglobulins
The prime factor accounting for diversity in antibodies appears to
be multiple combinations of heavy and light chains. A study of
Bence Jones protein in patients with multiple myeloma revealed
that they have two regions:
1. Variable region (V)
2. Constant region (C)
Region V further presented four regions, which did not vary much
from one antibody to another. These were called framework regions.
In between these, there were three regions that showed remarkable
variations. These were called hypervariable regions. The DNA studies
of antibody-producing cells have revealed that DNA segments cod-
ing for V and C regions of light chain are separated by J region or
joining region.
The DNA sequencing of heavy chain genes revealed that they
are coded by four different DNA segments, one for each of its V,
D, J and C regions. The diversity region intervenes between V and
J regions of heavy chain.
Chromosomal association
Gene families coding for polypeptide chains of immunoglobulins
are associated with the following autosomes:
1. H : Heavy chain on chromosome 14
2. K : Kappa light chain on chromosome 2
3. l : Lambda light chain on chromosome 22
Synthesis of immunoglobulins stands as an exception to the gener-
alisation of “one gene–one polypeptide” because V and C regions of
each chain are coded by different genes.
Class switching
On exposure to antigen, B cell produces IgM antibody initially. On
subsequent exposure to this antigen it produces IgA or IgG, still
retaining specificity to the same antigen. This is labelled as class
switching. Further analysis reveals that the antibodies have their
V (variable) regions same and differ only in C regions.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 9.3 Hybridoma produced by using human lymphoblastoid cell line.
HYBRIDOMA AND MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES
Hybridoma can be obtained by fusing two cell components:

1. Mutant mouse myeloma cell: These are not capable of producing
antibody.
2. Normal spleen cells from mice immunised with specific antigen: When
put to appropriate conditions, they fuse to form hybrids. Hybrid-
oma secretes a single antibody of a single Ig type, specific for the
antigen that was originally used to immunise mice. This is mono-
clonal antibody.
Applications
1. Hybridoma and monoclonal antibodies have helped a great deal
in histocompatibility studies.
2. Gene mapping for k, l light chains and g, m and a heavy chains
was done making use of hybridomas.
3. Production of human immunoglobulins by fusion of mouse my-
eloma cells with human lymphoblastoid cells (Fig. 9.3).
TRANSPLANTATION
In the initial phase, transplants/grafted tissue used to survive for

only few days. Grafts between monozygotic twins, and to a certain
extent in dizygotic twins, were usually accepted. In simple words, the
tissue of genetically different sources shall encounter a reaction in
recipients. This is because of antigenic disparity between the donor
and the recipient. The genetic basis of rejection of graft/transplant
has now been understood. Attempts have also been made to miti-
gate the reactions by the host towards graft helping survival of trans-
planted tissues.
mebooksfree.com
Types of Grafts
1. Autograft: It is graft of the host’s own tissue.
2. Isograft: It is graft from a genetically identical person, e.g. mono-
zygotic twin.
3. Allograft: It is graft from a genetically non-identical person, and
hence, graft will be rejected unless host reaction to the graft is
mitigated.
4. Xenograft: Graft between different species. These are rejected
soon.
Autograft and isograft tend to be accepted easily and allograft may be
accepted with due caution. Gallico et al. (1984) reported that skin bi-
opsy tissue could be expanded under favourable environment increas-
ing its surface area. The same could be used in severe cases of burns.
Histocompatibility
Success of transplant depends on the so-called histocompatibility—
antigenic similarity—between donor and recipient. This can be as-
sessed by the following tests:
1. Mixed lymphocyte culture test: In this test, lymphocytes from
both the donor and recipient are mixed in vitro. Here, lympho-
cyte serves in two ways:
(a) As a responding cell (host cell) by DNA synthesis and en-
largement.
(b) As a mitogenic agent (donor cells) by stimulating mitosis.
The test offers idea about the degree of antigenic disparity
between the donor and the host.
2. Lymphocyte cytotoxicity test: In this test, the lymphocytes are incu-
bated with antisera in the presence of trypan blue. If the lymphocyte
possesses an antigen for which the antibody is present in the anti-
sera, the lymphocyte shall be killed. The live lymphocyte is impervi-
ous to trypan blue. Therefore, the killed lymphocytes are stained
blue. This test offers idea about the antigenic status of an individual.
HUMAN LEUCOCYTE ANTIGEN (HLA) SYSTEM
It consists of four closely linked loci associated with the short arm
of chromosome 6. These are arranged as D (and D related/DR),
B, C and A (Fig. 9.4). In the close proximity of this HLA region is
the immune response locus called Ir locus. The alleles associated
with the various loci of the HLA region are expressed as under:
D locus: 22 alleles C locus: 8 alleles
B locus: 42 alleles A locus: 20 alleles
mebooksfree.com
Figure 9.4 HLA complex on short arm of chromosome 6. It forms the

major histocompatibility complex in man.
Considering the number of alleles, millions of phenotypes are possi-

ble. So the HLA phenotype of two unrelated individuals is less likely
to be identical. The four loci being closely linked are inherited “en-
bloc”. The set of these HLA genes on each chromosome 6 constitutes
haplotype.
Considering parental haplotypes:
Father Mother
I and J K and L
The possible combinations would be IK, JK, IL and JL. This
means that an individual will have a 1 in 4 chance of having
similar HLA antigen with a sib. Therefore, brother or sister is
usually selected as a donor. Advent of immunosuppressive ther-
apy, however, has made it possible to take care of the antigenic
disparity.
Linkage Disequilibrium
In the normal course of events, alleles at linked loci should follow
an equilibrium. In other words, the proportions of combinations of
alleles should be the product of their population frequencies. Con-
sidering the frequencies of HLA-A1 and HLA-B8, the combination
of their frequencies will be—
HLA–A1 frequency 0.17 3 HLA–B8 frequency 0.11
Al 3 B8 5 0.17 3 0.11 50.019

The product appears to be much below the observed frequency, i.e.
0.088. Thus one can say that these HLA alleles are an example of
linkage disequilibrium.
mebooksfree.com
Although some HLA types seem to have an association with cer-

tain disease states (Table 9.2), this does not mean that an individual
possessing these HLA types shall develop the disease. It only puts
the person at a relatively higher risk of developing that disease than
the population in general.
Ankylosing spondylitis
Ankylosis means fusion. In this disease, mainly sacroiliac joints are
involved. There is inflammation and ossification of ligaments caus-
ing fusion. In 90% of the patients with ankylosing spondylitis, HLA-
B27 is present. In general population, the frequency of B27 antigen
is merely 8%. In short, the relative risk (for persons with B27 anti-
gen) is almost 100-fold in ankylosing spondylitis.
H-Y Antigen
It is Y-linked histocompatibility antigen. It is important for testicular
differentiation and function. However, its expression does not de-
pend upon presence or absence of the testicular tissue. The gene
for H-Y antigen in humans has been mapped to chromosome 6. It
seems that Y chromosome bears a regulatory gene that governs H-Y
antigen gene on chromosome 6. In experimental animals, H-Y anti-
gen is supposed to play an important role in transplantation, but it
has a little significance in humans.
Complement
These are a group of serum proteins required to inactivate foreign
material after the formation of an antigen–antibody complex.
Table 9.2 HLA in Some Disease States
Disease Antigen
Ankylosing spondylitis B27

Chronic hepatitis B8
Diabetes mellitus (insulin independent) DR3, B8
Hodgkin disease B18
Myasthenia gravis B8, A2
Reiter syndrome B27
Rheumatoid arthritis DR4
Thyrotoxicosis DR3
mebooksfree.com
Functions
1. Direct lysis of target cells.
2. Opsonisation: Facilitating destruction of bacteria.
3. Activation of other components of the immune system.
Complement system itself has several components. Of these, four
have complement loci—Bf, C2, C4A and C4B. They are closely
linked to one another and are a part of major histocompatibility
complex (MHC) on chromosome 6 along its short arm. These form
the so-called complotype. One of the genetic disorders with deficiency
of inhibitor of the activated C1 component is hereditary angioneu-
rotic oedema. It is an autosomal dominant disorder.
IMMUNE SYSTEM DISORDERS
The disorders involve disruption of the immune mechanism. This

may be in one of the following ways:
1. Disorders of phagocytic function (which destroy foreign parti-
cles).
2. Disorders involving T-cell and B-cell functions.
3. Lack of complement.
Chronic Granulomatous Disease

This involves phagocytosis. The phagocytes ingest the foreign par-
ticle, e.g. bacteria; but further bactericidal activity is deficient. It is
an X-linked disorder. Mutation of Kell blood group locus (Xk) on
X chromosome is associated with phagocytic malfunction in some
cases of chronic granulomatous disease.
Reticular Dysgenesis
It is a rare autosomal recessive form of immunodeficiency. In this
condition, both cellular and humoral immunity is affected. Patients
also have deficiency of granulocytes. Unless treated with bone mar-
row transplant, these babies usually die in the first year of life.
Severe Combined Immunodeficiency or

Swiss-Type of Agammaglobulinaemia
This is a severe immune system disorder that may be X-linked or
autosomal recessive. When it is autosomal recessive, there is lack of
adenosine-deaminase (ADA). There may be deficiency of other en-
zymes also, like nucleoside phosphorylase, causing an AR type of
mebooksfree.com
severe immunodeficiency disease. There is an abnormal function

involving T- and B-cells with lowered immune response and in-
creased chances of infection. Overwhelming infection is usually the
cause of death. The management is in the form of transplantation
of foetal thymus and marrow cells.
DiGeorge Syndrome
It is characterised by the absence of thymus as well as parathyroid
glands. In it, there is lowered cell-mediated response due to lack of
T-cell function. However, plasma cells appear to operate giving
Ig synthesis.
Bruton-Type Agammaglobulinaemia
It is manifested as a B-cell deficiency with onset in infancy. It is trans-
mitted as an X-linked recessive disorder. Thymus is normal with
normal number of T-cells. Immunoglobulins are absent, although
cell-mediated immunity is normal. The patient suffers from bacte-
rial infection. It can be helped by injecting immunoglobulins and
antibiotics.
Summary
Immunogenetics: It deals with genetic basis of immunological phenome-
non. The immune system has two components—
• Cellular immunity: Conferred by T-cells (thymus-dependent cells). T-cells
are recognised according to their function as helper, suppressor and killer
cells.
• Humoral immunity: Conferred by B-cells (bursa-dependent cells)
Terms to Learn and Remember
Antigen: A substance that evokes an immune response.
Antibody: It is immunoglobulin formed in response to antigen.
Immune reaction: An interaction between antigen and antibody.
Primary response: Immune response with the first exposure to antigen.
Secondary response: Subsequent exposure to the same antigen evokes
a rapid and more pronounced so-called secondary response. This is due
to “memory cells.”
Immunoglobulins (Ig): These are serum proteins making about 20% of
plasma proteins. They are produced by B lymphocytes (plasma cells). In
humans, 109 types of antibodies can be formed.
Structure: The immunoglobulin molecule has four polypeptide chains—
a) Two light chains: kappa (k) and lambda (l)
b) Two heavy chains: heavy chain for a particular type of Ig is single
type, for IgG – g; IgA – a; IgM – µ; IgD – d and IgE – e.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Immunoglobulin molecule can be cleaved by papain into three fragments.
Two fragments are identical and have antigen binding sites (FAB). Third frag-
ment activates complement (FC).
Diversity of Immunoglobulins: It is due to multiple combinations of heavy
and light chains. They have two regions: (i) variable region (V), presenting
four regions, called framework regions; between them there are three hyper-
variable regions. (ii) constant region (C).
Chromosomal Association: Genes for—
i) H: heavy chain – chromosome 14
ii) k: Kappa light chain – chromosome 2
iii) l: Lambda chain – chromosome 22
Class Switching: On exposure to antigen, B cell produces IgM antibody
initially. On subsequent exposure to this antigen, it produces IgA or IgG,
still retaining specificity to the same antigen. This is called class switching.
Hybridoma and Monoclonal Antibodies: Mutant mouse myeloma cells
can’t produce antibody. Normal spleen cells from mice immunised with
specific antigens fuse to form hybrids when put to appropriate conditions.
This hybridoma secretes single Ig specific to that antigen (used to immu-
nise mice). This is called monoclonal antibody.
Applications: (i) In histocompatibility/studies; (ii) gene mapping; (iii) produc-
tion of human immunoglobulin
Transplantation/Grafting
Types of grafts:
• Autograft: Graft of host’s own tissue.
• Isograft: Graft from genetically identical person, e.g. monozygotic twin.
• Allograft: Graft from genetically non-identical person—rejected.
• Xenograft: Graft from different species.
Histocompatibility: Antigenic similarity between the donor and recipient
governs the success of transplant/graft, i.e. histocompatibility between
them. It is assessed by (i) mixed lymphocyte culture test and (ii) lymphocyte
cytotoxicity test.
Human Leucocyte Antigen (HLA) System
It consists of four closely linked loci with following number of alleles on “p”
arm of chromosome 6. They are: D locus – 22 alleles; B locus – 42 alleles;
C locus – 8 alleles and A locus – 20 alleles. With these alleles, millions of
phenotypes are possible; hence HLA phenotype of any unrelated persons is
less likely to be identical.
Linkage Disequilibrium: Alleles at linked loci should follow an equilibrium,
i.e. the proportion of combinations of alleles should be the product of their
population frequencies.
HLA – A1 frequency 0.17 and HLA B8 frequency 0.11.
A1 3 B8 5 0.17 3 0.115 0.019. This is much less than the actual
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
frequency 0.088. In other words, HLA alleles are example of linkage dis-
equilibrium. Some HLA and disease associations are:
Ankylosing spondylitis – B27; Diabetes mellitus – DR3, B8

Myasthenia gravis – B8, A2; Rheumatoid arthritis – DR4.
H-Y antigen: It is Y-linked histocompatibility antigen, important for testicular
differentiation. Gene for it is located on chromosome 6.
Complement: It is a group of serum proteins required to inactivate foreign mate-
rial after formation of antigen–antibody complex. Functions are: (i) lysis of target
cells; (ii) opsonisation; (iii) activation of other components of immune system.
Immune System Disorders
i) Chronic granulomatous disease: Phagocytic malformation and an
X-linked trait.
ii) Reticular dysgenesis: An autosomal recessive form of immunodeficiency.
iii) Severe combined immunodeficiency (SCID)/Swiss-type of agam-
maglobulinaemia: An AR/XR trait-associated abnormal T-cell and B-cell
function. Lack of adenosine diaminase (ADA) or other enzyme, like nucle-
oside phosphorylase, may be the cause.
iv) DiGeorge syndrome: Absence of thymus and parathyroid is associated
with immunodeficiency and disturbances of calcium metabolism.
v) Bruton-type agammaglobulinaemia: B-cell deficiency, transmitted as
X-linked recessive disorder. Immunoglobulins are absent. Thymus and
T-cells are normal.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What is immunogenetics?
2. What is humoral immunity/response?
3. What is primary immune response?
4. What are immunoglobulins?
5. What is the structure of an immunoglobulin molecule?
6. Why synthesis of immunoglobulin stands as an exception to the gener-
alisation “one gene–one polypeptide”?
7. What is class switching?
8. What are different types of grafts?
9. Which grafts are easily accepted?
10. What is meant by histocompatibility?
mebooksfree.com
11. What are the tests to assess the histocompatibility?

12. What is HLA system?
13. Where is H-Y antigen located?
14. What is complement?
15. What are the types of immune responses?
16. What is an antigen?
17. What is secondary response?
18. What are memory cells?
19. What is the cause of diversity in immunoglobulins?
20. Match the heavy chain with the respective immunoglobulins.
1. IgA a. g (Gamma)
2. IgD b. a (Alpha)
3. IgE c. d (Delta)
4. IgG d. m (Mu)
5. IgM e. e (Epsilon)
21. What are the two types of light chains?

22. What is the chromosomal association of the genes coding for the heavy and
the light polypeptide chains?
23. What is hybridoma?
24. What is SCID?
mebooksfree.com
Cancer
Genetics 10
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Basis฀of฀role฀of฀Genetics฀in฀cancer
•฀Role฀of฀oncogenes
•฀Mutations฀and฀chromosomal฀aberrations฀leading฀to฀cancer
KEY WORDS
Oncogenes,฀Retrovirus,฀Tumour฀suppressor฀genes,฀Philadelphia฀chro-
mosomes
Association between cancer and human chromosomes was first

thought in 1902 by Professor Theodor Boveri at the University of
Würzburg in Germany. He stated that a change or changes in one
or more chromosomes might be the starting point for the develop-
ment of cancer. It took more than half a century to substantiate his
theory. In 1959 Peter C. Nowell and David A. Hungerford opened a
new page in cancer research with the discovery of Philadelphia
chromosome. Over the years, cancer has remained a mystery to the
scientific world. With numerous carcinogens in the environment,
some individuals are more prone to develop cancer while others are
not. This leads us to think that human genome might play a signifi-
cant role in the genesis of this mysterious disease. Moreover, the
chromosome study of cancer cells often shows marked variation in
number, as well as structure of chromosomes. Analysis of variety of
tumour cells reveals that certain chromosomes are involved in cer-
tain cancers (Table 10.1). It is thought that they carry genes that
bring about a malignant transformation.
Viral Association: There are a number of DNA tumour viruses as-
sociated with neoplastic conditions in humans, while numerous
RNA viruses/retro-viruses cause tumour in animals. They are shown
in Table 10.2.
161
mebooksfree.com
Table 10.1 Chromosomal Localization of Proto-oncogenes

in Human Genome
Chromosome Number Site Gene
1 q12 ter c-src-2
1 Cen–p21 N-ras
1 p32 Hum B lym–1
1 NA c-ski
3 p25 c-mil (raf)
5 q34 c-fms
6 q22–q24 c-myb
7 pter–q22 c-erbB
8 q22 c-mos
8 q24 c-myc
9 q34 c-abl
11 P14.1 C-rasH
11 q23–q24 c-ets
12 P12.05 – ter c-rasK
14 q21–q31 c-fos
15 q24–q25 c-fes
17 q21–q22 c-erbA
20 P34–p36 c-src-1
22 q11 – ter c-sis
Table 10.2 Human DNA Viruses Causing Cancer
Family Type Tumour
Herpes Epstein–Barr (EBV) Burkitt lymphoma, nasopharyn-

geal carcinoma
Papova Human papilloma virus Plantar and genital warts, uro-

(HPV) genital cancer, skin cancer
Hepadna Hepatitis B virus (HBV) Hepatocellular carcinoma
(Source: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition, 2001, Table 13.1, Page 191,
Churchill Livingstone.)
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 10 —฀Cancer฀Genetics 163
RETROVIRUS
In the early part of 20th century, it was recognised that certain types
of cancer in chickens could be transmitted by cell-free passage. Later
on, it was shown that this was possible due to a virus. A wide variety of
these viruses were identified and their association with specific types
of cancer was noted. These viruses are called retroviruses. They are
peculiar in that they have RNA as their genetic material instead of
DNA. When this virus infects the host cell, it makes DNA copy. It is
called reverse transcription. The DNA copy is incorporated in the host
genome. The specific DNA sequences formed by these viruses in the
host cell are responsible for the neoplastic change.
Retroviral genome consists of RNA molecule with about 8000 to
10,000 nucleotides. Within host cell, it forms DNA that gets incorpo-
rated in host DNA. The integrated DNA thus formed by blending the
host DNA and DNA copy formed by reverse transcription is called pro-
virus. The structure of provirus shows long terminal repeats (LTRs)
copied from viral genomic RNA at both ends. Until recently, naturally
occurring retroviruses were thought to have only three genes—“gag ”,
encoding the structural proteins for core antigens; “pol ”, coding for
reverse transcriptase enzyme; and “env ”, the gene for the glycoprotein
envelope proteins (Fig. 10.1). A study of Rous sarcoma virus has identi-
fied fourth gene that results in transformation of cells in culture
(Fig. 10.2); this viral gene is known as oncogene.
ONCOGENES
Oncogenes are recognised by three letter abbreviations, which

reflect over their origin or the type of tumour with which they are
Figure 10.1 Structure of retroviruses and their effect on tumour induction

(gag* indicates that a part of gag sequence is deleted). Abbreviation: LTR,
long terminal repeats.
mebooksfree.com
Figure 10.2 Diagram showing transforming ability of the retrovirus and

the replication. (Source: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh
Edition, 2001, Fig. 13.1, Page 191, Churchill Livingstone.)
associated (Tables 10.3 and 10.4). Normal mammalian cells contain

DNA sequences homologous to the viral oncogenes; these have
been called proto-oncogenes or cellular oncogenes. In strict sense,
the term proto-oncogene refers to normal gene, while the term cel-
lular oncogene or C-onc refers to a gene with an oncogenic poten-
tials like viral oncogene or V-onc.
V-onc Formation: The retroviral oncogenes are formed because
of errors in the replication of the retrovirus genome following their
integration at random sites in the host DNA (Fig. 10.2). The resul-
tant being a viral oncogene. For example, the viral oncogene sis is
almost identical to the gene for one chain of a growth factor called
platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF).
From Proto-oncogenes to Cellular Oncogenes

A couple of models have been postulated to explain conversion of
proto-oncogenes to cellular oncogenes. In the first quantitative one,
tumour formation is induced by increase in the amount of proto-
oncogene product. In the second, there is conversion of proto-
oncogenes into a transforming gene (c-onc) with nucleotide
sequence being altered, i.e. a qualitative.
Quantitative model of oncogenic function
Two mechanisms can give rise to an inappropriate amount of proto-
oncogene products, gene amplification and insertional mutagenesis.
mebooksfree.com
Table 10.3 The Oncogenic Retroviruses and the Associated

Tumours
Virus Host Tumour
Rous sarcoma virus Chicken Sarcoma
Avian leukosis virus Avian leukaemia
Murine sarcoma virus Mice Sarcoma
Murine leukaemia virus Leukaemia
Mouse mammary tumour virus Breast cancer
Simian sarcoma virus Primates Sarcoma
Gibbon ape leukaemia virus Leukaemia
Human immunodeficiency virus Humans Kaposi sarcoma

type 1 (HIV-1)
Lymphocyte viruses (HLTV)
Human cell T cell leukaemia
(Adapter from: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition, 2001, Table 13.3,
Page 192, Churchill Livingstone.)
Table 10.4 Transforming Viruses, Species Affected, an

Oncogene Responsible and the Tumour Induced
Virus Species Oncogene Tumour
Avian erythroblastosis Chicken erb-B Erythroleukaemia
Avian myeloblastosis Chicken myb Myeloblastic

leukaemia
Avian myelocytomatosis Chicken myc Myelocytoma,

sarcoma
Abelson leukaemia Mouse abl Pre-B cell

leukaemia
FBJ murine osteosarcoma Mouse fos Osteosarcoma
Moloney murine sarcoma Mouse mos Sarcoma
Harvey murine sarcoma Rat Ha-ras Sarcoma
Kirsten Rat ki-ras Sarcoma
Rous sarcoma Chicken src Sarcoma
Simian sarcoma Monkey sis Sarcoma
mebooksfree.com
Gene Amplification
The mechanism of “survival” is responsible for it. For example, leukae-
mic cells, when exposed to the chemotherapeutic agent methotrexate,
acquire resistance by making multiple copies of the gene for dihydro-
folate reductase. It is target enzyme for methotrexate. The gene ampli-
fication increases number of copies of the oncogene several times, thus
corresponding oncoprotein product also increases. In mammals, an
amplified DNA sequence in tumour cells can be evidenced as small
extra chromosomes called double-minute chromosomes/homogeneously
staining regions (HSRs) of the chromosomes. HSRs are found in many
tumour cells. N-myc is amplified in about 30% of neuroblastomas. In
advanced cases, the figure tunes to 50%. In human small cell carcinoma
of the lung, amplification of c-myc, N-myc and L-myc is found. Amplifica-
tion of c-neu or erb-B2 is encountered in 20% of breast cancers.
Insertional Mutagenesis
The retrovirus can transform a cell without V-onc expression. This was
first noted in a study of bursal lymphomas caused by transformation of
B-lymphocytes with avian leukosis virus. When such a retrovirus inte-
grates into the host genome close to a proto-oncogene, the viral DNA
long terminal repeat sequences have a potential to induce uncon-
trolled expression of the cellular gene. The resulting entity is called
insertional mutagenesis. It has been suggested that c-myc activation in this
manner probably leads to the development of Burkitt lymphoma in
humans, which is associated with Epstein–Barr viral infection.
Qualitative model on oncogene function
In addition to the two methods described in quantitative model,
there are two other ways also by which the proto-oncogenes can be
converted into the cellular oncogenes.
Mutations in Coding Sequences
A cell line derived from mouse fibroblasts called NIH 3T3 was trans-
formed by DNA transfection from a human bladder carcinoma cell line.
This led to the discovery of a human DNA sequence homologous to the
“ras” gene of the Harvey murine sarcoma virus. The human “ras” gene
family comprises of three closely linked members, H-ras, Ki-ras and N-ras.
The ras proteins are structurally similar to their viral counterparts except
near their carboxyl terminals. The oncogenic potential of the ras proto-
oncogenes is because of point mutations in their nucleotide sequence.
The activating mutations in the ras gene have been detected in about
30% of the human cancers; however, the incidence depends upon the
tumour origin. For example, ras oncogenes are found in 25–30% of
lung cancers, 50% of colonic cancers, 90% of the pancreatic carcino-
mas, but are almost non-existent in breast cancers. Such activating
mutations in the “ras” gene are also found in some premalignant le-
sions suggesting their possible role in initiating the neoplasm.
mebooksfree.com
Chromosomal Aberrations
The chromosomal aberrations are frequently encountered in malig-
nant cells. They may be in the form of variation in the number or
the structure of chromosomes. They are as follows:
Tumour Suppressor Genes

In late 1960s, Harris and his colleagues carried out fusion of malig-
nant cells with normal cells in culture. They found that malignant
phenotype was suppressed in the hybrid cells. This was attributed to
the action of tumour suppressor genes in the normal cells. Loss of this
tumour suppressor activity leads to malignancy. Often these genes are
called anti-oncogenes.
Role of Tumour Suppressor Genes: Familial retinoblastoma has
been considered as an autosomal dominant trait. However, demon-
stration of retinoblastoma gene (Rb gene) has given a concept that
it is a recessive tumour suppressor gene. An absence of the gene
product in the homozygous state leads to the development of this
peculiar tumour. The tumour suppressor activity of Rb gene is also
demonstrated in vitro in cancer cells.
Retinoblastoma (Rb) Gene: The Rb gene encodes p105, a nuclear
protein that is associated with DNA and involved in the regulation of
the cell cycle. It is believed that p105 is also involved in regulating
transcription of critical genes. The Rb gene product exists in two
conditions—phosphorylated and unphosphorylated. In its latter state
(unphosphorylated), it is inactive in growth suppression, while in its
phosphorylated state it gets associated with an unknown/unidentified
nuclear factor and suppresses growth. The Rb gene product interacts
with several viral oncoproteins, e.g. transforming proteins of SV40 and
papilloma virus (E7 protein).
p53 Gene: The p53 protein was first identified as host cell protein
bound to T-antigen. On cloning murine p53, it was shown to be able
to cooperate with an activated ras and serve as an oncogene to trans-
form the cells in vitro, though the rodent cells expressed normal or
wild type p53. An inactivation of p53 was often found in murine
Friend virus induced erythroleukaemia cells. This led to the concept
that p53 is a tumour suppressor gene.
The p53 mutations are found in 50% of bladder, breast, colon and
lung cancers. This involves highly conserved regions in exons 5 to 10.
As against this, p53 mutations in hepatocellular carcinoma involve a
“hot spot” in codon 249, the base change being from G to T. This could
be as a result of an interaction with aflatoxin B, a carcinogen, associated
with hepatic cancer in China. Hepatitis B virus may serve as a co-factor.
The p53 protein is a multimeric complex, with its mutant monomers
more stable than normal p53 protein. The mutant monomers can form
complexes with the normal wild type p53 to inactivate it, acting in a
dominant negative manner. The p53 has been recognised as “guardian of
mebooksfree.com
the genome”, since it allows DNA damaged through normal wear and
tear to be repaired by preventing progress of the cell cycle.
Li-Fraumeni Syndrome. This rare entity is inherited as an autoso-
mal dominant trait. Persons with this condition have point muta-
tions in highly conserved regions of p53 gene (codons 245–258)
involving the germ cell line of family members. These individuals
are highly susceptible to a variety of early onset malignancies, which
include breast cancer, adrenal carcinoma, sarcomas etc.
Deleted in Colorectal Cancer (DCC): The DCC gene is expressed
in the normal colonic mucosa and is remarkably reduced or absent
in colorectal carcinoma. The loss of DCC plays a role in cell-to-cell
and cell-to-basement membrane interactions, the feature obviously
found in malignancy. It is associated with 18q, the loss of which is
found in over 70% of colorectal cancers.
Classification and Functions of Oncogenes

Oncogenes are classified according to their cellular location and the
function of the oncoproteins encoded by them in the signal trans-
duction pathway (Table 10.5). The growth factors stimulate cells to
grow by binding to one of the three types of specific growth factor
receptor in a process called signal transduction. The three growth
factor receptor types are shown in Table 10.6.
Table 10.5 Classification of Oncogenes
Post- Growth
Nuclear Cytoplasmic Receptor GTP Factor Growth
Oncogenes Oncogenes Tyrosinase Binding Receptors Factors
fas mos src N-ras erb-B sis
(PDGF)
jun A-raf abl Ha-ras erb-B2 int
(FGF-
related)
erb-A B-raf yes ki-ras fms hst
(FGF-
related)
myb fgr Kit
myc fes ros
N-myc syn trk
L-myc ret
(Adapted and Modified from: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition, 2001,
mebooksfree.com
Table 10.6 Types of Growth Factor Receptors with

Corresponding Growth Factors
Receptor Growth Factor
GTP binding proteins Thrombin, serotonin angiotensin
Protein tyrosine kinase Insulin, PDGF, EGF
Cytoplasmic tyrosinase kinase-linked Prolactin, erythropoietin

haemopoietin receptors
Growth factors
These are substances governing transition of a cell from G0 phase
till the starting of the cell cycle. Different cells need different growth
factors to stimulate cell division. Two well-known and -studied
growth factors are PDGF and EGF.
Platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF): It stimulates the prolifera-
tion of the connective tissue cells.
Epidermal Growth Factor (EGF): It stimulates number of cell types
including epidermal cells. The best known oncogene that serves as a
growth factor is sis oncogene. It encodes part of “b” chain of PDGF.
When PDGF is added to non-tumourigenic long-term cell cultures,
such as NIH 3T3, the cells are transformed. They behave like neoplastic
cells. Their growth rate increases. In vivo, they form tumour; in vitro,
they lose contact inhibition. A couple of oncogene products showing
homology to fibroblast growth factors are int-2 and hst. They are ampli-
fied in malignant melanomas, breast and oesophageal cancers.
The signal transduction earlier referred to is a complex multi-
step pathway extending from the cell membrane via cytoplasm to
nucleus. It has both positive as well as the negative feedback
loops required for an accurate proliferation and differentiation
of the cell.
Nuclear oncogenes
The oncogenes fos, jun and erb-A encode proteins that regulate gene
expression by activating or suppressing DNA sequences close to it.
The c-myc probably relates to alterations in control of the cell cycle.
The c-myc and c-myb oncoproteins stimulate progress of the cells
from G1 to S phase in the cell cycle. Their overproduction does not
allow the cells to enter prolonged resting phase. This results in
cellular proliferation.
Cytoplasmic oncogenes
Numerous cytoplasmic gene products form a part of signal trans-
duction pathway. The “raf” gene product modulates the normal
mebooksfree.com
regulating cascade. It may be directly responsible for transmitting

growth promoting signal to the nucleus.
Post-receptor tyrosine kinases
In normal cells, the phosphorylation of amino acid tyrosine is
uncommon. This phosphorylation is done by gene products that
are involved in signal transduction. Both, the abl oncogene and
src oncoprotein have tyrosine kinase activity. The src oncoprotein
is responsible for the transforming properties of the Rous sarcoma
virus.
GTP binding proteins
There are intracellular proteins associated with protein kinases. The
ras proteins are located on the inner surface of the plasmalemma.
Growth factor receptors
Many oncogene products (oncoproteins) have tyrosine kinase activ-
ity. The receptors for tyrosine kinases include c-erb-B. It encodes the
epidermal growth factor (EGF) receptor and is related to c-erb-B2
oncogene. This oncogene c-erb-B2 is amplified and expressed in
gastric, pancreatic and ovarian cancers.
Apoptotic oncogenes
The bcl-2 oncogene is an example of apoptotic oncogene. The can-
cer cells increase in number enormously owing to increased growth
and/or division or decreased cell death. Programmed involution or
cell death is called apoptosis.
Familial cancer
It is believed that about 5% of the colorectal and breast cancer arises
as a result of an inherited cancer susceptibility gene. There are a num-
ber of other features that suggest an inherited cancer susceptibility
syndrome in a particular family. These features include the following:
1. Several first- or second-degree relatives show a common cancer.

2. Several close relatives have related cancers, e.g. breast and ovary,
or bowel and endometrial cancer.
3. Early age of onset.
4. Tumours in two different organ systems in one person.
5. Bilateral tumours in paired organs.
6. Two family members may have the same rare cancer.
Familial cancer-predisposing syndrome

Most cancers occur at a specific site, but there are some families in
which the cancers occur at different sites in various members of the
family or at more than one site in an individual. The incidence is
mebooksfree.com
Table 10.7 Inherited Familial Cancer Predisposing Syndromes
Chromosomal
Syndrome Inheritance Location Gene Cancer
Breast and breast/ AD 17q BRCAI Breast, ovary
ovary families
Familial AD 5q APC Colorectal,

adenomatous duodenal,
polyposis thyroid
Familial AD 13q Rbl Retinoblas-

retinoblastoma toma
Li-Fraumeni syn- AD 17p p53 Sarcoma,

drome breast, brain,
leukaemia,
adrenal cortex
Multiple endo- AD 10q MEN2a Thyroid,

crine neoplasia pheochromo-
(MEN) Type 2a cytoma
(Modified and Adapted from: Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics, Eleventh Edition, 2001,
more common than would be expected. Such families are referred

to have familial cancer-predisposing syndrome. Most of them are
with dominant inheritance. Some of them are listed in Table 10.7.
Clinical Implications of Oncogenes

1. Study of the neoplastic changes at the molecular level in different
cell lines from tumours will help in early diagnosis. For example,
alterations, involving c-abl RNA and c-abl coded protein in a chronic
myelogenous leukaemia case, can be studied at an early stage.
2. If we know precisely the modus operandi of oncogenes at the
molecular level—how they bring about transformation in cells,
then one can think of an effective drug intervention.
CHROMOSOMAL ABERRATIONS IN CANCER
They can be in the form of:

1. Translocations
2. Deletions
3. Chromosome breakage syndromes
mebooksfree.com
Translocations
Under this category, there are two well-recognised disorders. They
are as under:
Chronic myeloid leukaemia (CML): Philadelphia chromosome
In 1960, Peter C. Nowell and David A. Hungerford discovered
a small chromosome in patients with chronic myelogenous leukae-
mia. Later on, it was called Philadelphia chromosome. Formation of
Philadelphia chromosome involves translocation between the long
arm of chromosome 22 and the long arm of chromosome 9
(Fig. 10.3). This results in shorter chromosome 22q-(Ph1) called
Philadelphia chromosome. It has also been found in few cases of
acute lymphoblastic leukaemia.
Detailed consideration
Experiments of chromosome mapping have shown c-abl (identified
from Abelson murine leukaemia virus), a cellular oncogene on the
long arm of chromosome 9, which is involved during Philadelphia
translocation. Similarly on the long arm of chromosome 22, an on-
cogene c-sis has been mapped out. In situ hybridisation studies show
that these two oncogenes reside close to the chromosomal break-
points and are included within exchanged segments. The exact
function of c-abl is unknown, but it belongs to a family of genes
encoding proteins called tyrosine kinases, which play a role in cell
growth. The oncogene c-abl is translocated to the “bcr” gene (break-
point cluster region) of chromosome 22. A giant RNA molecule is
transcribed from the fused gene and is then spliced into the mes-
senger RNA. This messenger RNA is then translated into fusion
Figure 10.3 Formation of Philadelphia chromosome involves reciprocal

translocation between q arms of chromosome 9 and 22.
mebooksfree.com
protein. This protein contains about 900 amino acids of bcr (break
point cluster region) and 1100 amino acids of c-abl.
Clinical significance
In 1968, the bone marrow study of CML patients was carried
out. The patients were divided under two heads—Ph-positive
(having Philadelphia chromosome) and Ph-negative cases. In Ph-
negative patients, the average survival period was 12–15 months; in
Ph-positive cases, the average survival period was 36–44 months. Yet
another study conducted in 1972 showed Ph chromosome in 19%–
22% cells in individuals who developed chronic myelogenous
leukaemia after 5½ years. In other words, in asymptomatic individu-
als, presence of Ph chromosome indicates a preleukaemic state.
Future prospects
Fusion protein of chronic myelogenous leukaemia has a unique
structure, which means that it will be possible to raise an antibody
against it. Once it is possible, then this antibody could be used for
early detection of CML and also in the treatment of the disease.
Burkitt lymphoma
It is prevalent in Central Africa and commonly involves children. It
is a neoplastic disease involving lower jaw. It is characterised by an
osteolytic lesion. In this, there is translocation involving chromo-
some 8 and 14. Translocation transfers c-myc gene from chromo-
some 8q24 to 14q32. Thus, translocation involves c-myc gene on
chromosome 8 and immunoglobulin heavy chain gene locus on
chromosome 14. It is believed that translocation increases transcrip-
tion of c-myc almost to 20 times. Alternatively, in some patients the
gene product may be altered instead of being increased. In some
cases of Burkitt lymphoma, the breakpoint on chromosome 8
remains the same, but the reciprocal translocation involves the short
arm of chromosome 2 near locus of k light chain immunoglobulin
gene or the long arm of chromosome 22 near l light chain locus.
The exact mechanism by which translocation of c-myc close to
immunoglobulin gene causes neoplastic transformation is still obscure.
Deletions of Chromosomes and Cancer

Some forms of cancer are associated with a loss of chromosome
material, i.e. deletion. Few of the well-recognised entities have been
described in the following part:
Retinoblastoma (Rb)
It is an embryonic tumour involving the retina. It is found in chil-
dren and is often inherited as an autosomal dominant disorder. Rb
mebooksfree.com
locus has been mapped out along the long arm of chromosome 13
(designated 13q14). In few children with retinoblastoma, there is
interstitial deletion involving this part of chromosome 13. In pa-
tients with retinoblastoma, a comparative study of restriction map-
ping of DNA is done from tumour cells and normal cells. This re-
veals a variety of secondary somatic events in homologous
chromosome 13. These are in the form of mutation or deletion of
normal allelic gene producing retinoblastoma.
Aniridia-Wilms tumour
Wilms tumour is a malignant tumour involving kidney. It occurs in
children and may start even prenatally. A proportion of the suffer-
ing children may show deficient iris (aniridia) associated with kid-
ney tumour. About 50 such cases have been reported so far. Many of
these patients also show a mental deficiency and growth retardation.
A cytogenetic study shows interstitial deletion involving the short
arm of chromosome 11 (i.e., 11p–). The manifestations seen are
because of partial monosomy of the short arm of chromosome 11.
One of the oncogenes, c-rasH (Harvey murine sarcoma), has been
mapped in this portion of chromosome 11.
Chromosomal Breakage Syndromes

On cytogenetic analysis of a number of autosomal recessive disor-
ders, we find excessive chromosomal instability, i.e. breaks
or gaps are evident along chromosomes. These individuals
have defective DNA repair mechanisms and are more prone to
malignancy.
Fanconi anaemia
It is an autosomal recessive disorder. There are associated upper
limb abnormalities. It is characterised by pancytopenia owing to
bone marrow failure. The skin shows brownish pigmentation. Up-
per limb malformations include hypoplastic thumb and severe de-
fects such as radial aplasia. There is often prenatal and postnatal
growth retardation. The haematological picture shows increased
level of foetal haemoglobin (HbF). Increased chromosomal breaks
are evident on marrow cell cultures. Experimentally, it was found
that fibroblast cultures from the patients show increased chromo-
some breakages in presence of mitomycin C. Finally, these patients
are more prone to develop leukaemia and lymphomas.
Ataxia–telangiectasia
It is an autosomal recessive disorder presenting in late childhood with
ataxia (of cerebellar origin) associated with telangiectasia (dilated
blood vessels) often seen in bulbar conjunctiva and auricles. These
mebooksfree.com
individuals have defective cellular immunity. They also show low serum
IgA levels and hypoplastic thymus. They are susceptible to pulmonary
infections. They lack an ability to excise damaged DNA owing to radia-
tion. They present an increased risk of developing malignancy.
Xeroderma pigmentosum
It is a skin disease often turning into skin malignancy. A characteris-
tic feature of the disorder is photosensitive skin rash in sun-exposed
areas. It often involves an age group below 20 years. Cultured cells
from these patients show an increased frequency of sister chromatid
exchanges (SCEs) on exposure to UV light or chemical carcino-
gens. There is deficiency of enzymes, associated with excision and
repair of UV induced DNA damage.
Chromosomal instability or breakages are associated with in-
creased frequency of SCEs in cell cultures. Normally, about 10 SCEs
per cell are found, but the number is remarkably high in xeroderma
pigmentosum patients.
Summary
In 1902 Prof. Theodor Boveri for the first time thought of association of
cancer and chromosomes. PC Nowell and DA Hungerford discovered
Philadelphia chromosome in CML cases in 1959.
Retroviruses: They have RNA as genetic material instead of DNA. When this
virus infects host cell, it makes DNA copy. It is called reverse transcription.
The DNA copy is incorporated in the host genome. The specific DNA
sequences formed by these viruses in the host cell are responsible for
neoplastic change. The integrated DNA thus formed by blending of host
DNA and DNA copy formed by reverse transcription is called provirus.
Oncogene: A study of Rous sarcoma virus has identified fourth gene, the
oncogene, apart from earlier three known viral genes “gag”, “pol” and
“env”. Oncogenes are identified by three letters, reflecting over their origin
or type of tumour. Normal mammalian cells contain DNA sequences
homologous to viral oncogenes; they are called proto-oncogenes.
Cellular oncogenes (C-onc): These genes have oncogenic potentials like
viral oncogenes (V-onc). The viral oncogenes are formed because of errors
in replication of viral genome. Two models have been postulated to explain
conversion of proto-oncogenes (normal) to cellular oncogenes (with
oncogenic potential)—
1. Quantitative model of oncogenic function: Two mechanisms can do
so—gene amplification and insertional mutagenesis.
2. Qualitative model of oncogenic function: The proto-oncogenes can be
converted into cellular oncogenes by one of the following two ways—
i) Mutations in coding sequences: Mutations in the ras gene have
been detected in 30% of human cancers.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
ii) Chromosomal aberrations: It is believed that loss of tumour suppressor
gene activity leads to malignancy, e.g. familial retinoblastoma—an auto-
somal trait; the absence of retinoblastoma (Rb) gene product in homozy-
gous state leads to development of this tumour. Tumour suppressor
activity of Rb gene has been demonstrated in vitro in cancer cells.
Retinoblastoma (Rb) gene: It encodes P105, a nuclear protein involved in
regulation of cell cycle. It is also involved in transcription of critical genes.
p53 gene: p53 mutations are found in 50% of bladder, breast, colon and
lung cancers. p53 has been recognised as “guardian of genome”, since it
allows DNA damaged through normal wear and tear to be repaired by
preventing progress of the cell cycle.
Li-Fraumeni syndrome: It is a rare AD trait associated with point mutations
in highly conserved regions of p53 gene (codons 245–258) involving
germ cell line of family members. So the individuals are highly susceptible
to variety of early-onset malignancies such as breast cancer, adrenal
carcinoma, sarcoma, etc.
Deleted in Colorectal Cancer (DCC): DCC gene is expressed in normal
colonic mucosa. It is reduced or absent in colorectal carcinoma. It is
associated with18q, loss of which is found in 70% colorectal cancers.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What are cellular oncogenes?

2. What are viral oncogenes?
3. What are anti-oncogenes?
4. What are PDGF and EGF?
5. Which chromosomal aberrations are encountered in cancer?
mebooksfree.com
Genetic
Component
in Common 11
Diseases
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Genetic susceptibility in population
•฀Familial occurrence of coronary artery disease, diabetes, hyperten-
sion, obesity, etc.
KEY WORDS
Genetic susceptibility
Conventionally, the focus in medical genetics has been on single gene

disorders or unifactorial chromosomal disorders. Progress in medical
genetics has certainly helped in identifying specific mutational error,
thus offering better or rather more accurate risk estimate and subse-
quently more effective treatment. However, these conditions account
for only a small fraction in total burden of human genetic diseases.
Many common diseases such as diabetes, hypertension, stroke, coro-
nary artery disease (CAD), cancer have genetic components but are
not caused by single gene or chromosome error. In fact, they are re-
sponsible for more morbidity and mortality in most countries. These
diseases collectively warrant an urgent attention of the healthcare
professionals. These diseases exhibit a complex interplay of genetic
and environmental factors; in fact, it is rare for heredity or environ-
ment to be totally responsible for a particular disease. Mostly both
factors operate in combination.
These diseases range between two ends—at one end we have a
condition like Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD), which is en-
tirely genetic in origin, while at the other end we have infectious
diseases resulting from environmental factors. The “common dis-
eases” referred above find place between these two extremes.
177
mebooksfree.com
178 Human Genetics
GENETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY
Some individuals are more prone to develop common diseases, like

diabetes, CAD. This is because they have inherited predisposition,
i.e. genetic susceptibility for that particular disease. Some of these
diseases are because of single gene defect; however in majority of
these diseases, this is due to effects of multiple genes, i.e. polygenic
inheritance along with environmental factors.
Mechanism
Genetic susceptibility may be caused by single gene defect leading
to abnormal gene product involved in a particular metabolic
pathway, e.g. CAD in younger age group due to familial hypercho-
lesterolaemia (FH). In this disease, the main cause is genetic sus-
ceptibility. This can, however, be mitigated by environmental fac-
tors such as:
1. Reducing dietary cholesterol
2. Avoiding smoking
3. Regular exercise
4. Avoiding obesity, etc.
In some diseases, environmental factors may be the main determi-
nant, e.g. smoking in the development of pulmonary emphysema in
individuals with a91-antitrypsin deficiency. a91-antitrypsin is one of
the main serum proteins. It inhibits activity of many proteolytic en-
zymes including trypsin. Individuals who are homozygous for PiZZ,
the most common allele of this protease inhibitor, have greater risk
of developing pulmonary emphysema and cirrhosis of liver. How-
ever, individuals who are heterozygous for a91-antitrypsin deficiency
are at increased risk of developing emphysema when exposed to
environmental factors such as smoking or hazardous chemicals.
It would be interesting to note that in some instances, genetic sus-
ceptibility may be governed by single gene polymorphism and may
vary in different populations, e.g. acetaldehyde dehydrogenase
(ALDH) activity and alcoholism. In alcohol metabolism occurring in
liver, enzymes involved include alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH) and
ALDH. The human ADH consists of dimers with various combina-
tions of subunits of three different polypeptide units coded by three
loci. ADH1 coding for a subunit; ADH2 coding for b subunit and
ADH3 that codes for g subunit. In case of ALDH, there are two major
variants—ALDH1 present in cytosol and ALDH2 present in mito-
chondria. The acute flushing reaction to alcohol in Far East Asians is
said to be due to absence of ALDH2 activity. This unpleasant reac-
tion to alcohol could account for lower incidence of alcoholism in
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 11 — Genetic Component in Common Diseases 179
this population. The genetic susceptibility can explain differences in

responses to drugs, e.g. isoniazid inactivation status in the manage-
ment of tuberculosis.
DEMONSTRATION OF GENETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY
Following approaches are available in order to determine genetic

susceptibility:
1. Family study
2. Twin studies
3. Population studies
4. Immigration studies
5. Polymorphism associations
6. Biochemical studies
7. Animal models
Family Study: A higher frequency of family history of a disease in
relatives than in general population is suggestive of genetic susceptibil-
ity. The proportion of the affected individuals in family as first- or
second-degree relatives provides useful information for empiric recur-
rence risk and eventually helps in genetic counselling. Finding family
aggregation of the disease, however, does not prove genetic suscepti-
bility because the families have common environmental factors.
Twin Studies: If both the members of a pair of monozygotic (MZ)
twins have the same trait, it does not mean that the trait is hereditary
since they share same environment. The trait could be due to simi-
lar environmental factors to which they are exposed, e.g. a conta-
gious disease like impetigo. This issue can be partly resolved by
comparing findings between dizygotic (DZ) and MZ (identical) twin
pairs.
The twins are said to be “concordant” when either both members
are affected or neither is affected. The term “discordant” means
only one member of the twin pair is affected. If a disease is entirely
due to the environmental factors the concordance rates shall be
very much the same whether they are identical or non-identical
twins.
Population and Immigration Studies: The incidence of a particu-
lar disease is different in different population groups. This suggests
the possibility of genetic factors being important. Immigration stud-
ies have suggested that an immigrant group moving from popula-
tion group with low incidence of a disease to the one with high
incidence shows rise in incidence. This means that environmental
factor/s are operational; on the other hand, maintenance of low
incidence of a disease in an immigrant group suggests that genetic
factor/s are playing more significant role.
mebooksfree.com
180 Human Genetics
Polymorphism Associations: The human leukocyte antigens

(HLA) of the major histocompatibility complex and specific disease
associations have been found, e.g. insulin-dependent diabetes mel-
litus (diabetes type 1 or IDDM) and HLA class II alleles suggesting
that it is an autoimmune disease; other diseases include rheumatoid
arthritis, celiac disease and so on.
Animal Model: Experimental animals such as rats or mice are
used. Progeny that has extreme values of a trait, e.g. rats having high
blood pressure is selected. These are crossed with normal animals to
produce offsprings. These offsprings have one normal chromosome
and the other “affected” chromosome having gene causing high
blood pressure. These animals are mated with normal animals. This
produces third generation in whom one chromosome has normal
genes and other chromosome has recombinations between normal
and affected chromosomes (due to “crossing over” in parental meio-
sis). This series of mating produces progeny that is useful for link-
age analysis.
High resolution genetic maps of these experimental animals are
available. The polymorphic markers at regular intervals, ideally
at every 10 cM, are then identified throughout the genome of the
organism.
Linkage analysis is performed, comparing each polymorphic
marker against the trait. Since animals with extreme values of the
trait were selected, the procedure should reveal markers that are
linked to loci that produce extreme phenotype. Once a linked
marker is found, it is possible to isolate actual functional gene that
is responsible for the trait.
When the functional gene is isolated and cloned, it can be used
as a probe to search human genome for a gene with high DNA se-
quence homology that may have the same function. This is referred
as “candidate gene”. This approach is possible because the DNA
sequences of functionally important genes in human and in experi-
mental animals like rodents are often similar.
This approach is effectively used in studies relating to type I dia-
betes (IDDM) and hypertension. This technique detects only indi-
vidual genes that cause disease in the animal model. However, in
this approach one cannot assess the pattern of interactions of these
genes, which may be critical and may differ in humans and animals.
Nevertheless this helps us in identifying genes responsible for mul-
tifactorial diseases. In the following text, we shall deal with the ge-
netic components involved in some of the common diseases.
Coronary Artery Disease

Heart disease is a major killer in most of the countries in the world.
The most common underlying cause of heart disease is coronary
mebooksfree.com
artery disease (CAD). This is caused by atherosclerosis. It leads to

narrowing of the coronary arteries, impairing blood flow to myocar-
dium eventually resulting in myocardial infarction (MI). Numerous
factors have been identified for CAD, such as obesity, smoking,
hypertension, raised cholesterol level and, last but not the least,
family history, which means having one or more affected first-degree
relatives. Family studies have shown that an individual with positive
family history is 2–7 times more likely to suffer from CAD than an
individual with no family history of CAD.
The risk is higher:
(a) If there are more affected relatives
(b) If the affected relative is female
(c) If the age of onset of the affected relative is early, less than
55 years
It will be worthwhile to ascertain role of genes in familial cluster-
ing of CAD. Many investigators have studied the role of lipids in
atherosclerosis with focus on determination of variation in circulat-
ing lipoprotein levels. Isolation and cloning of the gene that en-
codes low-density lipoprotein (LDL) receptor has been a significant
advance in this area. 1 in 500 individuals is heterozygous for a muta-
tion in this gene. Such individuals have LDL cholesterol levels
doubled, and the condition is referred to as familial hypercholester-
olaemia (FH).
Familial Hypercholesterolaemia (FH)

It is transmitted as an autosomal dominant trait and is an important
cause of heart disease accounting for nearly 5% of MIs in younger
age group. About 1 in 500 persons is heterozygote. The plasma cho-
lesterol levels in these persons are twice as high as normal, i.e. about
300–400 mg/dl. This results in accelerated atherosclerosis. These
individuals present with xanthomas, i.e. distinctive cholesterol depos-
its in skin and tendons. Studies have shown that about 75% of men
with FH develop CAD and about 50% suffer from nearly fatal MI. In
accordance with Hardy–Weinberg law, approximately 1 in 1,000,000
births is homozygous for the FH gene. Homozygotes are more severely
affected. Their cholesterol levels range from 600 to 1200 mg/dl. Most
of them suffer MI before 20 years of age, youngest on record has
been 18 months.
In order to understand the disease, we need to know little more
about LDL receptors and cholesterol. All cells have cholesterol as a
component of their plasma membrane. They either synthesise their
own cholesterol or obtain it from extracellular environment, where
it is carried primarily by low-density lipoprotein (LDL). By endocy-
tosis, LDL-bound cholesterol is taken into the cell via LDL receptors
mebooksfree.com
182 Human Genetics
along the cell surface. FH is basically due to reduction in number of

functional LDL receptors on cell surfaces. Since these individuals
lack number of LDL receptors, the cholesterol uptake is remarkably
reduced which in turn increases circulating cholesterol levels.
LDL Receptors. In fact, the current knowledge that we have
about endocytosis is based on LDL receptor study. The LDL recep-
tors are glycoproteins; these are synthesised in endoplasmic reticu-
lum. They then pass through Golgi and reach the cell surface.
A part of the LDL receptor protrudes outside the cell.
The circulating LDL particle is bound to LDL receptor. LDL re-
ceptors lie in depressions called “coated pits”. These are coated with
protein called Clathrin. The coated pit invaginates taking LDL par-
ticle inside the cell. Within the cell, the LDL particle is separated
from the receptor and taken to lysosome. The lysosomal enzymes
breakdown the LDL particle, while the receptor is recirculated to
the cell surface. Each LDL receptor undergoes this cycle every
10 minutes. Free cholesterol is released from the lysosome for incor-
poration into the cell membranes, or metabolism into bile acids or
sterols. Excess cholesterol is stored as cholesterol ester or removed
from the cell by association with high density lipoprotein (HDL).
As the cholesterol levels in the cell rise, its synthesis is reduced
by inhibition of an enzyme HMG-CoA reductase. The increment
in cholesterol level promotes activity of acyl-coenzyme A: choles-
terol acyltransferase (ACAT). This modifies cholesterol to be
stored in the form of cholesterol esters. Simultaneously, the num-
ber of LDL receptors is decreased by reducing transcription
rate of the LDL receptor gene (LDLR). Eventually, this reduces
cholesterol uptake.
LDLR gene was cloned in 1984. This explains how receptor defects
cause FH. LDLR gene is located on chromosome 19. It is 45 kb in
length and has 18 exons and 17 introns. Over 900 mutations have been
identified in this. About two-thirds of these are missense and non-sense
substitutions. LDLR mutations can be grouped under five classes:
Class I: These mutations result in no detectable protein product.

The heterozygotes produce only half the normal number of LDL
receptors.
Class II: In this, LDL receptors are produced but cannot separate
from the endoplasmic reticulum; eventually they are degraded.
Class III: Here LDL receptors are produced; they migrate to cell
surface but fail to bind to LDL.
Class IV: These mutations produce LDL receptors that cannot migrate
to specific “coated pits” and thus do not carry LDL into the cell.
Class V: These mutations produce LDL receptors that cannot dis-
sociate from the LDL particle after entry into the cell. The recep-
tor cannot return to the cell surface and finally gets degraded.
mebooksfree.com
Each of the above stated mutations reduces the number of func-

tional LDL receptors; this decreases LDL uptake, leading to rise in
the circulating cholesterol levels. FH heterozygotes have half the
normal number of LDL receptors, while homozygotes have no func-
tional LDL receptors.
Management of FH
1. Dietary reduction of cholesterol with the reduced intake of satu-
rated fats.
2. Administration of bile acid absorbing resins such as cholestyr-
amine. It is interesting to note that reduced recirculation of choles-
terol from the gut triggers the liver cells to form more LDL recep-
tors, lowering circulating cholesterol levels. However, decrease in
the intracellular cholesterol stimulates cholesterol synthesis in liver
cells; thus, overall reduction in cholesterol level is 15%–20% only.
3. The above treatment is more effective when combined with
“statin” group (e.g. lovastatin, pravastatin), which reduces choles-
terol synthesis by inhibiting 3-hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl coenzyme-
A (HMG-CoA) reductase. Decreased cholesterol level promotes
formation of LDL receptors. In heterozygotes, this therapy often
brings serum cholesterol levels to normal. However in homozy-
gotes, it is less encouraging. Liver transplants with its limitations,
because of availability of donors, seems to be the only answer.
Hepatocytes of the transplant provide normal LDL receptors.
Plasma exchange every 1–2 weeks brings cholesterol levels to 50%;
however, it is difficult over long periods to practice this.
Somatic cell gene therapy with hepatocytes carrying normal LDL recep-
tors is another option. These cells are introduced in portal circula-
tion. This may be therapy in the future, which is being tested cur-
rently in FH homozygotes.
Another form of heart disease is cardiomyopathy, which involves
cardiac musculature and leads to reduced cardiac function. Hypertro-
phic cardiomyopathy involving left ventricle is found in nearly 1 in 500
adults and accounts for about 10,000 deaths every year. Overall, 50%
cases exhibit familial tendency. It is caused by autosomal dominant
mutations in one of the ten genes that encode cardiac sarcomere.
The most frequent being gene coding for b-myosin heavy chain, ac-
counting for 35% of the familial cases; myosin-binding protein C for
20% cases; and troponin T for 15% of the cases. Dilated cardiomyopa-
thy is seen with the frequency of 1 in 2500 individuals. About one-
third cases show familial tendencies. Mostly it is because of autoso-
mal dominant mutations; however, X-linked or mitochondrial
inheritance is also known. The genes involved are those coding for
cytoskeletal proteins such as actin, cardiac troponin T, components
of the dystroglycan–sarcoglycan complex, desmin, etc.
mebooksfree.com
184 Human Genetics
Long QT (LQT) Syndrome

In this, the affected individuals have elongated QT interval in ECG.
It is indicative of prolonged cardiac repolarisation. The disorder
may be due to inherited mutations or caused by exposure to drugs
that block potassium channels. This predisposes the affected indi-
viduals to potentially fatal cardiac arrhythmia.
Romano–Ward Syndrome
It is a potentially fatal cardiac arrhythmia. This can be caused by muta-
tions involving any one of the five genes, among which four encode
potassium channel subunits, they are KVLQT1, HERG, KCNE1 and
KCNE2, while one encodes sodium channel and it is SCN5A.
Table 11.1 shows genes responsible for causing heart disease,
their chromosomal association and also the corresponding protein
product being affected.
Table 11.1 Genes Contributing to Heart Disease
Chromosomal
Gene Location Protein Product Function
Apolipoprotein A-I 11q HDL component, LCAT factor
Apolipoprotein A-II 1p HDL component
Apolipoprotein A-IV 11q HDL and chylomicron component,
HDL metabolism
Apolipoprotein B 2p Involved in formation of LDL,
VLDL, IDL and chylomicrons
ligand for LDL receptor
Apolipoprotein C-I 19q LCAT activation
Apolipoprotein C-II 19q Lipoprotein lipase activation
Apolipoprotein D 2p HDL component
Apolipoprotein E 19q Ligand for LDL receptor
LDL receptor 19p Uptake of circulating LDL particles
Lipoprotein (a) 6q Cholesterol transport
Lipoprotein lipase 8p Hydrolysis of lipoprotein lipids
LCAT 16q Cholesterol esterification
HDL—High density lipoprotein; LDL—Low density lipoprotein; IDL—Intermediate density

lipoprotein; VLDL—Very low density lipoprotein; LCAT—Lecithin–cholesterol acyltransferase.
(Adapted and Modified from King RA, Router JI. Genetic Basis of Common
Diseases, 2Edition, Oxford University Press, New York.)
mebooksfree.com
Diabetes Mellitus
There are three main forms of diabetes mellitus (DM)—type 1 DM,
type 2 DM and maturity onset diabetes of young. Clinically they are
different in their presentations.
Type 1 DM
It is also called IDDM, i.e. insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus. It is
seen in adolescence and can be controlled only by regular adminis-
tration of insulin. It is characterised by T-cell infiltration of the
pancreas leading to b-cell destruction. Apart from this, autoimmune
antibodies against pancreatic cells are also observed. They appear
even before clinical picture becomes evident.
Family Study: Sibs of individuals with type 1 diabetes have signifi-
cantly high risk, approximately 6% as against 0.3–0.5% in general
population. The recurrence risk is also elevated, if the parent is af-
fected. The risk for offspring of diabetic mothers is 1%–3%, while it
is 4%–6% for offsprings of diabetic father.
Twin Study: Twin studies have shown empiric risk for MZ twins of
type 1 DM to the tune of 30%–50%. In DZ twins, it is 5%–10%. The
fact that type 1 diabetes is not 100% concordant in MZ twins signi-
fies that genetic factors are not solely responsible for it. There is
sufficient evidence indicating that some viral infections possibly
have a role to play in causation of type 1 DM by activating an autoim-
mune response.
It is estimated that HLA system accounts for approximately
40% of the familial clustering of type 1 DM. About 95% of Cau-
casians with IDDM have HLA DR3 and/or DR4 alleles, while
percentage of these alleles in general Caucasian population is
about 50%. If an affected proband and a sibling are both hetero-
zygous for DR3 and DR4 alleles, the risk of sibling developing
type 1 DM is about 20%, i.e. approximately 40 times greater than
in general population. It reflects over linkage disequilibrium be-
tween alleles of the DR locus and those of HLA-DQ locus. It is
observed that absence of aspartic acid at position 57 of the DQ
chain is associated with susceptibility to type 1 DM. The aspartic
acid substitution alters the configuration of the HLA class II mol-
ecule and also its ability to bind and present peptides to T cells.
This altered T-cell recognition may avert autoimmune episode in
the individual.
Insulin gene located on the short arm of chromosome 11 is a
logical candidate for type 1 DM susceptibility. Polymorphism studies
involving this gene and region near it have been done. A strong as-
sociation is seen with allelic variation in a variable number of tan-
dem repeats (VNTRs) polymorphism located just at 5’ end of the
insulin gene. The differences in number of VNTR units possibly
affect transcription of the insulin gene, resulting in variation in
mebooksfree.com
186 Human Genetics
susceptibility. Approximately, 10% of the familial clustering of type

1 DM is due to genetic variation in insulin region.
An animal model, using non-obese diabetic mouse, has been stud-
ied extensively. In addition, affected sib-pair analysis has also been
used to map additional genes causing type 1 DM. At least 20 candi-
date regions have been identified that may harbour type 1 diabetes
susceptibility genes. However, precise identification of these genes
is a daunting task considering the complexity of the disorder such
as locus heterogeneity, polygenic background, HLA alleles account-
ing for genetic susceptibility to type 1 diabetes.
Type 2 diabetes mellitus
Type 2 DM is also recognised as non-insulin-dependent diabetes
mellitus (NIDDM). It accounts for more than 90% of diabetic
patients. An endogenous insulin production is nearly always pres-
ent in type 2 DM patients. The disorder is often effectively man-
aged by dietary modifications and oral anti-diabetic drugs. The
disorder is typically seen in persons who have crossed 40 years of
age, often associated with obesity. In fact, increasing obesity
among younger age group in developed countries has shifted oc-
currence of type 2 DM to young adults. In contrast to type 1 DM,
HLA associations and auto-antibodies do not seem to be operat-
ing in type 2 DM.
MZ twin concordance rates are substantially higher in this type of
diabetes, often crossing 90%. Empiric recurrence risk for the first-
degree relatives of the patient with type 2 DM is higher than type 1
DM patients, usually between 10% and 15%. Risk factors include
two important ones: (i) family history and (ii) obesity—dietary hab-
its and lack of exercise being responsible for it. Exercise reduces
obesity, increases insulin sensitivity and eventually improves glucose
tolerance.
An extensive linkage analysis undertaken to identify gene respon-
sible for type 2 DM has led to a region on chromosome 2q. The
gene encoding calpain-10, a cysteine protease, is associated with
type 2 DM susceptibility. Another significant association of type
2 DM and a common allele of the gene that encodes peroxisome
proliferator-activated receptor-g (PPAR-g) has been revealed. PPAR-
g is a transcription factor involved in adipocyte differentiation and
glucose metabolism.
Maturity-onset diabetes of young (MODY)
This accounts for 1%–5% of the diabetic patients. It occurs typically
before 25 years of age. It follows autosomal dominant inheritance.
In contrast to type 2 DM, it is not associated with obesity. Family
study reveals that about 50% cases result from mutations involving
gene that encodes glucokinase (rate-limiting) enzyme in conversion
mebooksfree.com
of glucose to glucose-6-phosphate in pancreas. Mutations involving

five other genes encoding for transcription factors in development
of pancreas and insulin regulation have been identified as culprits
in MODY. These are as under:
1. Hepatocyte nuclear factor-1 a9 (HNF1 a9)
2. Hepatocyte nuclear factor-1 b (HNF1 b)
3. Hepatocyte nuclear factor-4 a9 (HNF4 a9)
4. Insulin promoter factor-1 (IPF1) and
5. Neurogenic differentiation-1 (NEU ROD1)
Mutations involving these genes are expressed as dysfunction of
pancreatic b cells leading to diabetes.
HYPERTENSION
The systemic hypertension is encountered in nearly 25% of the

adult population in most of the countries in the world. In turn, it is
responsible for heart disease, stroke and renal disease in many cases.
Familial tendency is observed in about 20%–40% cases. Heritability
estimates with twin studies is to the tune of 60%. The very fact that
it is less than 100% in twin studies substantiates the role of environ-
mental factors. More significant among the environmental factors
are psychosocial stress, increased sodium intake, decreased physical
activity and obesity.
Regulation of blood pressure is a highly complex process. It is
governed by many physiological factors, such as cellular ion trans-
port, vascular tone, heart function, kidney function, etc. Blood pres-
sure variation is influenced by rennin–angiotensin system, kallikrein–
kinin system (use of vasodilators such as nitric oxide) and ion-transport
system e.g. sodium–lithium counter transport. Linkage and association
studies have shown that gene encoding for angiotensinogen is re-
sponsible for causing hypertension.
Some of the hypertensive individuals present with single gene
disorders, e.g. Liddle syndrome. These patients have low plasma al-
dosterone and hypertension. It is caused by mutations altering epi-
thelial sodium channel (ENaC). In yet another syndrome called
Gordon syndrome, hypertension is associated with high serum po-
tassium level and increased renal salt resorption. It is caused by
WNK1 or WNK4 Kinase gene mutations.
Nearly eight genes have so far been identified that can lead to
some rare forms of hypertension. All of them affect resorption of
water and salt by kidneys. This in turn has effect on blood volume as
well as blood pressure. It may be expected that isolation and study
of these genes may be helpful in identifying genetic factors involved
in causing essential hypertension.
mebooksfree.com
188 Human Genetics
The biochemical studies of hypertensive individuals have sup-

ported possibility of a common autosomal dominant gene. In some
hypertensive individuals, there is defective extrusion of sodium
from red cells because of defect in enzyme that controls sodium,
potassium cotransport at red cell membrane. This results in accu-
mulation of sodium within the cell, and the increased intracellular
sodium is major determinant of hypertension.
Another red cell ion transport assay has been developed. It is
called sodium–lithium counter transport system. It involves
loading RBCs with lithium and measuring the rate of efflux of
lithium from RBCs in low- and high-sodium concentrations. An
increased sodium–lithium counter transport correlates with hy-
pertension.
Yet another assay called ouabain-sensitive sodium–potassium
ATPase system has been contemplated as a possible indicator of
genetic susceptibility. The above stated assays provide supportive
evidence for the role of single gene in determining predisposition
to essential hypertension.
Other Factors: Women who develop pre-eclampsia in gestation
period were thought to possess an increased risk of hypertension
following the pregnancy. Pre-eclampsia is a condition presenting
with oedema, proteinuria along with hypertension. A careful review
and assessment of these cases, however, revealed that these women
already had pre-existing predisposition to hypertension that is inci-
dentally detected during pregnancy.
Obesity
Obesity is defined as body mass index greater than 30.
W Weight in kilograms
BMI  2
i.e.
H (Height in meters)2
With this definition, nearly 30% adult population in developed

countries is obese. About 35% individuals are overweight (BMI
ranging between 25 and 30). Though obesity is not a disease, it cer-
tainly is an important risk factor for number of common diseases,
e.g. stroke, type 2 diabetes, hypertension, etc. With the current life-
style in the society, obesity is on rise. There is strong correlation
between obesity in parents and in their children. This may be logi-
cally ascribed to the common environment that they share with
similar dietary and exercise habits. However, there is sufficient evi-
dence suggestive of genetic component also being responsible. This
is attested by adoption studies where the body weights of adopted
individuals correlated with their biological parents and not with
their adoptive parents.
mebooksfree.com
Recently, a study on mouse models has shown several genes re-

sponsible for obesity. More important being genes encoding for
“Leptin”, a hormone, and its receptor. Leptin is secreted by adipo-
cytes (fat cells) and acts on appetite control centre in the hypo-
thalamus. Increased fat stores cause elevated leptin level; this stimu-
lates satiety centre and leads to loss of appetite. Low leptin levels
increase appetite. Mice with mutations involving leptin gene or
leptin receptor gene develop obesity.
Human homologs of leptin gene and its receptor, however, do not
support the findings completely. Most obese humans show high
leptin levels indicating that leptin gene is functioning normally;
with this, the leptin receptor gene was suspected to be defective.
Individuals with severe obesity (BMI more than 40) show mutations
involving leptin gene and its receptor gene.
Additionally, leptin participates in important interactions with
other components that have an effect on appetite, such as neuro-
peptide g and a9-melanocyte stimulating hormone and its receptor,
i.e. melanocortin-4-receptor (MC4R). In fact, 3%–5% of the severely
obese individuals have mutations involving MC4R. Learning more
about human genes responsible for obesity would eventually lead us
to better and effective management of the problem.
PEPTIC ULCER
It may be in the stomach (gastric) or in the duodenum (duodenal

ulcer). This can be ascertained on gastroscopy or on radiological
examination. Past studies have shown that gastric ulcer is more
frequent in poor socioeconomic group, while duodenal ulceration
is more frequently found in an affluent group, i.e. higher socio-
economic group. This suggests that there are different environ-
mental factors involved. Numerous environmental factors seem to
have their role including smoking, stress, alcohol consumption,
etc., in peptic ulceration. Another factor, an infective agent, Heli-
cobacter pylori is also said to cause chronic gastritis leading to peptic
ulceration.
Past studies have indicated that peptic ulceration is twice as com-
mon in males as in females; however, recently the sex ratio has
nearly been equal. The underlying cause for this change might be
smoking and work-related stress in women in recent times.
Family Study and Twin Study. Peptic ulceration (gastric or duode-
nal) is twice as common in first-degree relatives of an affected per-
son as in general population. It is suggested that this could be be-
cause of common environment that they share. Twin studies of
peptic ulceration have shown concordance rate in MZ twins to be
double as compared to the DZ twins. The MZ twin do not show
mebooksfree.com
190 Human Genetics
100% concordance; this indicates role of environmental factors in

the aetiology of peptic ulcer.
Blood Group Association

Numerous studies conducted in different population groups have
shown increased proportion of people with peptic ulceration to
have “O” blood group. This does not mean that all O group indi-
viduals shall have or develop peptic ulcer. However, one can say that
“O” blood group individuals are at higher risk of having peptic ul-
cer, to the tune of 30% as compared to other blood group, i.e. A, B
or AB. Among the two, the duodenal ulceration is more closely (and
frequently) associated with “O” blood group than gastric ulcer. Find-
ing correlation with the secretor status and the peptic ulceration, it
is revealed that peptic ulceration is more common in non-secretors.
The non-secretor being 50% more likely to develop peptic ulcer-
ation. The combination of non-secretor status with “O” blood group
has 2.5 times the risk of developing peptic ulceration as compared
to general population.
Inheritance. Peptic ulcer can occur as a feature of some rare sin-
gle gene disorder, such as multiple endocrine neoplasia type 1. It is
an autosomal dominant trait with the risk of developing adenomas
involving pituitary, parathyroid, pancreas with associated peptic
ulceration.
ALZHEIMER DISEASE
Alzheimer disease (AD) is responsible for 60%–70% cases of pro-

gressive cognitive impairment in elderly people. It affects nearly
10% of population above 65 years and 40% of individuals above
85 years of age. It is characterised by progressive dementia and for-
mation of amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles in cerebral
cortex and hippocampus. These changes lead to neuronal loss.
The risk of developing AD doubles in persons who have an af-
fected first-degree relative. It follows an autosomal dominant in-
heritance in about 10% cases; though most cases do not appear to
be caused by single loci. It is genetically heterogeneous disorder.
Nearly half of early onset cases can be attributed to mutations in
any of the three genes that affect amyloid-b deposition. Two of
these are presenilin 1 (PS1) and presenilin 2 (PS2). They are simi-
lar to each other, and their protein product helps cleavage of the
amyloid-b-precursor protein (APP). When APP is not normally
cleaved, a long form of it accumulates and is deposited in the brain.
This is primarily the cause of AD. Mutations involving PS1 gene,
which is said to cause early onset of AD, may be in the fifth decade.
mebooksfree.com
Some cases present with mutations involving gene encoding for

APP, located on chromosome 21. These mutations disrupt normal
secretase cleavage sites in APP leading to accumulation of longer
protein product. Since this gene is located on chromosome 21,
some Down syndrome patients with an extra gene show amyloid
deposits in brain and occurrence of AD.
For late-onset AD, an important risk factor identified has been an
allelic variation in apolipoprotein E (APOE) locus. It has three ma-
jor alleles—e2, e3, and e4. Persons who have one copy of e4 (hetero-
zygous) are at least 2–5 times more likely to develop AD, while ho-
mozygous individuals having two copies of e4 are 5–10 times more
likely to develop the disease. Difference exists among populations—
Europeans and Japanese have higher e4 associated risk, while His-
panics and African–Americans have relatively lower risk.
Genome scans indicate that there are additional AD genes on chro-
mosomes 10 and 12. A gene located on chromosome 12 region encodes
a2-macroglobulin. It is protease inhibitor that interacts with apolipopro-
tein E. Another gene in this region codes for low-density lipoprotein re-
ceptor-related protein (LRP), which too interacts with apolipoprotein E.
Some studies have supported an association between these alleles and
late-onset AD. Many features associated with Alzheimer pose difficulty in
genetic analysis of the disease. These are as under:
1. Genetic heterogeneity.
2. Difficulty in definitive diagnosis. It is only possible with brain
autopsy. Diagnosis in living members is indicated through clinical
features and brain imaging studies.
3. Since the disease occurs late in life, the individuals carrying AD-
predisposing mutations could die from another cause before AD
is fully manifested. These individuals are likely to be missed as
non-carriers.
Despite all these hurdles, several genes associated with AD have
been identified, leading to better understanding and eventually
more effective treatment of the disease.
Summary
Many common diseases such as diabetes, hypertension, stroke, coronary
artery disease and cancer have genetic components involved, but are not
caused by single gene or chromosome error. They cause more morbidity
and mortality than the genetic diseases and this fact warrants urgent atten-
tion of healthcare professionals.
Genetic Susceptibility: Some people are more prone to develop diseases
like diabetes and hypertension; it means, they have inherited predisposition.
This is called genetic susceptibility.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
192 Human Genetics
Summary—cont’d
Mechanism: Caused by single gene defect leading to abnormal product
causing metabolic error.
Genetic susceptibility can be determined through following: (i)Family
study; (ii) Twin study; (iii) Population study; (iv) Immigration study; (v) Biochemical
study; (vi) Polymorphism associations; (vii) Animal models.
Coronary Artery Disease (CAD): A major killer world over. Cause can be
familial hypercholesterolaemia (FH).
Familial hypercholesterolaemia (FH): It is an autosomal dominant trait.
Affects 5% of younger age group myocardial infarctions (MI). Patients have
double plasma cholesterol level than normal. This leads accelerated athero-
sclerosis. 75% of men with FH develop CAD, and 50% suffer massive MI.
One in 1000,000 births is homozygous for FH gene.
Low density lipoprotein (LDL) binds with cholesterol and is taken within the
cell by LDL receptors. In FH, number of functional LDL receptors is reduced;
this reduces cholesterol uptake in the cell, in turn increasing the circulating
cholesterol levels. This promotes atherosclerosis. LDL receptor is a glyco-
protein, synthesised by endoplasmic reticulum. LDL receptor gene is located
on chromosome 19. It is 45 Kb long and has 18 exons and 17 introns. There
are five classes of mutations involving it—class I–V.
Management: Dietary reduction of cholesterol, administration of bile acid
absorbing resins, e.g. cholestyramine. Use of statin group drugs (e.g. lovas-
tatin, pravastatin) helps effectively. Somatic cell gene therapy with hepato-
cytes carrying LDL receptors may also help.
LQT Syndrome: Mutations or use of potassium channel blocking drugs
cause long QT interval in ECG, which may cause fatal cardiac arrhythmia.
Romano–Ward syndrome: A potentially fatal cardiac arrhythmia caused by
mutation of genes encoding potassium channel subunits.
Diabetes Mellitus (DM)
Type 1 DM: Also called insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM). It can
be controlled only by insulin. It is caused by destruction of b cells. Autoim-
mune antibodies cause this. Viral infections possibly play a role in causation
of IDDM.
About 40% of familial clustering of type I DM is due to HLA system. Absence
of aspartic acid at 57 position of DQ chain at HLA–DQ locus is the cause.
In 10% cases, alterations in insulin gene at 11p is responsible for familial
clustering of type 1 DM.
Type 2 DM: It’s non–insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM); seen in
age group above 40 years. Gene encoding for Calpain-10, a cysteine prote-
ase, located on 2q is associated with type 2 DM.
Maturity-Onset Diabetes of Young (MODY): It is typically seen before
25 years of age; it is an autosomal dominant trait and is not associated with
obesity. Mutations of gene encoding glucokinase enzyme and also five
genes encoding for transcription factors in development of pancreas and
insulin are probable culprits.
Hypertension: It is seen in 25% of world population. It may cause heart
disease, stroke, and renal disease. Factors responsible include familial
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
tendency (in 20%–40%), obesity, more of sodium intake, stress, etc. Physi-
ological factors include cellular ion transport, vascular tone, heart and kid-
neys function.
Liddle syndrome: Single-gene disorder with low plasma aldosterone and
hypertension. In Gordon syndrome, hypertension is associated with high
serum potassium and is due to mutations of WNK1 or WNK4 kinase gene.
Increased intracellular sodium is the major determinant of hypertension. Red
cell ion transport assay and another assay involving ouabain-sensitive so-
dium–potassium ATPase system are indicators of genetic susceptibility.
Obesity: With body mass index (BMI) more than 30, one can put label of
obesity. Mouse model studies have shown genes encoding leptin, a hor-
mone, and its receptor associated with adipocytes being responsible for
this. Interactions of leptin with other components (e.g. neuropeptides g,
a’-melanocyte stimulating hormone and its receptor [i.e. MC4R]) govern ap-
petite, and the mutations of these may cause obesity.
Peptic Ulcer: It may be in stomach (known as gastric ulcer) or duodenum
(known as duodenal ulcer). Gastric ulcer is seen in poor socio-economic
group, while duodenal ulcer in affluent group. Peptic ulcer is twice as com-
mon in males as in females. Factors responsible are stress, smoking, alcohol
consumption or H. pylori infection. O blood group individuals are more
among peptic ulcer patients.
Alzheimer Disease: It presents with progressive dementia, amyloid plaques,
and neurofibrillary tangles in cerebral cortex and hippocampus with neuronal
loss. It is seen in 10% of people above 65 years and 40% individuals above
85 years. It is an autosomal dominant trait. Mutations in any of the three
genes that affect amyloid-b deposition (i.e. presenilin 1 [PS1], presenilin
2 [PS2] or gene encoding amyloid-b precursor protein [APP]) account for
50% of early-onset cases.
Late-onset Alzheimer cases show allelic variation in apolipoprotein E (APOE)
locus. Genome scans have indicated Alzheimer disease gene on chromo-
some 10 and 12. The latter encodes a2-macroglobulin.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What do you mean by genetic susceptibility?
2. What causes genetic susceptibility?
3. How can genetic susceptibility be determined?
4. What are LDL receptors?
5. Where is the locus for LDL receptor gene (LDLR)?
6. What does IDDM stand for?
7. What is body mass index?
mebooksfree.com
Population
12 Genetics
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Principle of Hardy–Weinberg’s law
•฀Factors influencing Hardy–Weinberg’s equilibrium
•฀Importance of Twin study
•฀Dermatoglyphics its principles and application
KEY WORDS
Beanbag genetics, Eugenics, Cloning, Dermatoglyphics
Population genetics deals with the study of genes in population. It

also tells us about how distribution of genes and the genotypes are
maintained or changed in population. Since both environment and
heredity are operational in population genetics, a new field called
genetic epidemiology has emerged. It deals with the distribution, aetiol-
ogy and course of some heritable diseases in population. If we as-
sume that the gene frequencies in population do not change at all,
there will be no place for evolution. This means, the genetic profile
of a population group does not always remain constant but changes
over generations, offering a chance of evolution. The population
genetics restricts itself to the study of one species, while evolution
encompasses many of them. Population genetics and evolution are
together designated as evolutionary genetics. Almost three billion
years ago what existed as a cluster of precellular organic molecules
has become a multicellular organism of today’s human being.
HARDY–WEINBERG’S LAW
Hardy and Weinberg in 1908 independently defined this law. It is

named after GH Hardy, an English mathematician, and W Weinberg, a
194
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 12 — Population Genetics 195
German physician. The similarity between their work was recognised in

1943 by C Stern who suggested the names of Hardy and Weinberg be
given to this principle in population genetics. The law states, “gene
frequencies in a population remain constant from generation to gen-
eration if no evolutionary factors such as migration, mutation, selection
and drift are operating”. The law provides a simple algebraic formula
to calculate expected gene and genotype frequencies in population.
(Source: http://fhs-bio-wiki.pbworks. (Source: http://ib-bioplans.wiki-

com/w/page/24612898/Hardy%20 spaces.com/Hardy-
Weinberg%20Equilibrum) Weinberg+Equilibrium)
BEANBAG GENETICS
Population genetics is sometimes called beanbag genetics (Fig. 12.1).

Let us consider a beanbag containing beans of two colours, black and
white. We assume a system of only two alleles, being represented by
the black and the white beans. The total beans in the bag constitute
a gene pool. Among them assume frequency of black beans as p and
Figure 12.1 Concept of “beanbag genetics”.
mebooksfree.com
196 Human Genetics
that of white beans as q. If one draws two beans every time from this
bag, three possible combinations can be expected—2 black; 1 black,
1 white; and 2 white. Considering p and q frequencies to these beans,
the relative proportions of three combinations are as under:
p2 (2 black) 1 2pq (1 black, 1 white) 1 q2 (2 white).
CALCULATING GENE FREQUENCY
We assume a population group of 1000 persons, among which there are

individuals of the following blood groups: A group—200, AB group—500
and B group—300. These blood groups are determined by two alleles
IA and IB. With two alleles A and B at AB locus in this population of 1000
persons, the total genes in the gene pool are 1000 3 2 5 2000 genes. The
genotypes in this population will be AA—200, AB—500 and BB—300.
Total number of allele A is: (AA) 200 1 200 1 (AB) 500 5 900A. There-
fore, frequency of allele A is 900/2000 5 0.45. In the same manner, the
total number of allele B is: (BB) 300 1 300 1 (AB) 500 5 1100B and its
frequency as 1100/2000 5 0.55. Gene frequencies are expressed as frac-
tions unity i.e. 1. Assuming frequencies as p and q, p 1 q 5 1. Substituting
the values in our example, p (0.45) 1 q (0.55) 5 1. Genotype frequencies
can also be obtained with the help of the algebraic formula derived
earlier—p2 1 2pq 1 q2.
If we consider a system of two alleles M and m with frequencies
p and q, respectively, there is a possibility of genotypes, MM, Mm
and mm. The genes M and m occur with the same frequency in
sperms and ova. The frequencies of offsprings from such mating
would be p2 (MM), 2pq (Mm) and q2 (mm) (Fig. 12.2). If these
progeny were to mate with each other, the resultant would be as
depicted in Table 12.1.
If we sum up various types of offsprings:
Total of MM offsprings: p4 1 2p3q 1 p2q2 5 p2 (p2 1 2pq 1 q2)
Total of Mm offsprings: 2p3q 1 4p2q2 1 2pq3 5 2pq (p2 1 2pq 1 q2)
Total of mm offsprings: p2q2 1 2pq3 1 q4 5 q2 (p2 1 2pq 1 q2)
Eliminating the common factor (p2 1 2pq 1 q2), the proportions of
genotypes MM, Mm and mm appear to be the same, i.e., p2: 2pq: q2 as
in the previous generation. The result would be the same if we continue
to calculate for many generations. This clearly indicates that the gene
and genotype frequencies are maintained from generation to genera-
tion. With the help of this formula, one can calculate frequencies of
various genotypes if the frequency of one of the homozygote is known.
If the frequency of an autosomal trait is 1 in 10,000, i.e.
q2 5 1/10,000, q 5 1/100 and p 5 1 – 1/100 5 99/100
The frequency of carrier, i.e. 2pq 5 2 3 99/100 3 1/100 5 1/50
mebooksfree.com
Figure 12.2 Genetic combination in the two allele system of “M” and “m”.
Gene frequencies are given in parenthesis.
Table 12.1 The Frequency of Mating Types and Offspring

Offsprings
Mating type Frequency MM Mm mm
MM 3 MM p4 p4 – –
MM 3 Mm 4p3q 2p3q 2p3q –
Mm 3 Mm 4p2q2 p2q2 2p2q2 p2q2
MM 3 mm 2p2q2 – 2p2q2 –
3 3
Mm 3 mm 4pq – 2p.q 2pq3
mm 3 mm q4 – – q4
From this example, we learn that the frequency of carriers in

population is much more than affected individuals.
Factors Influencing Hardy–Weinberg’s

Equilibrium
The Hardy–Weinberg’s equilibrium holds true for large populations
with a constant rate of mutation, random mating and no migration.
Mutation
Mutation usually causes loss or change of function of a gene. The
spontaneous mutations occur with a frequency ranging from 1 in
10,000 to 10,00,000 per locus per generation. An average rate of
mebooksfree.com
198 Human Genetics
mutation is about 1 in 100,000. Mutation rate can be calculated by

the direct method for an autosomal dominant trait. However, for an
autosomal recessive or an X-linked trait, an indirect method has to
be adopted for estimation of mutation rate.
Direct Method
Let us consider an example of achondroplasia. Assume that out of
96,000 births in a hospital, 10 are achondroplastics. Two of these 10
children have affected parents, i.e. 10 – 2 5 8 are affected because
of new mutation. This means, there is one case of mutation ap-
proximately in 12,000 births. In an affected child, mutation might
have occurred in the gene from either the maternal or paternal
side. This amounts to mutation rate per gene as 1 in 24,000, i.e. 42
mutations per million genes per generation.
Mutation Rate by Indirect Method
Let us assume µ as mutation rate per gene per generation. For an
autosomal recessive trait, the formula is µ 5 F (1 – f ) and for X-
linked recessive trait, it is µ 5 1/3F(1 – f ). Here, F is the frequency
of condition and f stands for reproductive fitness. The mutation rate
is increased by a number of agents that include radiation (X-rays)
and some chemicals like mustard gas or acridine orange.
Mating patterns
Random Mating: In this, there is no preferential selection of a mate
of a particular genotype. However, this is not true in the strict sense
of the word, e.g. ABO blood group. An individual’s blood group (A
or B) would hardly influence his choice of partner but this is untrue
for other traits such as stature.
Non-random or Assortative Mating: This type of mating pattern
involves preferential selection of a genotype. Assortative mating in-
creases the proportion of homozygotes in the population. Inbreed-
ing has a similar effect in small populations often called as isolates.
Members of such a group are prevented from marrying outside the
group on cultural or religious grounds.
Random genetic drift
This involves variation in the number of children produced by indi-
viduals having different genotypes. This does not affect gene fre-
quencies in large populations; in small isolated populations, this al-
ters gene frequencies and disturbs the Hardy–Weinberg’s equilibrium.
Migration
Mass migration of people into new territories would bring them
in contact with diverse populations resulting in an exchange of
genes between two groups. This is called gene flow. For example,
mebooksfree.com
the frequency of the gene responsible for B blood group is above

25% in Asiatic countries; however as we move westward, it de-
creases. In Scandinavia, it is less than 10%. This has been ex-
plained by the migration of Mongoloids towards the west from
500 AD to 1500 AD.
EUGENICS
It is derived from Greek word meaning “good birth”. The eugenic

movement has been initiated in the early part of last century, in
Europe and United States of America. In the initial phase there
were two entities, “positive eugenics”, i.e. preferential reproduc-
tion of those deemed to genetically more fit, and “negative eugen-
ics”, i.e. preventing reproduction of those who are genetically
weak/less fit. However, with this concept of negative eugenics Nazi
Germany has written Black chapter in the human history. This re-
minds us of misuse of genetic information. Eugenics is a branch of
genetics that promotes the improvement of hereditary qualities of
a race/species.
Actually, the concept of eugenics was introduced by F Galton in
1883. It refers to establishing best characters in population by se-
lective breeding. Eugenic movement in the plant kingdom and in
animals has gathered momentum and has certainly been rewarded
in the last few decades. It has given us a high yield of food grains
and an excellent breed of animals. However, in human beings that
cannot be considered as an experimental model for numerous
reasons, eugenics cannot be effectively conceived. There are so-
cial, cultural and ethical problems challenging the human eugenic
movement. A positive role of eugenics can be thought over by fol-
lowing examples:
1. Enacting a law under which mentally retarded persons must un-
dergo compulsory sterilisation.
2. Promoting intelligence whereby Nobel laureates become donors
in sperm banks.
But there are a few problems in the eugenic movement, for example:
1. Selection of characters to be promoted in the population. It is
often difficult to decide on such issues.
2. Selective breeding essentially reduces genetic diversity.
Eugenic implications are indicated through activities carried to-
day under genetics. This includes prenatal diagnosis of a genetic
disorder. If diagnosis of a suspected disorder is made, it is followed
by termination of pregnancy thereby preventing an addition of a
handicapped individual in the population. Artificial insemination
also forms a step in eugenics.
mebooksfree.com
200 Human Genetics
TWINS
Twins are the commonest form of multiple pregnancy. They hold a

special place in genetics because of their utility in comparing effects
of genes and environment. The frequency of multiple pregnancy
found today is possibly because of the frequent usage of human go-
nadotropins in cases of ovulatory failure. Another contributing fac-
tor being in vitro fertilisation (IVF) leading to multiple pregnancy.
The incidence of twinning is around 1 in 90. If both members of a
twin pair exhibit a trait, they are said to be concordant. In disorders
of genetic aetiology, monozygotic twins show a higher degree of con-
cordance as compared to dizygotic twins. In case monozygotic twins
are not fully concordant in a particular condition, there must be
non-genetic factors playing a role in the aetiology of the condition.
Types of Twins
Twins are of two types:
1. Monozygotic
2. Dizygotic
Monozygotic twins or identical twins

They develop from a single zygote, which divides in the early embry-
onic life. Foetal membranes vary depending upon the time of twin-
ning. If division of inner cell mass occurs after formation of amniotic
cavity, i.e. after 8 days, then the monozygotic twins shall have one am-
nion (monoamniotic) and one chorion (monochorionic). If the sepa-
ration of embryonic primordium occurs before development of am-
nion, then there are two amnion, two chorion and two placentae. This
may pose difficulty in determining the twin zygosity. Since monozy-
gotic twins result from a single zygote, they are always of the same sex.
They are genetically identical and are alike in their genetic markers.
Dissimilarity between monozygotic twins for certain traits like birth
weight or size is influenced by environment, e.g. prenatal nutrition.
Dizygotic twins
Dizygotic twins account for two-thirds of twins. These twins result from
fertilisation of two ova shed at the same menstrual cycle by two separate
sperms. Genetically, they are no more than brothers and sisters born at
different times. Dizygotic twins have an average half of their genes in
common. Tendency of dizygotic twins repeats in family. With the first
twin birth, the tendency of multiple births in subsequent pregnancies
is almost five times more common than in the general population.
Determination of Twin Zygosity: Information about zygosity of a twin
pair helps in the case of a genetic disorder or in transplantation. For
mebooksfree.com
example, in maturity onset type of diabetes, concordance in monozy-

gotic twins is almost 90%. Twin zygosity can be determined by an ex-
amination of foetal membranes and placenta. Other characters such as
eye colour, finger prints also help in the determination of twin zygosity.
ABNORMAL TWINNING
Conjoined Twins
They arise from an incomplete separation of inner cell mass or em-
bryonic disc. They are classified depending upon the part of body
which is attached, e.g. thoracopagus. This indicates a union of tho-
racic regions. About 1 in 40 monozygotic twins do not separate
completely and form conjoined twins (Fig. 12.3).
Figure 12.3 Conjoined twins showing thoracopagus.
mebooksfree.com
202 Human Genetics
Chimaera
They are the individuals having cells derived from two different zy-
gotes. Chimaera can be of the following types:
1. Dizygotic twins with exchange of blood cells between the twin
members
2. Dispermic chimaera
3. Experimental chimaera (For details refer Chapter 4.)
Monozygotic Twins with Different Karyotypes

This forms another type of abnormal twinning. They possibly result
from postzygotic non-disjunction followed by twinning.
CLONING
“Dolly”, the first life created in 1997. She is the first clone. A life
blown from a single cell. She makes a proud marvel of modern
medicine. The project was engineered by a group of geneticist from
England. Scientists have deciphered a blue print of human genome;
the time is not far, when human cloning would be possible.
If at all one thinks of human clone let us know what is the after-
math. US house representatives grappled for more than 3 hours with
moral and legal aspects of human cloning before voting 265 to 162
votes to approve the “Human Cloning Prohibition Act of 2001”.
There is provision of steep criminal and civil penalties on any indi-
vidual accused under the act. Participation in human cloning in any-
way, ranging from creating cloned human cells to receiving medicine
based on such research, may bring a 10-year prison term and if done
for profit, the civil penalty may be to the tune of $1 million. A nar-
rower, competing amendment that would have allowed cloning for
research was also defeated, 249 to 178 votes. In short, the White
House has strongly backed a complete ban on human cloning.
Japanese scientists claimed in 1998 to have cloned eight calves from
the cells of a single adult cow, using the same technique that was used
by Scottish scientists to develop Dolly. They transferred the nuclei from
cells removed from a single adult animal into cow eggs from which the
nuclei were already removed. The eggs bearing the transferred cell
nuclei were grown under optimum conditions, into blastocysts. Ten
blastocysts were placed into five unrelated cows. Total eight calves were
born from these 10 blastocysts. Out of these eight, four died soon after
birth due to environmental factors, as stated by the researchers.
Dr. Mark West Husin, Texas-based livestock reproduction re-
searcher quotes that more research is required to make it cost effec-
tive. The current status of cattle cloning, where half the calves die
despite their birth under best conditions, is far from desired. The
mebooksfree.com
technique eventually will be important to the industry for its milk

and meat production. Dolly’s creators also had hundreds of failures.
Researchers reported a success rate of only 12%. This means that
there is lot of scope for improvement.
Yet another myth about cloning is that “cloning is creation of a car-
bon copy”. Do not be excited at the idea of having your duplicate. A
US research company “clonaid” puts it simply as a remake plus or mi-
nus few genes. “An identical twin is closer to your personality than a
clone”, quotes Dr. Mitradas Panicker, a researcher at National Centre
for Biological Sciences, Bangalore. It is essentially because identical
twins (monozygotic twin) are born from the same egg, while clones
originate from different eggs. Dr. Pushpa Bhargava, Founder Director
of CCMB, Hyderabad, puts little differently, “A person is a conse-
quence of his genes and environment”. This means, to create a perfect
mirror image, the cloning would involve controlled environment too.
Cloning blanks out the male role in reproduction; however, this
could lead to genetic snafus. With the menace of genetic distortions,
some scientists have objected to cloning. Cloning poses an interfer-
ence with evolutionary chain. Clones would deprive us of the evolu-
tionary uniqueness.
Proponents of cloning contend that the technology cannot be
ignored considering its use in organ transplants. Organ transplants
were thought to be sacrilegious few years ago. Pig organ transplants
are now being contemplated for human patients in UK.
The advances in genetic engineering cannot be summarily rejected
with the threat of mishap. It will take some time to get accepted as a
way of life. A drug costing $ 10,000 per gram, if genetically engineered
through animals could cost $ 1 per gram, for example, factor VIII,
which is used to treat blood disorders, is an expensive drug. The cost
of such drugs can be reduced and be brought within reach of a
common man.
Cloning could be an option for childless couple who do not wish
to use donor sperm. However, it would not be truly their child but
only a shadow of one of the parents. All the researchers in the field
are unanimous on the need to test the cloning technology very thor-
oughly in animal settings before extrapolating it for human asexual
replication. A breakthrough is no doubt exciting but should not
blind us of humanistic aspect.
Possible Use of Cloning and Stem Cells

in Curing Diseases
Heart disease
Among the common diseases, heart diseases are probably on the top.
It kills more Americans than anything else, causing 41% of all deaths.
Do not worry, now we have some “Hi-tech Solutions for Heart Ail-
ments”. There was a scientific session organised by American Heart
mebooksfree.com
204 Human Genetics
Association—latest updates on using gene therapy to help people

“grow their own heart bypasses”. This, however, remains an experi-
mental approach. It is based on a protein called Vascular Endothelial
Growth Factor (VEGF). It helps formation of new blood vessels. Pro-
duction of this protein is governed by a gene. Researchers use both the
gene and its protein product in critically ill heart disease patients who
cannot have anymore bypasses. Preliminary report has suggested that
with this approach the patients have improved, their chest pain has
reduced and these patients have returned to near normal activities.
Another promising approach has been with the help of stem cells
or master cells. Canadian scientists have tried this in animal models.
The bone marrow stem cells are used to grow into a new tissue to re-
place dead myocardium. If it works in humans, it may help numerous
people who have damaged myocardial tissue, following heart attacks.
Diabetes
Manufacturers of Dolly (sheep) have made an announcement that it is
aiming at genetic cure for diabetes—a slow silent killer. This brings a new
hope to millions of diabetic patients. It afflicts Indians and South Asians
more than white people. A project worth about 2 million dollars aims at
development of pleuripotent cells from non-human primates and live-
stock species. This may very well be of use in the management of diabetes
and other conditions like Alzheimer disease; Parkinson disease; spinal
cord injuries; burns; heart, liver and lung diseases; and cancer.
DERMATOGLYPHICS
The word dermatoglyphics means writing
on the skin. This includes ridge patterns
on the skin of palms, digits and soles. Its
application in genetics is chiefly because
of its diagnostic value. The dermato-
glyphic patterns in some genetic disor-
ders are characteristic and to some ex-
tent they also help in determining twin
zygosity. The ridge patterns on hands and
feet start developing around the 13th
week of gestation and are completed by
about the 16th week. Afterwards, these
dermal patterns remain permanent. The
scientific basis of dermatoglyphics was
laid down by Galton much earlier. It was (Used from: Karl Pearson’s
in 1961 that Cummins introduced the ‘’The Life, Letters, and Labors
term “dermatoglyphics”. of Francis Galton’’.)
mebooksfree.com
According to Galton’s system, fingerprints can be classified into

three basic patterns—arches, loops and whorls. This classification is
based on a number of triradii. Arch has no triradius, loop has one
and whorl has two triradii. Loops are further subclassified as radial
or ulnar loops. This depends upon whether the loop opens on the
radial or ulnar side of the finger.
The ridge count expresses the size of finger pattern. It is the num-
ber of ridges between triradius to the core of the pattern. The count
of an arch is “zero” because it has no triradius. The sum of ridge
counts of 10 fingers is called total ridge count. It is inherited as a
multifactorial trait.
Palmar Patterns
Herein, one has to locate four digital triradii, placed at the distal border
of the palm and the axial triradius. The axial triradius usually lies near
the proximal side of the palm but may be displaced distally in some
disorders like Down syndrome or in trisomy 13. Between digital triradii,
interdigital patterns may be seen in the form of recurving ridges. The-
nar and hypothenar patterns may also be present (Fig. 12.4A). The
axial triradial displacement indicates a possibility of an abnormal condi-
tion. The displacement of axial triradius is often expressed, either as a
fraction of total palm length or as atd angle (Fig. 12.4B). Flexion
creases, referred to as heart, head and life lines in palmistry form dur-
ing the same period as dermal ridges. About half the Down syndrome
patients show a unique feature, i.e. single transverse crease on palm,
often called simian crease (Fig. 12.5). However, this may be seen in about
1% of the normal persons. A variant type of pattern called Sydney line is
Figure 12.4 (A) The dermatoglyphic pattern of hand. Axial triradius t (t’ its
distal location). Digital triradii are a, b, c and d. (B) Measuring “atd”, angle.
If there is more than one axial triradius, the distal triradius is used.
mebooksfree.com
206 Human Genetics
Figure 12.5 Simian crease seen on both palms in a Down syndrome case.
seen in about 10% normal individuals. Sydney line represents a proxi-

mal crease of the palm, but distal crease is also present.
Plantar Patterns
There are sole patterns. They are less extensively studied as com-
pared to palm patterns. Among them, tibial arch pattern in hallucal
area is observed in 50% of Down syndrome patients.
Applications of Dermatoglyphics
1. In genetics, it is used as a supportive investigation for completing
a diagnosis.
2. It helps in the determination of twin zygosity.
3. In criminology, it is used to identify the suspected criminal.
Summary
Population Genetics deals with the study of genes, distribution of genes
and genotype in population.
Genetic Epidemiology: It deals with the distribution, aetiology and course
of some heritable diseases in population.
Hardy–Weinberg’s Law: It states that “gene frequencies” in a population
remain constant from generation to generation if no evolutionary factors (e.g.
migration, mutation, selection and drift) are operating.
Beanbag Genetics: Beans of two colours, black and white, are present in a
bag (total beans form a gene pool). If you draw two beans each time, one can
expect two black, one black and one white or two white beans. Considering
p and q as their frequencies p2 (two black) 1 2pq (one black, one white) 1 q2
(two white). This in simple words has the algebraic formula; p2 1 2pq 1 q2.
Calculating Gene Frequency: Gene frequencies are expressed as frac-
tions of unity, i.e. 1, the same can be derived with the algebraic formula
p2 1 2pq 1 q2.
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Factors influencing Hardy–Weinberg’s equilibrium are:
1. Mutation: The mutation rate can be calculated by (i) direct or (ii) indirect
method
2. Mating pattern: Random or non-random mating
3. Genetic drift
4. Migration
Eugenics: To establish best characters in population.
Twins: Monozygotic twins/identical twins and dizygotic twins
Abnormal Twining: Conjoined twins.
Chimaera: An individual having cells derived from two different zygotes, e.g.
dizygotic twins with exchange of blood cells, dispermic chimaera.
Cloning: Dolly – the first cloned sheep, in 1997.
Possible use of cloning and stem cells is in heart diseases, diabetes,
hyper-tension, spinal injuries, etc.
Dermatoglyphics: This means writing on skin. It involves study of ridge
patterns on palms, soles and digits.
Palmar patterns: Four digital triradii and axial triradius are located, an “atd”
angle is measured. Simian crease, a transverse crease on palm, is seen in
Down syndrome patients. Sydney line represents a proximal crease of palm.
Plantar patterns: A tibial arch pattern in hallucal area is seen in 50% Down
syndrome patients.
Applications: Dermatoglyphics can help in diagnosis, determination of twin
zygosity and in criminology.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What is population genetics?

2. What is Hardy–Weinberg’s law?
3. What is “eugenics”?
4. What is “dermatoglyphics”?
5. What is simian crease?
mebooksfree.com
Prenatal
13 Diagnosis
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀PCPNDT act
•฀Importance and indications for prenatal diagnosis
•฀Various procedures available for prenatal diagnosis
•฀Merits and demerits of these prenatal diagnostic procedures
(techniques)
KEY WORDS
PCPNDT act, Amniocentesis, CVS, Foetal blood sampling,

Preimplantation diagnosis
Once we realise that genetic disorders hardly have any cure, we have
to quickly think of preventive measures. With advances in diagnostic
techniques in human genetics, it is now possible to diagnose many
of the genetic disorders in utero. Prenatal diagnosis forms an integral
step in genetic counselling. In fact, for couples at risk of a disorder,
it is desirable to consider, plan and discuss prenatal diagnosis even
before pregnancy. Discussion and planning beforehand will elimi-
nate hurried procedures and emotional trauma as well.
Let us now consider the following situations that warrant prenatal
diagnosis:
1. It is essential for a genetic disorder in which treatment is either
absent or unsatisfactory.
2. Disorder in which an accurate prenatal diagnostic test is possible.
3. Risk to the pregnancy is sufficiently high.
4. The genetic disorder itself is severe enough to warrant termina-
tion of pregnancy.
5. Lastly the termination of pregnancy should be acceptable to the
concerned couple.
208
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 13 — Prenatal Diagnosis 209
In the following cases, prenatal diagnosis is a must:

1. Maternal age above 35/40 years.
2. If one of the parents is a balanced translocation carrier.
3. In case of an autosomal or X-linked recessive metabolic disorder
that is severe but detectable prenatally.
4. Couple already has one child with a neural tube defect.
Having considered the indications for prenatal diagnosis, let us
see how we should go about it. In other words, let us consider ap-
proaches to prenatal diagnosis. Of the various procedures available,
two widely used ones are described in greater detail, the rest have
been dealt with briefly:
1. Amniocentesis
2. Chorion villous biopsy
3. Ultrasonography
4. Foetoscopy
5. Foetal blood sampling
6. Maternal blood screening
7. Preimplantation diagnosis
AMNIOCENTESIS
It is one of the prenatal diagnostic procedures with wide applica-

tions. Indications for the procedure are the same as those for prena-
tal diagnosis mentioned earlier.
Time
The ideal time to undertake this investigation is between 14 and
16 weeks when a sufficient amount of amniotic fluid is available for
tapping, without harming the conceptus. This also ensures relatively
easier acceptance of termination of pregnancy with an unfavourable
outcome of amniocentesis results, around 18 weeks or so. Beyond
this time, the patient’s attitude towards termination of pregnancy
alters because the foetal movement starts.
Procedure
Under ultrasound control, placental localisation is done (Fig. 13.1).
Then under local anaesthesia, the fluid is tapped per abdomen
avoiding injury to the placenta. A clear tap, not a blood-stained one,
must be ensured. About 10–20 cc of fluid is taken out and is sub-
jected to analysis in the laboratory. The cells and fluid are separated
by centrifugation. The cells can be studied directly or subjected to
culture studies for obtaining foetal karyotype. The fluid component
mebooksfree.com
210 Human Genetics
Figure 13.1 Amniocentesis, a prenatal diagnostic technique used in second

trimester of pregnancy.
is subjected to biochemical analysis for estimation of various ingre-

dients such as a-foetoproteins (AFP). The results of the culture
study take about 2–3 weeks or may be more. The patient and/or her
relatives should be made aware of this fact.
Risk to the Pregnancy

The procedure carries 1%–1.5% risk of abortion, which is not sig-
nificantly high. However, a repeat amniocentesis increases the risk
to about 9%.
Perinatal Problems
The neonatal respiratory distress is increased almost three-folds.
There appears to be an increase in postural orthopaedic problems
such as talipes equinovarus (TEV) or congenital dislocation of hip.
This procedure may slightly increase the risk of rhesus sensitisation,
perinatal mortality and even antepartum haemorrhage.
CHORION VILLOUS BIOPSY
In this procedure, chorionic villi are aspirated with the help of

canula, which is introduced through the cervix uteri (Fig. 13.2).
mebooksfree.com
Figure 13.2 Chorion villous sampling for prenatal diagnosis in the first
trimester of pregnancy.
The procedure is done under ultrasound control. The ideal time to

perform chorion villous sampling (CVS) is 8–10 weeks period. How-
ever, it may be undertaken till almost 12 weeks.
Merits
1. As compared to amniocentesis, CVS claims an advantageous posi-
tion because it is possible at a much earlier stage of gestation and
is easily accepted by patients.
2. Faster result is possible because chorion villi contain enough cells
under mitosis so as to permit chromosome analysis without
culture.
3. If the results indicate abnormality in CVS, then termination of
pregnancy is safer and simpler in first trimester than after amnio-
centesis (around 18 weeks), which amounts to second trimester
abortion.
CVS is being accepted widely now. However, it carries a greater risk
of abortion than amniocentesis. With experienced hands, it is still a
safer procedure.
Problems of Foetal Chromosome Analysis

1. The first attempt towards culture of amniotic fluid or CVS may
fail and investigation may be required to be repeated. Another
alternative could be obtaining foetal blood sample by foetoscopy
and culturing it.
mebooksfree.com
212 Human Genetics
2. From a cytogenetic point of view, maternal cell contamination

may mislead you to diagnose a male foetus as a female one or
mosaic with 46, XY/46, XX cell lines.
3. Mosaicism observed in foetal karyotype is little difficult to inter-
pret as to whether it is true or pseudomosaicism.
Pseudomosaicism may have arisen with abnormal cell line appear-
ing as (i) an artifact during culture and (ii) a result of maternal cell
contamination. Usually, the sample is divided and multiple cultures
are set with a single sample. If all the culture vessels show mosaicism,
then it goes in favour of true mosaicism. However, if only one vessel
shows mosaicism, in all probabilities it is likely to be pseudomosa-
icism. Another possibility being that the abnormal cell line may be
from an extra embryonic tissue.
In short, while interpreting foetal chromosome analysis, all these
factors have to be considered before putting the diagnosis. In simi-
lar manner, the parents should also be made aware of these difficul-
ties in interpretation of foetal karyotype.
ULTRASONOGRAPHY
The underlying principle in this procedure is that the echoes gener-

ated by the reflection of ultrasound waves are displayed in one of
the two ways:
1. B (brightness) Mode: In this, a cross-section of the anatomy is
created as transducer is moved across an area.
2. Real Time Imaging: In this, repetitive B-mode images are gener-
ated in rapid sequence, allowing appreciation of motion.
Basically, ultrasound serves as an ancillary to amniocentesis. It is
helpful in the following ways:
1. Localisation of placenta in amniocentesis or CVS
2. To ascertain gestational age
3. Exclude multiple pregnancy
4. To recognise defects like anencephaly (Fig. 13.3), spina bifida,
microcephaly, hydrocephalous, etc.
5. Severe limb defects are also evident on ultrasound
FOETOSCOPY
The procedure involves visualisation of foetus using a fibre optic

self-illuminated instrument called foetoscope. It is inserted in the
amniotic cavity under local anaesthesia. It is usually done around
18–22 weeks of gestation. With this, one can detect limb malformations,
mebooksfree.com
Figure 13.3 Neural tube defect “anencephaly”.
facial defects (cleft lip, cleft palate, ear defects) or defects involving
the genitals.
The procedure carries a risk of abortion to the tune of 3%–5%.
Foetoscopy is useful in obtaining foetoscopic skin biopsy and foetal
blood sampling.
FOETAL BLOOD SAMPLING (FBS)
It can be done in two ways:

1. Placental aspiration (indirect tap)
2. Sampling under direct vision
In the former technique, both maternal and foetal blood cells are
mixed and need to be separated before sample processing. In the
second case, sample is obtained under direct vision using a foeto-
scope. Both techniques carry about 10% risk of abortion. There are
number of conditions in which FBS is needed to make prenatal
diagnosis. They are as follows:
1. Sickle cell disease
2. Thalassaemias
3. Haemophilia A
4. Duchenne muscular dystrophy
5. Immune deficiency disorders
However, considering the high risk of abortion, one should use the
investigation more judiciously.
mebooksfree.com
214 Human Genetics
MATERNAL SERUM SAMPLE
Estimation of AFP in maternal serum is used as a screening test for

the detection of neural tube defect (Fig. 13.3). This test is advocated
for all pregnant women, realising the fact that about 90% babies with
a neural tube defect are born to couples having no family history of
such disorder.
Maternal serum shows AFP increment during 16–18 weeks of ges-
tation. Elevated AFP in maternal serum is encountered in other
conditions, e.g. twin pregnancy and missed or threatened abortion.
Having noted elevated AFP, the patient is referred for ultrasonogra-
phy and subsequently amniocentesis.
PREIMPLANTATION DIAGNOSIS
It is a technique that is still being developed, and it offers a repro-

ductive option to a couple. It involves egg retrieval from the female
followed by in vitro fertilisation (IVF). The fertilised oocyte is
allowed to develop in vitro up to 8 cell stage. A single cell (blasto-
mere) from this group is removed, its DNA extracted and amplified
by PCR and then analysed to see if there is genetic disorder. If the
analysis does not reveal any defect, the conceptus is implanted into
the mother’s womb. In X-linked recessive traits such as Duchenne
muscular dystrophy, the preimplantation diagnosis is used to deter-
mine sex of conceptus (since only males are affected).
Demerits and Limitations

1. Despite PCR even in the best hands, procedure using single cell
meets a failure rate of 10%–20%.
2. There is a significant risk of false results because of contamina-
tion. Hence, it is safe that an adverse result of preimplantation
diagnosis should be followed by invasive prenatal diagnosis using
CVS for confirmation.
RECOMBINANT DNA
With advances in diagnostic techniques, it is now possible to use

recombinant DNA technology in prenatal diagnosis. DNA probes
are available for prenatal diagnosis of haemoglobinopathies. May be
in future recombinant DNA technology will replace other prenatal
diagnostic procedures.
mebooksfree.com
In conclusion, one can say that these techniques may be put

together under a prenatal diagnostic programme. Such programme
can be organised forming a team of geneticist, laboratory scientist
and obstetrician with proper communication among them. Such an
organised activity would serve to satisfy the needs of society. Varied
opinions are expressed on the issue of termination of pregnancy
with legal as well as social implications. They need to be assessed
fully before one advises for MTP.
Summary
Prenatal Diagnosis forms an integral step in genetic counselling. In
Maharashtra, it is governed by PCPNDT Act to prevent malpractices.
Indications:
1. The genetic disorder that has no satisfactory treatment.
2. Disorder that can be diagnosed accurately in prenatal stage.
3. Pregnancy at high risk (considering pedigree).
4. Severe disorder warranting termination of pregnancy.
Prenatal diagnosis is MUST in:
1. Maternal age above 35 years.
2. One of the parent is translocation carrier.
3. Couple already has a child with disorder.
Prenatal diagnostic tests are:
1. Amniocentesis: Time 14–16 weeks of gestation. 10–20 cc clear amber-
coloured amniotic fluid is withdrawn with aseptic precautions under ultra-
sound control. The fluid is centrifuged to separate cells, which are cultured
to study chromosomes, and is subjected to biochemical analysis. Risk to
pregnancy is 1%–5%. Perinatal problems (e.g. respiratory distress or TEV,
CDH, Rh sensitisation) may follow.
2. Chorion villous biopsy: Few chorionic villi are aspirated under vacuum
pressure through canula passed up the cervix with ultrasound control.
The villi are washed and the cells are subjected to karyotyping. It is done
around 8–10 weeks. So termination of pregnancy, if required, is relatively
safe and easy.
3. Ultrasonography: It is almost routine in obstetric practice. It helps to
monitor growth of the foetus, detection of anomalies, if any, to localise
placenta in CVS or amniocentesis.
4. Foetoscopy: Using foetoscope one can visualise foetus. Done around
18–22 weeks. Detection of malformations, if any, can be done.
5. Foetal blood sampling: By placental aspiration or by direct method,
foetal blood sample is drawn and karyotyping as well as DNA analysis of
it is done for detection of diseases like DMD, sickle cell disease, haemo-
philia, etc.
6. Maternal serum sample: Estimation of AFP helps detection of neural
tube defects. It is done around 16–18 weeks.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
216 Human Genetics
Summary—cont’d
7. Preimplantation diagnosis: Involves IVF; at 8 cell stage, a single cell
(blastomere) is removed. Its DNA is extracted and analysed for detection
of genetic disorder.
8. Recombinant DNA: DNA probes for prenatal diagnosis of haemoglobin-
opathies are now available.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. When is the prenatal diagnosis warranted?
2. What is amniocentesis?
3. When is amniocentesis done and why particularly during that period?
4. What is the risk to the pregnancy after amniocentesis?
5. What are possible perinatal problems after amniocentesis?
6. What are the advantages of CVS over amniocentesis?
7. What are common problems of foetal chromosome analysis?
mebooksfree.com
Genetic
Counselling 14
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀Define genetic counselling
•฀ Understand and follow the steps in the process of genetic counselling
•฀Calculate recurrence risk of the genetic disorder
KEY WORDS
Laws of addition and multiplication, Binomial distribution, Bayes’

theorem, Screening programmes
Genetic counselling is defined as a process in which patients or their

relatives at the risk of a genetic disorder are made aware of the con-
sequences of the disorder, its transmission and the ways by which
this can be prevented or mitigated. Genetic counselling includes the
following steps:
1. “Accurate” diagnosis of disorder.
2. Advising the patient and/or the family members with survey of
relatives with similar complaints for disease confirmation or in
otherwise normal relatives for carrier detection.
3. Management of the disorder, either curative (if possible) or sup-
portive.
To complete accurate diagnosis, the following procedure should be
followed:
1. History
2. Pedigree analysis
3. Estimation of risk
4. Transmitting information
5. Management
217
mebooksfree.com
218 Human Genetics
HISTORY
A proper record of the history of patients is necessary:

1. This includes both present and relevant past history.
2. Family history includes sibs and other relatives also. Kindly note,
if there is any other person in the family with a similar problem.
3. Obstetric history of the mother includes exposure to teratogens
(drugs, X-rays) in pregnancy. History of abortion or stillbirth, if
any, should be recorded.
4. Enquiry should be made about consanguinity, as it increases the
risk especially in autosomal recessive disorders.
PEDIGREE CHARTING
At a glance, this offers the state of a disorder in a family in concise man-

ner. Constructing a pedigree with proper interrogation, though time-
consuming, is ultimately rewarding. It forms an indispensable step to-
wards counselling. Table 6.1 shows symbols used in pedigree charting.
ESTIMATION OF RISK
It forms one of the most important aspects of genetic counselling. It

is often called recurrence risk. To estimate it, one requires to take
into account the following points:
1. Mode of inheritance
2. Analysis of pedigree/family tree
3. Results of various tests such as linkage studies
In order to estimate risk, one has to work out the probability. The
probability of an outcome is defined as the number or more pre-
cisely the proportion of times it occurs in a large series of events.
Routinely, the probability is indicated as a proportion/fraction of
one. Probability 0.25 or ¼ indicates that on average, the event will
be observed on 1 in 4 or 25% of occasions.
Theory of Probability, and Laws of Addition

and Multiplication
Law of addition
While considering the probability of two different events, it is essen-
tial to know whether they are mutually exclusive or independent.
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 14 — Genetic Counselling 219
If the events are mutually exclusive, then the probability that either
one or the other will occur equals the sum of their individual prob-
abilities. This is called the law of addition.
Law of multiplication
It states that if the two events are independent, then the probability
that both the first and second event will occur equals the product of
their individual probabilities.
For example, consider outcome of the first pregnancy. The proba-
1 1
bility that the baby will be either a boy or a girl equals 1, i.e. 1 .
2 2
On ultrasonography, it is revealed that the mother is carrying dizy-
gotic twins. Now the probability that both the first and second twin
1 1 1
will be boys equals 1 5 .
2 2 4
Binomial Distribution
The concept of binomial distribution was used in genetics for the
first time by Jacob Bernoulli, 17th century mathematician, though
originally the binomial theory was discovered by Sir Isaac Newton in
1676.
Assume that the problem to be solved is the distribution of boys
and girls in two successive births. If the probability of a boy is 1 and
1 2
the probability of a girl is , then the distribution of families with
2
two boys, one boy or no boys in all the two child families is given by
2
(2 2) 1
the expansion of 1 1 1 . Instead of if we assume the frequency
2
one event (having boy) is p; the other probability q 5 1 – p. The
expansion of the binomial (p 1 q)2 gives different possible combina-
tions, i.e.
For two child families,
1
(p 1 q )2 5 p 2 1 2pq 1 q 2 and p 5 q 5
2
2
p 2 5 families with 2 boys 5 ()1
2
1
4
5
1
2pq 5 family with 1 boy and 1 girl 5
2
2
q 2 5 family with 2 girls 5 ( 12 ) 5
1
4
mebooksfree.com
220 Human Genetics
Likewise, for the families with three children:

(p 1 q )3 5 p 3 1 3p 2 q 1 3pq 2 1 q 3
3
p 3 5 families with 3 boys 5 ( 12 ) 5 18
3
5 family with 3 girls 5 ( ) 5
1 1
q3
2 8
2
3p 2 q 5 family with 2 boys and 1 girl 5 3 ( 12 ) ( 12 ) 5 38
2
5 family with 1 boy and 2 girls 5 3 ( ) ( ) 5
1 1 3
3pq 2
2 2 8
The advantage of binomial expansion is that it includes all the

possible combinations of the two events. For example, in a family of
three children there are in all eight probabilities of sequences as
under:
B5Boy; G5Girl
BBB GBB
BBG GBG
BGB GGB
BGG GGG
The probability of each sequence works out to be 1/8. The family

with two sons and one daughter, the daughter might be born first,
second or last. Meaning there are three possible sequences that ac-
count for total 3/8 probability of having two sons and a daughter.
Bayes’ Theorem/Bayesian Analysis

First published in 1763, Bayes’ theorem offers a method of assess-
ment of the relative probability of each of the two alternatives. Let
us consider, how it works in estimation of risk in an X-linked lethal
disease, e.g. Duchenne muscular dystrophy (Fig. 14.1).
In this pedigree II3 is the daughter of an obligate carrier of DMD
1
gene. The prior probability that she is a carrier is and prior prob-
1 2
ability that she is not a carrier is . She/II3 has three normal sons.
2
If she is a carrier, the conditional probability that all three sons
1 1 1 1
would be normal is 3 3 5 ; if she is not a carrier, the condi-
2 2 2 8
tional probability that all the three sons would be normal is 1 (very
close to 1, because she may have a new mutant son) (Table 14.1).
mebooksfree.com
Figure 14.1 Pedigree of an X-linked recessive trait.
Table 14.1 Bayesian Calculations from Figure 14.1
II3 is a Carrier II3 is not a Carrier

Prior probability 1/2 1/2
Conditional probability 1/8 1
Joint probability 1/16 1/2
Posterior probability 1/9 8/9
Now let us consider the joint probability, which is the product of

the prior and the conditional probabilities. The joint probability
1 1 1
that she is a carrier is
3 5 . The joint probability that she is
2 8 16
1 1
not a carrier is 31 5 .
2 2
The posterior probability that she is a carrier is
1 / 16 1 Joint probability that she is a carrier

5 ;
9 Joint probability as carriier 1 Joint probability as non-carrier
()
(1 / 16 ) 1 12
5 Posterior probability
The posterior probability that she is not a carrier is 8/9.

Now applying the posterior probability that II3 is a carrier, the risk
that her next child will be affected male is 1/9 3 1/4 5 1/36. This
is remarkably below the prior probability of 1/8 if we do not con-
sider/know about her children.
Autosomal recessive trait
Let us consider autosomal recessive trait, cystic fibrosis. Its pedigree
is shown in Fig. 14.2.
mebooksfree.com
222 Human Genetics
Figure 14.2 Pedigree of an autosomal recessive trait.
Table 14.2 Bayesian Calculation from Figure 14.2
Probability Both are Carriers Both are not Carriers

Prior probability 4/9 5/9
Conditional probability with (3/4)3 1

three normal children
Joint probability 3/16 5 0.19 5/9 5 0.56
Relative probability 0.19/0.75 5 0.25 0.56/0.75 5 0.75
As per Figure 14.2, II2 and II3 each have an affected sib. This
means:
Probability II2 is a carrier 5 2/3, probability II3 is a carrier 5 2/3.
Probability both are carriers 5 2/3 3 2/3 5 4/9. Therefore,
the probability that next child will be affected is 1/4 3 1/4 5 1/16;
much below the originally expected risk of 1/4 3 4/9 5 1/9
(Table 14.2).
TRANSMITTING INFORMATION
After completing the diagnosis, pedigree charting and estimation of

risk, the next most important step is of communicating this informa-
tion to the consultants. This important function involves various
factors. These factors are often not taken seriously, but are of crucial
importance in genetic counselling. These are as follows:
1. Psychology of the patient;
2. Emotional stress under prevailing circumstances;
3. Attitude of family members towards the patient;
4. Educational, social and financial background of the family members;
mebooksfree.com
5. Gaining confidence of consultants in subsequent meetings dur-

ing follow-up;
6. Ethical, moral and legal implications involved in the process;
7. Above all, communication skills to transmit facts in an effective
manner, i.e. making them more acceptable and palatable.
Now, the role of a genetic counsellor is to render help to consul-
tants enabling them to take decisions. Should this be a directive?
It is difficult to comment on this issue. In strict sense, “counselling”
cannot/should not lead to directive advice. Also difficulty is encoun-
tered in making the relatives aware of the probabilities that are of-
ten complicated in certain situations. These are not well-understood
by the people counselled.
MANAGEMENT
In genetics, “treatment” implies a very limited scope. It naturally

aims for prevention rather than cure. In fact for most of the genetic
disorders, cure is unknown. Treatment is therefore directed towards
minimising the damage by early detection and preventing further
irreversible damage, for example, in PKU. This disorder is charac-
terised by a deficiency of phenylalanine hydroxylase enzyme, which
is necessary for the conversion of phenylalanine to tyrosine. PKU, if
not detected early, may lead to mental retardation owing to the in-
volvement of nervous system at a later stage. The ideal situation
would be early detection of the disease followed by preventive mea-
sures, like giving the patient a diet free from phenylalanine and thus
preventing damage to the nervous system.
In some other situations, the defective gene proves to be so in
certain environment. This implies that the changes in environment
shall mitigate gene expression. Here also, an ideal way would be to
replace the defective gene by a normal one, but this is left for the
future; maybe in years to come such replacements become a reality.
PREVENTIVE ASPECTS
In the present situation, the aim of a geneticist is chiefly to prevent

genetic defect. This means that prenatal diagnosis of a disorder
should be made and the pregnancy (with abnormal foetus) be ter-
minated. Termination of pregnancy should, however, be acceptable
to the couple seeking advice. With this background let us try to work
out various possibilities in some of the genetic problems:
1. Problem of infertility or inability to get a normal child. The cou-
ple has two alternatives. Either they can think of adoption, in
mebooksfree.com
224 Human Genetics
which case pre-adoption counselling is important. In such chil-

dren, a careful clinical examination of the child is done to rule
out the possibility of a genetic disorder, since the parental/family
background of the child is unknown.
2. Another alternative for such couple would be to go in for an
artificial insemination donor (AID). This is appropriate if the
father has or is at the risk of an autosomal dominant trait. It is
also advisable when both partners are carriers of an autosomal
recessive disorder. However, AID is not indicated, if mother has
an autosomal dominant or X-linked disorder.
3. Analysis of a given case may be achieved through genetic tests
such as chromosome analysis or with the help of various bio-
chemical carrier detection tests. The test results, if negative, shall
reassure the consultants that they are not at risk of the disorder.
However, in a given situation, after making prenatal diagnosis or
by working out the probabilities one can offer the information to
the parents. Ultimately, the decision regarding termination of
pregnancy has to be made by the couple.
FOLLOW-UP IN GENETIC CLINICS
Although follow-up is essential in all the branches under the faculty

of medicine, it is all more important for patients attending genetic
clinics. So, it is desirable to arrange more follow-up interviews. This
will make sure that consultants understand and remember the infor-
mation passed on to them. In some families with genetic disorders,
repeated follow-up visits to the genetic clinic become essential. These
visits are aimed at preventing the disease in any other family member
by a reproductive planning, prenatal diagnosis followed by termina-
tion of pregnancy, if necessary. For the family member with the ge-
netic disorder, acceptance of the disease, treatment if possible and
counselling towards a more palatable way to lead life may be sug-
gested. For example, take a family with Down syndrome (21 trisomy).
The couple should first accept this defect in their child. They should
then be made aware of and referred to a school for mentally re-
tarded children where the child can be trained properly. Simultane-
ously, the couple can be informed about the possibilities of prenatal
detection of this disorder as well as carrier detection (translocation
carrier) in parents. This will prevent another Down baby in family.
GENETIC SCREENING
It was unknown earlier, but now it forms a part of the public health
programme. The aim of such screening programmes was to identify
mebooksfree.com
newborns with genetic disorders so that early detection and treat-

ment of the disease could be undertaken.
SCREENING PROGRAMMES
The criteria for these programmes will be as follows:
1. The disorder should be clearly defined.

2. It should have a reasonable frequency in the population con-
cerned warranting screening.
3. Disorder should be preferably treatable.
4. The screening test should be less time consuming.
5. The test should be relatively inexpensive so that it can be applied
on a large scale.
6. The test should be reliable, i.e. ideally it should have minimal
false positive and no false negative results.
With these prerequisites, screening programmes can be organ-

ised for newborns or for pregnant women. In the latter, maternal
serum can be screened for neural tube defects estimating alpha-
foetoproteins. Higher values of alpha-foetoproteins signify a neural
tube defect, while unusually low values indicate foetus with Down
syndrome.
LEGAL IMPLICATIONS
Several malpractice suits have emerged in recent years against

physicians considered negligent. A short but true story regarding
one such case would duly stress the emphasis on the reader’s
mind. It is regarding a genetic disorder called Tay–Sachs disease.
In this condition, there is a deficiency of enzyme hexosaminidase
A. The condition manifests in the form of idiocy, mental retarda-
tion and progressive blindness. This disorder is relatively fre-
quent in Ashkenazi Jews. One such Jew couple got tested for
Tay–Sachs disease. They were informed that both of them were
non-carriers of Tay–Sachs disease. Subsequently, the couple gave
birth to a baby. This baby had Tay–Sachs disease. The matter was
taken to the court. The court declared this child’s birth as
“wrongful life”.
In conclusion, one can say that genetic counselling is perhaps the
most important part of genetics where genetic knowledge is applied
to the improvement of human health. This is achieved through cur-
rently available sophisticated techniques of prenatal diagnosis and
various screening programmes.
mebooksfree.com
226 Human Genetics
Ethical and Legal Issues in Genetics

A sizeable budgetary provision was made in Human Genome Project
to deal with ethical and legal issues involved. The areas under focus
being genetic testing, gene therapy, stem cell research and embry-
onic cells. The advances in prenatal diagnostic techniques, sonogra-
phy, amniocentesis, chorion villous sampling, foetal blood sampling,
preimplantation diagnosis has led to more precise prenatal diagnosis
with option of termination of pregnancy with untoward outcome of
the tests. In this ethical issue being woman’s right to terminate preg-
nancy. The issue took an new dimension in 1990, i.e. person with
disabilities may not be properly accepted by the society and hence
prenatal diagnosis may lead to selective termination of pregnancy. In
the same manner withdrawal of support to newborn with severe mal-
formation, e.g. trisomy 13 or extensive neural tube defect. In this the
main principal should be to help the parents to take guided decision
giving the information, i.e. counselling (not a directive advice).
Ethical concerns have also been about genetic testing of carrier
detection and presymptomatic testing. A genetic test performed on
one individual (an index case) may reveal, risk information of his
relative who may not wish to know about it. For example, testing an
index case in autosomal dominant trait may indicate that one of the
parents has transmitted the abnormal gene. The genetic risk is often
wrongly perceived as unchangeable. This leads to unfair stigmatiza-
tion of individual and his family.
Involvement of non-genetic factors in causation of disease also
should be explained to patient and relatives. As is true in medical
practice all the medical information should be confidential respect-
ing the privacy of concerned individual and family.
In recent past preimplantation diagnosis has been the focus of
ethical debate, since this may also reveal sex of the conceptus. It is
true that earlier it was used to prevent implantation of male embryo
possessing X-linked recessive trait. Equally true is the fact that this
may also lead to sex selection which is inappropriate. Surprisingly
preimplantation diagnosis can also be used to select embryo carry-
ing disease causing mutation. A case was reported in United King-
dom in which deaf parents deliberately conceived a deaf child by
artificial insemination (an autosomal recessive trait). An embryo
homozygous for mutation causing an autosomal recessive deafness
was selected. This certainly puts the interest of parents and of the
child in conflict. In yet another case preimplantation diagnosis
done to select HLA (human leukocyte antigen) matched embryo
that could later provide bone marrow cells for its older sibling suf-
fering from Fanconi anaemia. In all these cases the individuals may
feel their life being devalued.
Genetic testing in childhood has also been questioned. If the test-
ing is diagnostic and intervention is possible for example, children
mebooksfree.com
at the risk of inheriting mutation causing adenomatous polyposis

coli gene (APC gene). In these children (gene carriers) colonos-
copy should begin by 12 years of age as it is life saving. A contrasting
situation exists in Huntington disease. The detection through child-
hood screening doesn’t have any preventive or therapeutic advan-
tage rather it increases anxiety and stigmatization. Therefore, the
childhood genetic testing should be avoided unless there is clear
clinical benefit through intervention is possible.
One of the most controversial and debatable ethical as well as le-
gal issue has been “cloning” and “stem cell research”. It is pertinent
to note that reproductive cloning and therapeutic cloning are dif-
ferent, the former, i.e. reproductive cloning has been successful in
mammals, however practicing it in humans is unanimously opposed
by the entire scientific community. Equally true is the fact that
therapeutic cloning has an application in “stem cell transplant” and
can be useful in treating blindness and cancer.
Summary
Genetic Counselling: Process by which patients and their relatives are
made aware of the consequences of a genetic disorder, its transmission and
the ways to prevent/mitigate it.
Steps involved in genetic counselling
i) Accurate diagnosis: It involves (a) history—past, present, obstetrics
history, family history; (b) pedigree; (c) investigations—pathological, hor-
monal and imaging.
ii) Survey of relatives: With similar condition, recurrence risk estimation.
iii) Management of the disease.
Estimation of risk: (i) Law of addition; (ii) law of multiplication;
(iii) binominal distribution introduced by Jacob Bernoulli in 17th century,
which is based on binominal theory discovered by Sir Isaac Newton in 1676;
(iv) Bayes’ theorem/Bayesian analysis: It is a method of assessment of
relative probability of each of the two alternatives. It takes into consideration
the a) prior probability, b) conditional probability, c) joint probability and
d) posterior probability.
Transmitting Information: Factors to be considered are (i) Psychology of
the patient; (ii) Emotional stress; (iii) Attitude of family towards patient;
(iv) Educational, social and financial background of the family members;
(v) Gaining confidence of the patient and relatives; (vi) Ethical, moral and
legal implications of the process; and (vii) Communication skills of the coun-
sellor.
Management: Early detection and interaction is the key.
Preventive Aspects: Prenatal diagnosis and subsequent termination of preg-
nancy, if essential.
Follow-up: It is crucial in genetic clinics. This helps in preventing recurrence
in the next generation through prenatal screening and reproductive planning.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
228 Human Genetics
Summary—cont’d
Screening Programmes: Criteria to design programmes are—
1. Clearly defined disorder
2. Reasonable frequency in population
3. Disorder has treatment
4. Programme designed should be less time consuming
5. Cost effective and reliable
Legal aspects and ethical issues should be dealt carefully.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What is genetic counselling?
2. What are the steps involved in genetic counselling?
mebooksfree.com
Gene Therapy 15
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀What฀is฀gene฀therapy?
•฀How฀gene฀delivery฀is฀done฀with฀various฀methods
•฀Advantages฀and฀disadvantages฀of฀these฀systems.
KEY WORDS
Gene฀transfer฀techniques,฀Retroviral฀vectors,฀Candidate฀disease,฀฀
Target฀tissues
Gene therapy involves replacement of a defective/abnormal gene

into the cells of a patient who is deficient of the normal gene product.
The technical basis of gene therapy is gene delivery, i.e. introducing
the desired gene into the appropriate cells of the patient. The current
wave of gene therapy research has gathered momentum because
highly effective gene delivery systems have been developed, in par-
ticular those based on the use of retroviral vectors.
GOVERNING BODIES
In many countries, there are regulatory bodies to observe the tech-

nical, therapeutic and safety aspects of gene therapy. In the United
States, National Institute of Health (NIH) has laid down guidelines
for clinical trials of human gene therapy. Unless the protocol is ap-
proved by Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Recombinant
DNA Advisory Committee (RAC), it cannot be undertaken. In the
United Kingdom, the Committee on the Ethics of Gene Therapy,
has recommended that all the gene therapy protocols must be
approved by the hospital research ethical committees.
229
mebooksfree.com
It has been universally accepted that “germ line gene therapy”

should not be instituted. This implies that all the gene therapy pro-
tocols must focus only on the “somatic cells gene therapy”.
GENE DELIVERY
Gene therapy requires introduction of foreign DNA sequences with

stable integration, gene expression and an appropriate regulation
in the target tissue. The newly introduced gene can replace a miss-
ing gene. There are two strategies used to deliver genes—(i ) ex vivo
and (ii ) in vivo transfer. In ex vivo transfer, cells are removed from
the patient, an appropriate gene (DNA sequences) is introduced
in these cells and then these genetically engineered cells are
transplanted back into the patient’s body. In in vivo approach, the
desired gene is directly introduced into the target tissue.
GENE TRANSFER TECHNIQUES
Transfer of gene can be accomplished by following methods:

(i ) physical or (ii ) biological (viral vectors).
Physical Transfection Methods

These include:
(a) Liposome-mediated DNA transfer
(b) Receptor-mediated endocytosis
Liposome-mediated DNA transfer
It involves complexing plasmid DNA (with foreign DNA) with lipo-
somes and introducing it into the target cell (Fig. 15.1 ).
Figure 15.1 Liposome-mediated gene therapy.
Scan to Play Gene therapy
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 15 —฀Gene฀Therapy 231
Advantages: Using this technique, one can introduce larger

amount of DNA into the target cells than what is possible with
viral vector systems. This can be as large as an artificially constructed
minichromosome, which includes elements for regulation of gene
expression apart from the particular structural gene. These
elements regulate gene expression in physiologically controlled
manner.
Disadvantage: The gene expression is transient, therefore, the
treatment has to be repeated.
Receptor-mediated endocytosis
In this method, a complex is made between plasmid DNA contain-
ing foreign DNA and specific polypeptide ligands for which the
cell has receptor. The DNA is targeted to these receptors. For ex-
ample, DNA is complexed to a glycoprotein containing galactose.
This will be recognised by the receptors on liver cells, which are
specific to glycoproteins with a terminal galactose. This causes
internalisation of the complex by endocytosis. The endocytic vesi-
cles fuse with lysosomes, and here complex is degraded and for-
eign gene escapes from the lysosome, to be expressed. The rate
at which it (foreign DNA) escapes from the lysosomes can be
increased by inclusion of adenovirus or fusogenic influenza gene
products.
Major advantage of the physical transfection method being that
they are free from the risk of viruses. Liposome-mediated gene
therapy is being actively tested on cystic fibrosis patients in UK and
USA.
Viral Vectors (Biological Transfection Method)

In biological transfection methods, viral vectors form an efficient
mode of gene delivery into the target cells (Fig. 15.2). Various
viruses used include retroviruses, adenoviruses, herpes virus, adeno-
associated virus, parvovirus etc. The viruses are rendered replication
deficient by removing encapsidation (c, psi) gene sequences.
Retroviruses
They are derived from the family of viruses that includes human
immunodeficiency virus and oncogenic viruses capable of doing
so in some species. The retroviruses are rendered incapable
of replication by removing encapsidation sequences, which are
essential for viral replication. Retroviruses integrate into the host
DNA and make copy of their genome using reverse transcriptase
enzyme. The provirus thus formed serves as a template for pro-
duction of mRNAs for various viral gene products as well as the
new genomic RNA of the virus. The retroviruses used in gene
mebooksfree.com
Figure 15.2 Retroviral gene therapy using bone marrow cells.
therapy need a couple of elements—(i ) packaging cell line and

(ii ) helper virus.
1. Packaging cell line: It is the cell line that has been infected with
the retrovirus that is genetically engineered to lack region of
proviral DNA called packaging sequence.
2. Helper virus/vector: It consists of a retroviral provirus with its
more than 90% of viral genomic material removed, leaving only
minimal sequences essential to produce copies of the viral RNA
along with the sequences necessary for packaging of the viral
genomic RNA. This is a vector backbone in which foreign gene
(DNA sequence) can be inserted. If this helper virus is intro-
duced into the packaging cell line that contains provirus in which
packaging sequences are missing, then RNA produced by the vec-
tor provirus can be packaged into viruses. These virions can be
used to infect or more precisely called transduce the target cells.
Disadvantages: Demerits of retroviruses as vectors in gene therapy
are as follows:
1. Only smaller DNA sequences (less than 7 kb usually) can be in-
troduced, e.g. even if all introns were removed from the dystro-
phin gene to be used in gene therapy in case of Duchenne mus-
cular dystrophy, still the gene would be large enough to be
incorporated into the retroviral vector. To make it possible, large
mebooksfree.com
amount of sequences are deleted, still retaining relatively normal

function. This is called mini dystrophin gene.
2. Retroviral vector can transduce only dividing cells and hence
central nervous system disorders are not amenable to it.
3. The retroviruses can only be used in vitro.
4. Another demerit of retroviruses is that they are unstable.
5. They cannot be purified for use in gene therapy without reducing
their capability to transduce target cells. This means contamination
with the replication competent retroviruses is inevitable. They
could serve as an oncogene, causing malignant transformation.
6. Controlling the levels of expression of the introduced gene is yet
another difficult task.
Retroviral gene transfer can be effectively used in case of hepatocytes,
haemopoietic stem cells (HSCs), fibroblasts myoblasts, endothelial
cell etc.
Adenoviruses
These are also used as vectors in gene therapy, especially in non-
dividing cells, e.g. central nervous system cells.
Advantages:
1. These are stable.
2. Easily purified.
3. Suitable for targeted treatment of specific tissues, e.g. respiratory
tract.
4. These can infect/transduce non-dividing cells.
5. These can carry larger DNA segments as big as 36 kb long.
Disadvantages:
1. They do not integrate into the host genome, therefore, expression
of the introduced gene is unstable.
2. The gene expression is often transient.
3. By virtue of their infectivity, they can produce adverse effects
secondary to infection.
4. Adenoviruses contain genes that can cause malignant transfor-
mation; hence, their use as vectors carries a menace of inducing
malignancy.
Herpes virus
Herpes viruses are neurotropic viruses, which on suitable modifica-
tion can be effectively used for gene therapy in central nervous sys-
tem disorders.
Advantages: Herpes virus has a natural affinity for non-dividing
cells and hence it is suitable for transfection of neurons. It can also
be used in hepatocytes.
mebooksfree.com
Disadvantages: These are as follows:

1. An immediate disadvantage of using herpes viruses as vectors is
because of their toxic effects on the nerve cells and the following
immune response.
2. Since herpes viruses do not integrate into the host genome, the
expression of the introduced gene may be unstable.
Parvovirus and simian virus 40 are being considered for gene
therapy in central nervous system and smooth muscle cells, respec-
tively. Studies undertaken on adeno-associated virus (AAV) have
revealed following merits, i.e. (i ) they form a stable preparation,
(ii ) lack pathogenicity, and (iii ) have high efficiency of integra-
tion. Disadvantages of AAV as vectors include possibility of immune
response.
Target Tissues
Insertion of a normal gene into the diseased tissue depends upon
proliferative state of the tissue, an accessibility to gene manipula-
tions and normal site of gene expression.
Liver: Hepatocytes are refractory to retrovirus in vivo; they are, how-

ever, more susceptible to transduction by retrovirus in vitro. Liver
forms a suitable target organ owing to its rich vascularity. Hepatocytes
are removed after partial hepatectomy. They are grown in culture,
transduced with desired gene through retroviral vector and then
returned via hepatic artery or portal venous system. However, there is
risk of portal venous thrombosis that can lead to portal hypertension.
This approach has been used for patients with familial hypercholes-
terolaemia caused by missense mutation of low density lipoprotein
receptor gene (LDLR). This leads to reduction of LDL levels for
a short term; the long-term benefit is still awaited. Other disorders
involving liver in which similar approach could be considered are
haemophilia A, a1-antitrypsin deficiency and phenyl-ketonuria.
Muscle: Direct injection of foreign DNA into the muscle has met with
reasonable success in terms of retention and expression of the foreign
gene. As an alternative, myoblasts can be injected into the muscle. This
results in their incorporation into the recipient muscle fascicles. This
approach can be used in vitro to insert genes into the myoblasts that
are totally unrelated to the muscle function. For example, factor VIII
and human growth hormone.
CNS: Vector systems are being developed for CNS disorders. They
consist of replication of defective neurotropic adenoviruses lacking
El region. They are then made infective by growing them in the cells
engineered to express El genes. Alternatively, one can transplant
mebooksfree.com
cells that have been genetically modified in vitro into specific

regions of the brain, like caudate nucleus in Huntington disease.
Bone Marrow: Treatment of bone marrow disorders poses a prob-

lem because of the low frequency of stem cells. HSCs form an ideal
target for gene therapy. However, currently many gene therapy
efforts are aimed at more differentiated haemopoietic cells such as
lymphocytes. Harvesting and inserting gene directly into the stem
cells is possible using monoclonal antibodies that recognise cell
surface marker CD34. For ADA-deficiency SCID, lymphocytes are
isolated from blood, grown under conditions promoting growth of
T-lymphocytes (culture medium containing antibody to T-receptor
and T-cell growth factor IL-2). ADA gene is introduced in T-cells
using retroviral vector. Other target tissues include fibroblasts, en-
dothelial cells, airways epithelial cells, glial cells, etc.
DISEASES AMENABLE TO GENE THERAPY
Diseases in which gene therapy can be conceived include both ge-

netic and non-genetic diseases. They satisfy the following criteria:
Prerequisites of Candidate Disease

1. The candidate disease should be genetically recessive.
2. The defective gene is identified and cloned.
3. Precise regulation of the gene product is not required.
4. The cells bearing corrected/desired gene should have selective
advantage over uncorrected cells.
Some shortcomings in selecting candidate disease for gene therapy
include following difficulties: (i ) disorders involving complex gene
regulation and (ii ) diseases in relatively inaccessible tissues like
CNS. The gene therapy in such situations (CNS) has to be instituted
before irreversible damage occurs.
Cancer
Gene therapy for cancer involves the introduction of tumour sup-
pressor gene or inactivating an oncogene or use of immune cells
and so on. Potential strategies for gene therapy in the cancer treat-
ment are as under:
1. Tumour suppressor gene: Inserting a wild type tumour suppressor
gene, e.g. p53 or the gene involved in Wilms tumour.
2. Blocking oncogene: Blocking expression of an oncogene, e.g. by
introducing the gene that encodes anti-sense K-RAS message.
mebooksfree.com
3. Suicide gene: Insertion of a sensitivity or suicide gene into the

tumour, e.g. introducing gene that encodes thymidine kinase
gene of herpes simplex virus (HSVTK).
4. Promoting immunogenicity of tumour: This is achieved by intro-
ducing genes that encode foreign antigens.
5. Use of genes for cytokines: Enhancing immune cells to increase
anti-tumour activity by inducing genes that encode cytokines.
6. Protecting stem cells from the toxic effects of chemotherapy
by introducing the gene that confers MDR-1 (multiple drug
resistance-1).
Peripheral Vascular Disease

In persons with peripheral vascular disease, the arterial segments or the
vascular grafts could be resurfaced by endothelial cells or smooth
muscle cells in which anti-clotting agent genes have been incorporated.
Coronary Artery Disease

In persons having family history of an early coronary artery dis-
ease, gene therapy could be used to introduce LDL receptor.
A particularly important area under investigation is the prevention
of reocclusion after angioplasty. One approach involves use of mu-
tant forms of tissue type plasminogen activator (TPA) having
thrombolytic effect. This can be delivered by adenovirus to the
specific tissue and can quickly lyse a clot. The other alternative be-
ing modifying endothelial cells so that they can secrete TPA. These
genetically engineered endothelial cells can be implanted in the
graft to prevent clotting. Preventing smooth muscle proliferation
through genes may also be rewarding because it is supposed to be
the principle cause of reocclusion.
Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS)

Gene therapy for AIDS includes transducing or transplanting toti-
potent haemopoietic stem cells (THSCs). Inhibiting viral replica-
tion forms an alternative approach.
The first human gene therapy was instituted on September 14, 1990.
A 4-year-old girl suffering from adenosine-deaminase (ADA)-deficiency
SCID was given transfusion of her own peripheral blood T-lymphocytes
that had been transduced ex vivo using retroviral-mediated gene trans-
fer with the normal human ADA gene. She received 11 transfusions
over the next 2 years, resulting in her intracellular ADA concentration
to rise from an undetectable state to about 20%–30% of the normal
value. Her T-lymphocyte count was also elevated to almost normal
value. She subsequently showed an average infection rate.
mebooksfree.com
Second ADA-deficient SCID patient receiving gene therapy was

a 9-year-old patient with his treatment initiated in January 1991.
Similar laboratory findings and clinical improvement was observed
in this patient as was found in the first ADA-deficiency case.
Familial hypercholesterolaemia, a trait resulting from a defect in
LDL receptor gene, leads to ischaemic heart disease in these individu-
als. Here, hepatocytes are removed from the patient and transduced
with the retroviral vector containing human LDL receptor gene.
Studies indicate that this technique is feasible with transduction effi-
ciency rate close to 30%. Gene therapy trial for haemophilia B began
in December 1991, in Shanghai, China. It was retroviral-mediated
gene transfer of gene for factor IX using skin fibroblasts.
In cystic fibrosis, gene therapy aims at delivering CFTR or a1-anti-
trypsin gene directly into the epithelial cells lining airways. The
a1-antitrypsin gene can also be directed towards hepatocytes. As
lung tissue proliferates very slowly, it is more suitable for adenoviral
vectors. However, this corrects only the pulmonary complications
of cystic fibrosis. The other method used to deliver CFTR gene is
liposome-mediated gene transfer. At NIH, the first human gene
therapy trial in cystic fibrosis was initiated on April 17, 1993.
FUTURE PROSPECTS
For gene therapy to become a widely used medical therapy, few

hurdles need to be overcome. First, we need gene transfer vectors
that can be injected directly into the patient. Secondly, the vector
should integrate safely into a non-critical site on chromosomes or
homologous recombination replacing defective gene. Finally, the
introduced gene should have an ability to respond to physiological
changes in blood or cellular metabolites. For example, in gene
therapy for diabetes (insulin deficiency), rise or fall in blood glu-
cose levels should be sensed and responded to by an appropriately
engineered insulin gene. The future of gene therapy is promising,
and it is likely that this technology will be applied to treat a wide
variety of diseases in the years to follow.
Summary
Gene Therapy involves replacement of a defective/abnormal gene. Gene

delivery is based on the use of retroviral vectors.
Governing bodies include NIH (National Institute of Health), FDA (Food
and Drug Administration), RAC (Recombinant DNA Advisory Committee),
Committee on Ethics in Gene Therapy, etc.
Continued
mebooksfree.com
Summary—cont’d
Gene delivery is done by either ex-vivo or in vivo strategy.

Gene Transfer Techniques include ( i ) physical transfection methods
such as liposome-mediated endocytosis; ( ii ) retroviral transfection
method—this needs packaging cell line and helper virus. Adenoviruses are
used in non-dividing cells e.g. CNS.
Target Tissues: It depends upon proliferation state of tissues, accessibil-
ity to gene manipulation and site of gene expression. These include liver,
muscles, CNS, bone marrow.
Diseases Amenable to Gene Therapy: ( i ) Cancer with the use of
tumour-suppressor gene, blocking oncogene, suicide gene, promoting im-
munogenicity of tumour, use of genes for cytokines; ( ii ) peripheral vascular
disease; ( iii ) coronary artery disease; ( iv) AIDS; (v) cystic fibrosis, etc.
Future Prospects: Injections of gene transfer vectors directly, to develop
safe and cost effective gene delivery that responds to physiological and
metabolic changes in blood.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What are physical transfection methods of gene delivery?

2. When was the first human gene therapy instituted?
mebooksfree.com
Stem Cell
Therapy 16
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

•฀What฀are฀stem฀cells?
•฀Different฀sources฀to฀obtain฀stem฀cells
•฀Application฀of฀knowledge฀of฀stem฀cells฀in฀clinical฀practice
KEY WORDS
BMSCs฀(bone฀marrow฀stem฀cells),฀PBSCs฀(peripheral฀blood฀stem฀cells)
“Stem cells” and stem cell therapy have opened altogether a new
chapter in healthcare. These cells (which are “pluripotent”), under
suitable conditions, can differentiate into any type of cells. In other
words, any organ can be formed through these cells. Thus, in future,
we can think about replacement of a diseased organ with a fresh one.
This will revolutionise the field of organ transplantation. Recently a
group of researchers from Kolhapur, Western Maharashtra, India
have proposed that endometrium is a rich source of stem cells. If this
holds true, we would not need to bank upon umbilical cord cells.
Currently, there are institutions preserving umbilical cords, of course
at sumptuous cost. This, i.e. uterine source, would be much cost
effective way to “stem cell therapy”.
Stem cells have seemingly endless self-renewal potential. Their
undifferentiated state makes it possible. From a single cell, many
healthy cells can be formed to replace damaged cells of adult organ-
ism. This forms the basis of cell-based therapies as newer treatment
modality. This has also been called “regenerative medicine” and is
the most fascinating area of biology.
STEM CELL
It has an ability to divide infinitely; under appropriate conditions, it

can give rise to many different cell types to form desired tissues.
239
mebooksfree.com
The stem cells are of two types:

i) Embryonic stem cells
ii) Adult stem cells
Embryonic Stem Cells

They are derived from the inner cell mass/embryoblast of the blasto-
cyst. They have potential to infinitely divide symmetrically without
differentiating, i.e. long-term self-renewal. They are “clonogenic,” i.e.
each single cell can give rise to a colony of genetically identical clones,
having same functional potential as the original cell (Fig. 16.1 ).
i) The embryonic stem cell lines are established from embryos
shortly after fertilisation.
ii) To create an embryonic stem cell line, an embryo must be sepa-
rated into individual cells.
iii) A single cell from the embryo is placed in a dish and provided with
growth factors as well as nutrients. This stimulates it to divide.
Embryonic stem cell (ESC) can be grown into any tissue, e.g. heart
muscle, liver, kidney, muscle, etc. However, there is lot of ethical
debate on the use of ESCs for research and therapy.
Figure 16.1 Derivation and use of embryonic stem cell lines.

Scan to Play Stem cell therapy
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 16 —฀Stem฀Cell฀Therapy 241
Potential uses of stem cell can be in many conditions, such as:

i) Stroke, traumatic brain injury, Alzheimer disease
ii) Myocardial infarction
iii) Wound healing
iv) Osteoarthritis
v) Diabetes
vi) Muscular dystrophy
vii) Multiple site cancers
Adult Stem Cells

It refers to undifferentiated cells found among differentiated cells in a
tissue or an organ in adults. They can renew themselves and can dif-
ferentiate, yielding major specialised cell type of the tissue/organ.
Major role assigned to them is to maintain and repair the tissue/organ
in which they are found. However, they are rare in tissues/organs in
which they exist. It is estimated that one in 10–15 thousand cells in the
bone marrow is haemopoietic stem cell (HSC).
The tissues reported till date to have stem cells are (i ) bone mar-
row, (ii ) peripheral blood, (iii ) brain, (iv) spinal cord, (v) skeletal
muscle, (vi ) epithelia of digestive system, skin, cornea, retina, liver,
pancreas, (vii ) dental pulp. The list is growing everyday. In recent
times, a great deal of excitement has been generated in research on
adult stem cells. Their potential use in transplant has offered a ray
of hope in many diseases (Fig. 16.2).
Figure 16.2 Applications of stem cells.
mebooksfree.com
STEM CELL THERAPIES TODAY
Adult stem cell transplant:

Bone marrow stem cells (BMSCs)
Peripheral blood stem cells (PBSCs)
Umbilical cord blood stem cells
Bone Marrow Transplant

Perhaps the best-known stem cell therapy to date is the bone mar-
row transplant, which is used to treat leukaemia and other types of
blood cancer as well as other blood disorders.
Peripheral Blood Stem Cell Transplant

Since peripheral blood stem cells (PBSCs) can be obtained from the
blood drawn, it is easier to collect than bone marrow stem cells be-
cause bone marrow stem cells (BMSCs) have to be extracted from
the bones. So, in short, PBSCs make a less invasive treatment option
than BMSCs. However, PBSCs are sparse in the bloodstream and
hence collecting enough of them to perform a transplant poses a
challenge.
Umbilical Cord Blood Stem Cells Transplant

Recently, scientists and the healthcare professionals have focused
their attention on multipotent stem-cell–rich blood found in the
umbilical cord. It has proven useful in treating same type of health
problems as those treated using BMSCs and PBSCs.
Cord blood banking
A few years ago, cord blood banking was the fancy of rich class. Con-
sidering the potential it holds, many entrepreneurs have stepped
into this area. This has made it cost effective, and now it is being
taken up by middle class also. Though stem cell therapy is still in
nascent stage, it holds a promise in future.
Few institutes undertaking this in India include the following:
i) Life Cell India
ii) Reliance Life Sciences
iii) Cord Life Biotech
Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR), an apex body in the
field of medical education and healthcare, has formed guidelines for
stem cell research in 2007. Now by 2012, the stem cell research has
truly gathered momentum. It is evident from the fact that LV Prasad
Eye Institute, Hyderabad has treated more than 800 patients using
mebooksfree.com
Chapter 16 —฀Stem฀Cell฀Therapy 243
limbal stem cells for repairing corneal surface disorders. In civic/

private-run hospitals in Mumbai, Dental Stem Bank, Stem Cell Labs
have been working since 2006. With global market of around
$20 billion, India needs to enhance its current share.
SYNTHETIC CORNEA
We, the healthcare professionals, always promote “Eye donation;”

still the number required and desired is much more as compared to
people donating eye or pledging for it. Synthetic cornea could be a
right solution to this problem. Synthetic cornea is prepared by tak-
ing out little collagen from the individual and then forming com-
plete cornea out of it. In this way, it serves as an “autograft,” and
hence there is no fear of rejection.
ETHICAL, LEGAL AND SOCIAL ISSUES
Considering and addressing all these issues is not a simple task.

There are many questions and arguments both in favour and against
stem cell. Research, especially on ESCs, generates the following
questions and arguments:
Questions
When does human life begin?
Is killing a zygote, killing a human being?
Frozen embryos in IVF are going to be discarded anyway; can they
be used for research?
Arguments
Humans are created in the image of God before birth.
Human soul begins before birth.
So NO human zygote/embryo should be used for research.
FUTURE
BMSCs have been used for nearly last 3–4 decade to treat leukae-
mias, lymphomas, inborn errors of metabolism, autoimmune
diseases such as Crohn disease, multiple sclerosis and rheumatoid
arthritis. Intracoronary transplantation of stem cells following
myocardial infarction has however shown only a modest benefit.
Stem cell is not used in routine clinical practice in any part of
the world. Most of the work in this area is done under research
mebooksfree.com
protocol that is scrutinised, monitored and then approved by the

ethical committees of the respective research centres or hospitals
or institutes. Currently, stem cell therapies are proceeding into
placebo-controlled and double-blind clinical trials. These scrupu-
lously designed trials shall lead us to exciting new therapeutic
approach to human diseases.
Summary
Stem Cells are undifferentiated cells having an ability to divide and give rise
to different types of cells when put under appropriate conditions.
Stem cells are of two types:
i) Embryonic stem cells (ESCs)
ii) Adult stem cells
They can also be classified as:
i) Totipotent
ii) Pleuripotent
Embryonic Stem Cells can give rise to any tissue, e.g. cardiac muscle,
liver, kidney, etc., and thus hold tremendous potential.
Adult Stem Cells are found among differentiated cells of a tissue or an
organ. They help in repairs. They are found in bone marrow, peripheral
blood, dental pulp, epithelia of gastrointestinal tract (GIT), etc.
Stem Cell Therapy: It is used to treat leukaemia and other blood disorders.
i) Bone marrow stem cell therapy (bone marrow transplant)
ii) Peripheral blood stem cells (PBSCs) therapy
Umbilical Cord Blood Stem Cell Transplant: The potential that cord
blood holds has led to “Cord Blood Banking”. Cord blood banking has much
greater prospects. However, the use of embryonic stem cells in research and
therapeutics is under lens because of ethical, legal and social issues in-
volved in it.
QUESTION YOURSELF*
1. What are stem cells?

2. What are the sources of stem cells?
3. What are applications of stem cells?
4. What are the ethical issues of stem cell therapy?
mebooksfree.com
Glossary
A
A An abbreviation for adenine.
Acentric A chromosome fragment without a centromere.
Acrocentric A chromosome having centromere at one end. Such
chromosomes have satellited short arms carrying genes for rRNA.
Adenine It is a purine base in DNA and RNA.
Alleles They are alternative forms of gene at the same locus on ho-
mologous chromosomes. When there are more than two alleles at a
given locus, they are called multiple alleles.
Allograft A graft where both donor and host belong to the same
species but are not genetically identical.
Amber codon It is one of the three stop codons (UAG).
Amino acid An organic compound having both the carboxyl
(–COOH) and amino (–NH2) groups.
Amniocentesis A procedure by which amniotic fluid is obtained for
prenatal diagnosis.
Anaphase The stage of cell division in which chromosomes mi-
grate to opposite poles of the cell.
Aneuploid A chromosome number that is not an exact multiple
of haploid number, i.e. 2n+1 or 2n–1, where n denotes haploid
number of chromosomes.
Antibody It is an immunoglobulin produced in response to an
antigenic stimulus and reacts specifically with the same antigen.
Anticipation This denotes an earlier onset and increased severity
of some diseases in successive generations. It is believed to be an
outcome of bias of ascertainment.
Anti-codon It is the complementary triplet of the tRNA that binds
it with a particular amino acid.
Antigen A macromolecule that evokes antibody production by im-
munocompetent cells and specifically reacts with the same antibody.
Antigen-binding fragment (Fab) The part of antibody molecule
that binds with the antigen.
Anti-parallel Refers to orientation of the two strands of DNA, one run-
ning in 5’ to 3’ direction and the other running in 3’ to 5’ direction.
Apoptosis Programmed cell death of a developing tissue or an
organ of the body.
Ascertainment The method of selection of families for genetic study.
245
mebooksfree.com
246 Glossary
Association An occurrence of an allele in a group of patients more

often than can be accounted for by chance.
Assortative mating The preferential selection of a mate with
particular genotype.
Assortment It is random distribution of maternal and paternal
chromosomes during gametogenesis. This also permits indepen-
dent assortment of non-allelic genes to the gametes.
Autograft It is graft of the host’s own tissue.
Autoradiography It is the procedure by which radioactively la-
belled molecule/s can be detected on an X-ray film.
Autosome Any chromosome other than sex chromosomes. There
are 22 pairs of autosomes in humans.
B
B cells These are small lymphocytes, producing antibodies in
response to antigenic stimulus.
Bacteriophage A virus that infects bacteria.
Balanced translocation A structural rearrangement of chromo-
somes in which genetic material is exchanged between two non-
homologous chromosomes without loss or gain of the chromosome
material.
Banding Procedure of staining chromosomes to visualise typical
pattern of cross bands.
Barr body It is condensed inactive X-chromosome seen in a
female somatic cell.
Base Refers to nitrogenous bases in nucleic acids, DNA and RNA
(A–adenine, C–cytosine, G–guanine, T–thymine and U–uracil).
Base pair (bp) In DNA, complementary base A pairs with T and C pairs
with G.
Bayes’ theorem It states that combining the prior and condi-
tional probabilities of certain events or the results of specific tests
offers a joint probability in order to derive the posterior or rela-
tive probability.
Bias of ascertainment It is an artefact that must be taken into
account during family studies while looking at segregation ratios,
caused by families coming to attention because they have affected
person/s.
Bivalent A pair of synapsed homologous chromosomes seen at
metaphase of the first meiotic division.
Blood chimaera A mixture of the cells of different genetic origin
present in twins.
Blood group Refers to system of red cell antigens.
Break point cluster (bcr) The region of chromosome 22 involved
in Philadelphia translocation in chronic myeloid leukaemia.
Burden In genetics, it denotes the total impact of a genetic disor-
der in the patient, his family and the society.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 247
C
C An abbreviation for cytosine.
Cancer family syndrome The term describes the clustering of
particular types of cancers in certain families. It is thought that
different types of cancer could be due to a single dominant gene,
for example, Lynch type II.
Candidate gene A gene whose function suggests that it is probably
the cause of a genetic disease.
Carrier A person who is heterozygous for a normal gene and an ab-
normal gene that does not express phenotypically but can be detected
by specific tests.
CAT box It is non-coding, promoter sequence about 70–80 bp
upstream from the site of initiation of transcription.
Complementary DNA (c-DNA) It is a single-stranded DNA and is
transcribed from a specific RNA by an enzyme reverse transcriptase.
Cellular oncogene See protooncogene.
Central dogma The concept that the genetic information is trans-
mitted from DNA to RNA to protein.
Centimorgan (cM) Also called map unit, it is used in linkage and
is equivalent to 1% recombination.
Centric fusion The fusion of the centromeres of two acrocentric
chromosomes giving rise to Robertsonian translocation.
Centriole A pair of cell organelles forming the points of focus of
the spindle during cell division. They migrate to opposite poles of
the cell during cell division.
Centromere It is also called kinetochore. It is the point at which
the two chromatids of a chromosome are attached.
CFTR Stands for cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator. It
is the gene product of cystic fibrosis gene, essential for chloride
transport and mucus secretion.
Chiasma (Chiasma-cross) It denotes cross configuration of chro-
matids of the homologous chromosomes during the first meiotic
division.
Chimaera An individual with two genetically different cell popula-
tions derived from different zygotes.
Chorion villous biopsy A procedure to obtain chorionic villous
sample for prenatal diagnosis around 9–12 weeks under ultrasound
control.
Chromatid During cell division each chromosome appears to be
constituted by two parallel strands called chromatids held together by
the centromere.
Chromatin The nucleoprotein fibres constituting the chromo-
somes.
Chromosome jumping or linking It is a technique of chromosome
mapping. It involves circularisation of DNA fragments by restriction
enzyme digestion in the presence of a plasmid sequence cut by the
mebooksfree.com
248 Glossary
same restriction enzyme followed by digestion with second restric-

tion enzyme that does not cleave within the plasmid sequence.
Chromosome mapping Assigning a gene to a specific chromosome
or to particular region of a chromosome.
Chromosome painting The hybridisation in situ of fluorescent-
labelled probes to chromosome preparation allowing identification
of a particular chromosome.
Chromomeres They are densely coiled regions of chromatin on
a chromosome giving the latter a beaded appearance, especially
evident at meiotic prophase.
Chromosomal aberration A structural or numerical abnormality
of chromosomes.
Class switching The term describes the normal change in antibody
class from IgM to IgG in the immune response.
Cistron The smallest unit of genetic material that specifies synthesis
of a particular polypeptide.
Clone A cell line derived from successive mitosis of a single diploid
ancestral cell.
Codominant When both alleles of a pair are expressed in hetero-
zygote state, the alleles are said to be codominant.
Codon A triplet of three nitrogenous bases that codes for one
amino acid.
Coefficient of inbreeding (F) The probability that a person has
received both alleles of a pair from an identical ancestral source.
Collinearity Term denotes the parallel relationship between base
sequence of the DNA or mRNA and the amino acid sequence in
corresponding polypeptide.
Complement There are about 10 serum proteins in humans that
on activation interact in sequence to destroy cellular antigens.
Concordant When both members of a twin pair exhibit the same
trait, they are called concordant.
Conditional probability Relates to tests or observations that can be
used to modify prior probabilities in Bayesian calculations in risk
estimation.
Congenital Refers to an abnormality present at birth; it may or
may not be genetic in nature.
Consanguinity A relationship by descent through a common an-
cestor.
Cosmid A plasmid in which the maximum DNA has been removed
to permit largest possible insert for cloning, but still has DNA
essential for in vitro packaging into a phage particle.
Consultant An individual who gives genetic counselling.
Contigs Contiguous or overlapping DNA clones.
Control gene A gene that can turn other genes “on or off”.
Cor pulmonale It is right-sided heart failure, as a sequel to a severe
lung disease, e.g. pulmonary infection in cystic fibrosis.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 249
Crossing over Exchange of genetic material between two chromo-

somes of a pair such as in chiasmata formation in diplotene stage.
Cytosine A pyrimidine base in DNA and RNA.
Cytogenetics It is a branch of genetics that deals with the study of
chromosomes.
Cytoplasmic inheritance Refers to transmission of a trait through
the genes present in cytoplasmic organelles such as mitochondria.
D
Daltonism In the past, X-linked inheritance was called Daltonism,
after John Dalton who noted this mode of inheritance in colour
blindness.
Deletion A chromosomal aberration in which a part of chromo-
some is lost.
Denaturation Refers to conversion of double-stranded DNA into
single-stranded DNA by destruction of bonds between base pairs.
Dermatoglyphics The study of patterns of skin ridges of fingers,
palms and soles.
Developmental field It consists of apparently unrelated embryonic
primordia that react together against a single genetic or environ-
mental insult, thus producing a particular pattern of congenital
malformations.
Dicentric An abnormal chromosome with two centromeres.
Dictyotene The stage of the first meiotic division. Human oocyte
remains in this stage from prenatal life until ovulation.
Diploid The number of chromosomes in somatic cells of an indi-
vidual. It is double the number found in gametes. In humans, dip-
loid number is 46 (2n).
Discordant When only one member of a twin pair shows a particu-
lar trait and other does not, they are said to be discordant.
Dispermy Fertilisation by two sperms, of a duplicated egg nucleus
or of egg and polar body.
Diversity region They are DNA sequences coding for segments of
the hypervariable regions of antibody molecule.
Dizygotic twins, fraternal twins Twins produced by fertilisation of
two separate ova by two different sperms.
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) Nucleic acid in chromosome that
stores and transmits genetic information.
DNA cloning Production of many identical copies of a DNA fragment.
DNA fingerprinting The pattern of hypervariable tandem DNA
repeats of a core sequence that is unique to a person.
DNA library It is the collection of recombinant DNA from a par-
ticular source, e.g. genomic or cDNA.
DNA ligase It is an enzyme that catalyses formation of a phospho-
diester bond between a 3’-hydroxyl and a 5’-phosphate group in
DNA, thus joining two DNA fragments.
mebooksfree.com
250 Glossary
DNA mapping It denotes the physical relationship of flanking

DNA sequence polymorphisms and the detailed structure of a
gene.
DNA probes These are DNA sequences that are labelled radioac-
tively and are used to identify a gene, e.g. genomic probe.
Dominant A trait that expresses even in heterozygote state for a
particular gene.
Dosage compensation It refers to the fact that the amount of prod-
uct of an X-linked gene is equal irrespective of the number of X
chromosomes.
Double-minute chromosomes They are amplified DNA sequences
in tumour cells that occur as small extra chromosomes as found in
neuroblastoma.
Drift The fluctuations in gene frequencies that tend to occur in
small isolated populations.
Duplication A chromosomal aberration in which a part of chromo-
some is duplicated.
Dystrophin It is a protein, the gene product of Duchenne muscular
dystrophy gene (DMD gene).
E
Ecogenetics It is the study of genetically determined differences in
susceptibility to the action of physical, chemical or an infectious
agent in the environment.
Endoreduplication It refers to duplication of a haploid sperm
chromosome set.
Empiric risk Probability of recurrence of a trait in a family based
on previous experience and observation.
Endonucleases Enzymes that can cleave bonds in DNA or RNA
strand.
Enhancer A DNA sequence that promotes transcription of the
related gene.
Enzyme A protein that serves as a catalyst in biochemical reac-
tions.
Epidermal growth factor (EGF) It is a growth factor that stimulates
a variety of cell types inclusive of epidermal cells.
Euchromatin Represents genetically active regions of the chromo-
somes.
Eugenics A branch of genetics that promotes the improvement of
hereditary qualities of a race/species.
Eukaryote An organism in which cells have a nucleus and a nu-
clear membrane.
Exon A segment of gene that is represented in mRNA product and
codes for protein.
Expressivity Refers to severity of the expression of a particular
gene.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 251
F
Fab An antigen-binding fragment of an antibody molecule pro-
duced by digestion with papain.
FACS Stands for fluorescent activated cell sorting. It is a technique in
which chromosomes are stained with fluorescent stain that selec-
tively binds to DNA. The difference in fluorescence of various chro-
mosomes allows their separation using special laser.
First filial generation (F1) The first generation progeny of a mating.
Familial Any trait that is more frequent in relatives of an affected
person than in the general population.
Filial Offspring.
First-degree relatives Close relatives, i.e. parents, offsprings, sibs.
They share an average 50% of their genes.
FISH Stands for fluorescent in situ hybridisation. The technique in
which single stranded DNA with a fluorescent label is hybridised
with its complementary target sequence in the chromosome, per-
mitting its visualisation under UV light.
Fitness Refers to biological fitness in terms of number of off-
springs who reach reproductive age. Fitness is taken as unity (100%)
if the person and his/her spouse have two such offsprings.
Five-prime (5’) end The end of a DNA or RNA strand having a free
5’ phosphate group.
Flanking sequences Nucleotide sequences preceding or following
the transcribed region of gene.
Flow cytometry See fluorescent-activated cell sorting.
Foetoscopy A procedure of direct visualisation of foetus for prena-
tal diagnosis.
Forme fruste A mild expression of a trait, bears no clinical signifi-
cance.
Founder effect Refers to the high frequency of a mutant gene in
the population founded by a small ancestral group when one of the
founders was a carrier of the mutant gene.
Frameshift mutations The mutations such as deletions or inser-
tions, which change the reading frame of the codon triplets.
G
G An abbreviation for guanine.
G bands They are dark and light bands seen in chromosomes after
treatment with trypsin followed by Giemsa stain.
Gamete A germ cell (ovum or sperm) having haploid number of
chromosomes.
Gene A part of DNA molecule that directs synthesis of a polypeptide
chain or RNA molecule. It consists of many codons.
Gene amplification Production of multiple copies of certain genes
in tumour cells; evidenced by homogeneously staining regions
(HSRs) and double minute chromosomes.
mebooksfree.com
252 Glossary
Gene flow Diffusion of genes from one population to another,

through migration and mating.
Gene map Represents human karyotype showing chromosomal
localisation of the genes.
Gene pool Total genes present at a given locus in the population.
Gene therapy Management of an inherited disease by addition or
insertion of a normal gene/s.
Genetic code Triplet of bases that specifies amino acids.
Genetic counselling Deals with providing information to patients
and the relatives at the risk of a genetic disorder, the consequences
of the disorder, the probability of recurrence and the ways by which
it may be prevented or mitigated.
Genetic death Failure of a mutant gene to be passed on to the next
generation because of its seriously damaging phenotypic effects.
Genetic lethal Refers to the gene or genetically determined trait
that leads to failure of reproduction in an affected individual.
Genetic load The sum total of all kinds of harmful alleles in a
population.
Genetic marker A trait can be used as a genetic marker in study of
individuals, families or populations provided that the trait is geneti-
cally determined, has a simple pattern of inheritance, can be classi-
fied accurately and has variations common enough to permit it to
be labelled as genetic polymorphism.
Genetic screening The screening tests in population designed to
identify individuals at risk of having a specific disorder or are likely
to produce an offspring with such a disorder.
Genetic susceptibility An inherent predisposition to a disease
that is due to complex interaction of effects of multiple genes, i.e.
polygenic inheritance.
Genome The entire DNA complement in the cell.
Genotype The genetic constitution of an individual (genome).
Goldberg–Hogness box See CAT box.
Gray (Gy) 1 Gy is equivalent to 100 rad.
Growth factor A substance that is essential in a culture medium to
allow multiplication of the cells or the substances involved in growth
of certain cell types, tissue or body part, e.g. fibroblast growth factor.
H
Haploid The number of chromosomes in a normal gamete. In
humans, it is 23 (n).
Haplotype Refers to a group of alleles from closely linked loci.
They are inherited as one unit. For example, HLA complex of four
genes on each chromosome 6.
Hardy–Weinberg’s law The law states that in large randomly
mating population relative proportions of the different genotypes
remain constant from one generation to another provided no
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 253
evolutionary processes like migration, selection and drift are op-

erating.
Hemizygous A term used to denote genes on X chromosome in
males.
Heritability The proportion of the total variation of a character
attributable to genetic as against environmental factors.
Hermaphrodite, intersex An individual with gonads of both male
and female.
Heterochromatin Genetically inactive regions of the chromo-
somes.
Heterogametic sex The sex that produces gametes of two different
types. In humans, male is heterogametic, as he produces X and Y
bearing sperms.
Heteromorphism The heritable structural polymorphism in chro-
mosomes.
Heterozygote Refers to an individual possessing two different al-
leles at a given locus on a pair of homologous chromosomes.
Histocompatibility A graft is accepted by a host if it is histocom-
patible; it means there exists an antigenic similarity between
them.
Histone Type of protein associated with DNA in chromosomes,
rich in lysine and arginine.
HIV Human immunodeficiency virus.
HLA Human leucocyte antigen. It is present on the surface of cells
including lymphocytes.
HLA complex Refers to genes on chromosome 6, responsible
for determining the cell-surface antigens. They are important in
organ transplantation.
Holandric inheritance The pattern of inheritance of genes on Y
chromosome. They pass from father to all his sons but to none of
his daughters.
Homeobox A sequence of about 180 bp found to be conserved in
different homeotic genes.
Homeotic gene Gene that controls development of a region of
organism producing proteins that regulate gene expression by bind-
ing particular DNA sequences.
Homologous chromosomes A pair of chromosomes, one derived
from each parent, having identical loci.
Homozygote An individual who has two identical alleles at a given
locus on a pair of homologous chromosomes.
Human genome project A collaborative international effort to
map and sequence the entire human genome.
H-Y antigen Histocompatibility antigen originally detected in
mouse and earlier thought to be located on Y chromosome, now
believed to be coded by a gene on chromosome 6 and controlled by
a regulatory gene on Y chromosome.
mebooksfree.com
254 Glossary
Hybrid Refers to progeny of cross between two genetically differ-

ent organisms.
Hybridoma The term denotes cells formed by fusion of mutant
myeloma cells and other cells like spleen cells from an immun-
ised mouse. The technique is applied to produce monoclonal
antibodies.
Hypervariable DNA length polymorphism Refers to a number
of different types of variation in DNA sequence that are highly
polymorphic, e.g. variable number tandem repeats (VNTRs), micro-
satellites.
I
Idiogram An ideal representation of an object, e.g. an ideogram of
a karyotype.
Immune reaction The reaction that occurs between an antigen
and antibody.
Immunological tolerance Failure to react to antigen because of
previous exposure to that antigen.
Inborn error A specific enzyme defect leading to a metabolic
block and resulting in a genetically determined biochemical dis-
order.
Inbreeding The mating between closely related individuals.
Incidence The rate of occurrence of new cases, e.g. 1 in 3000 male
births is affected by DMD.
Index case, proband The affected family member through whom
the family is ascertained.
Inducer The molecule that interacts with a regulator protein and
triggers transcription of gene.
Insertion Term denotes a structural chromosomal aberration in-
volving addition of DNA sequence from non-homologous chromo-
somes.
Insertional mutagenesis The insertion of mutations at specific sites
to ascertain the effect of these changes.
In situ hybridisation Hybridisation with a DNA probe, directly on
a chromosome preparation.
Interphase Part of the cell cycle between two successive cell divi-
sions
Intron The part of a gene that is initially transcribed into the pri-
mary transcript (hnRNA) but is then removed and is not present in
mRNA.
Inversion A structural chromosomal abnormality in which a
part of chromosome is inverted. It may be pericentric or paracen-
tric.
In vitro In the laboratory, literally means “in glass”.
In vivo In the cell, actually means “in the living organism”.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 255
Isochromosome An abnormal chromosome resulting from

transverse division of centromere in which one arm is deleted.
The isochromosome therefore has two arms of equal length bear-
ing same genes.
Isograft A graft between two genetically identical individuals.
Isolate A small population group in which matings occur exclu-
sively between members of the same population group.
J
Joint probability Denotes the product of the prior and the condi-
tional probability for two events.
K
Karyotype The term denotes chromosome set. It is also used for
photomicrograph of an individual’s chromosomes arranged accord-
ing to standard classification.
Kilobase (kb) One thousand bases in DNA or RNA.
L
Ligase An enzyme used to join DNA molecules.
Linkage The genes located close together on the same chromo-
some are said to be linked.
Linkage disequilibrium The tendency of two linked alleles to
occur more frequently on the same chromosome than would be
expected by chance.
Locus The site of a gene on a chromosome is called locus. Alterna-
tive forms of genes (alleles) may occupy the locus.
Locus control region (LCR) Located close to beta-like globin genes
involved in tissue specificity and the timing of their expression in
development.
Lod score A score of the relative likelihood of two loci being
linked.
Long terminal repeat (LTR) Located at the ends of DNA synthe-
sised by reverse transcriptase from the retroviral RNA and is in-
volved in regulating viral expression.
Lymphokines Refers to a group of glycoproteins released from T
lymphocytes.
Lyonisation (Lyon’s hypothesis) Inactivation of genes on one of
the X-chromosomes during the embryonic period in female mam-
malian somatic cells.
M
Manifesting heterozygote Denotes a female heterozygote for an
X-linked disorder in whom the trait is expressed clinically with
almost same severity as in hemizygous males.
mebooksfree.com
256 Glossary
Marker chromosome A small and structurally abnormal, extra

chromosome.
Meiosis It is a special type of cell division occurring in germ cells
and resulting in the formation of gametes with haploid number of
chromosomes. There are two meiotic divisions, meiosis I and II.
Chromosome number is reduced in meiosis I.
Messenger RNA (mRNA) It is transcribed from DNA and forms
template for translation of protein.
Metaphase The stage of mitosis or meiosis in which chromosomes
are condensed to their maximum capacity and are lined up at the
equatorial plane of the cell.
Methaemoglobin Refers to haemoglobin molecule in which iron is
oxidised.
MHC Stands for major histocompatibility complex. It is a locus with
multiple genes, coding for histocompatibility antigens involved in
organ transplantation and located on 6 P.
Minichromosomes Artificially constructed chromosomes possess-
ing centromeric and telomeric elements that allow replication of
foreign DNA as a separate entity.
Minigene A gene with majority of sequence removed but still re-
maining functional, e.g. dystrophin minigene.
Missense mutation A point mutation that results in an alteration
in an amino acid specifying codon.
Mitochondrial DNA It is the circular DNA of mitochondria, a cyto-
plasmic structure. It is maternally inherited.
Mitosis The type of cell division that occurs in somatic cells. The
daughter cells have the same chromosome complement as that of
the parent cell.
Monoclonal antibodies See hybridoma.
Monosomy Refers to absence of one chromosome from a pair.
For example, 45, X (Turner syndrome). Partial monosomy may also
occur.
Monozygotic twins, identical twins The type of twin derived from a
single fertilised ovum.
Mosaic An individual with at least two cell lines with different
genotypes but derived from a single zygote.
Multifactorial Refers to the combination of multiple factors con-
trolling inheritance, such as genetic factors and also the non-ge-
netic (environmental) factors. It should be distinguished from
polygenic.
Mutagen An agent that increases the mutation rate by changing
DNA structure.
Mutation A permanent heritable alteration in genomic DNA se-
quence. When it involves a single gene it is called point mutation.
Mutation rate Denotes number of mutations at a given locus. It is
expressed as mutations per gamete per locus per generation.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 257
N
Neutral gene Refers to a gene that has no obvious effect on sur-
vival.
Nick A break in the sugar–phosphate backbone of RNA or DNA
strand.
Non-disjunction Two members of a chromosome pair fail to sepa-
rate (disjoin) during cell division. As a result both pass to the same
daughter cell.
Nonsense mutation Mutation involving a chain termination codon.
Northern blotting The mRNA electrophoretic separation with
subsequent transfer to nitrocellulose filter and radiolabelling.
Nucleosome The primary repeating unit of DNA structure in
chromatin fibre.
Nucleotide Many nucleotides constitute nucleic acid. Each nucle-
otide comprises a nitrogenous base, a pentose sugar and a phos-
phate group.
Nucleus A structure within the cell that contains nucleolus and
the chromosomes.
O
Obligate carrier Refers to a person who by pedigree analysis must
carry a particular gene, e.g. the parents of a child with an autosomal
recessive trait, the daughter of a man having an X-linked recessive
disorder.
Ochre codon One of the three stop codons (UAA).
Oncogene The gene responsible for cancer.
Operator gene A gene that switches on an adjacent structural gene.
Operon It consists of an operator gene and the structural gene
that it controls.
P
p Denotes (i ) the short arm of a chromosome, (ii ) frequency of
more common allele of a pair in population genetics.
Packaging cell line Denotes cell line that has been infected by a
retrovirus in which the provirus is genetically modified to lack the
packaging sequence essential to produce infectious viruses.
Parthenogenesis The process of development of an organism
from an unfertilised oocyte.
PCR Stand for polymerase chain reaction. It refers to a serial succes-
sive reaction using oligonucleotide primers and DNA polymerase to
amplify desired DNA sequence.
PDGF Stands for platelet derived growth factor. It is derived from the
platelets. It stimulates the growth of certain cells.
Pedigree A diagram of family history indicating normal and af-
fected individuals, their relationship to the proband and their status
with respect to a particular genetic disorder.
mebooksfree.com
258 Glossary
Penetrance The proportion of heterozygotes that express a trait,

even though mildly.
PFGE Stands for pulsed field gel electrophoresis. It is a DNA analysis
with electrophoresis to separate large DNA fragments (2 million bp
size) obtained by DNA digestion using restriction enzymes.
Pharmacogenetics Deals with drug responses and their genetically
controlled variations.
Phenocopy It is a copy of a phenotype. A condition that is due to
environmental factors but mimics one that is genetic.
Philadelphia chromosome It is a structurally abnormal chromo-
some 22, found in bone marrow cells of many patients of chronic
myelogenous leukaemia. It is formed by reciprocal translocation
between the long arms of chromosomes 22 and 9.
Pleiotropy The phenomenon of a single gene presenting multiple
effects.
Poly (A) tail A sequence of about 20–200 adenylic acid residues at
3’ end of mRNA, stabilising it and rendering it resistant to nuclease
digestion.
Polygenic A trait determined by many genes at different loci, should
be distinguished from multifactorial trait in which the environmental
factors operate.
Polymorphism The occurrence in a population of two or more
genetically determined forms, each with such frequencies that the
rarest of them cannot be maintained by mutation alone.
Polypeptide An organic compound comprising a chain of amino
acids held together by peptide bonds between amino group of one
and the carboxyl group of the other.
Polyploid Any multiple of haploid number, other than diploid,
such as 3n, 4n, etc.
Polysome A group of ribosomes (polyribosome) associated with a
mRNA molecule.
Posterior probability The joint probability for a particular event
divided by the sum of all possible joint probabilities.
Predictive testing Refers to presymptomatic testing of person/s at
the risk of a disorder e.g. Huntington disease.
Preimplantation diagnosis Performed to detect presence of inher-
ited disease in an in vitro fertilised conceptus before implantation.
Prior probability The initial probability of an event.
Proband See index case.
Probability The proportion of times an outcome occurs in a large
series of events.
Probe A radioactive DNA or RNA sequence used to detect the
complementary sequence by molecular hybridisation.
Processing Includes alterations in RNA that occur during tran-
scription; these are splicing, capping and polyadenylation.
Prokaryotes These are lower organisms without a well-defined
nucleus, e.g. bacterium.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 259
Prophase The first visible stage of cell division in which chromosomes

are seen as discrete structures. Subsequently they thicken and shorten.
Pseudogene A functionally inactive DNA sequence homologous
with a known gene.
Pulsed field gel electrophoresis See PFGE.
Q
q Denotes (i ) the long arm of a chromosome; (ii ) frequency of
rarer allele of a pair in population genetics.
Q bands The pattern of bright and dim cross-bands seen on chro-
mosomes when observed under fluorescent light after quinacrine
staining.
R
Rad The unit of measurement of any ionising radiation that is ab-
sorbed by the tissues. One rad is equal to 100 ergs of energy absorbed
per gram of tissue.
Random mating, panmixis Selection of a mate without consider-
ing the genotype.
Recessive A trait that expresses only in homozygotes.
Recombinant DNA An artificially synthesised DNA in which a part
of DNA sequence from one organism is inserted into the genome of
another.
Recombination A crossing over between two linked loci.
Recombination fraction (u) It is a measure of the distance, separat-
ing two loci and is determined by the likelihood/chance that a cross
over will occur between them.
Recurrence risk It is the probability that a genetic disorder pres-
ent in one or more members of a family shall recur in another
member of the same or the following generation.
Reduction division The first meiotic division in which the chromo-
some number is reduced from diploid to haploid.
Regulator gene In accordance with the operon concept, a regula-
tor gene synthesises a repressor substance that inhibits the action of
operator gene.
rem Roentgen equivalent for man. It has the same biological effect
as one rad of X-rays.
Restriction endonuclease An enzyme that cleaves DNA at a specific
base sequence producing fragments of DNA, used in recombinant
DNA technology.
Restriction fragment length polymorphism (RFLP) Polymorphism
owing to the presence/absence of a specific restriction site.
Restriction map A linear arrangement of sites on DNA cleaved by
various restriction enzymes.
Retrovirus RNA virus that replicates via conversion into DNA.
Reverse transcriptase An enzyme that catalyses the synthesis of DNA
from RNA.
mebooksfree.com
260 Glossary
Ring chromosome A structural chromosomal aberration in which

the terminal portion of both arms of a chromosome break off and
the remaining chromosome forms a ring.
RNA Ribonucleic acid is found chiefly in nucleolus and ribo-
somes. It has pentose sugar ribose. RNAs are of the following
classes—messenger RNA (mRNA), transfer RNA (tRNA), ribosomal
RNA (rRNA) and viral RNA.
Robertsonian translocation A translocation involving two acrocen-
tric chromosomes by fusion at the centromere and loss of their
short arms.
S
Satellite A distal part of chromosome separate from the rest of the
chromosome by a narrow stalk.
Secretor gene In humans, secretor gene is responsible for the se-
cretion of ABO blood group antigens in saliva and other body fluids.
Segregation Refers to separation of alleles at meiosis, as a result
two members of allelic pair pass to two different gametes.
Selection It refers to the operation of forces that determine the
relative fitness of a genotype in population.
Sex chromatin, Barr body A darkly stained mass located at the
periphery of the nucleus of a female mammalian cell during inter-
phase. It represents an inactive X chromosome.
Sex chromosomes The chromosomes responsible for determina-
tion of sex, XX in females and XY in males.
Sex-determining region of Y See SRY.
Sex influenced A trait that is not X-linked but still expresses differ-
ently either in degree or in frequency, in males and females, e.g.
congenital adrenal hyperplasia.
Sex limited A trait that is expressed in only one sex though it is not
determined by an X-linked gene, e.g. precocious puberty in males.
Sex linkage Denotes genes carried on sex chromosomes. Since
there are very few genes on Y chromosome, the term is often used
synonymously for X-linkage.
sib Brother or sister.
Sievert (SV) It is equivalent to 100 rem.
Silencer It represses the gene expression.
Silent gene A gene that has no visible phenotypic effect.
Sister chromatid exchange An exchange of genetic material be-
tween the two chromatids of any particular chromosome, e.g.
Bloom syndrome.
Solenoid Refers to a coil of wire wound around a hollow core. In
cytogenetics, the term is used to describe the coiled structure into
which nucleosomes are wound during chromatin condensation.
Somatic mutation A mutation that occurs in somatic cell rather
than in the germ cell line.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 261
Southern blot The technique for transferring DNA fragments

from agarose gel to a nitrocellulose filter on which specific DNA
fragment can be identified by hybridisation to radioactive probe. It
is named after Edwin Southern, who devised the technique.
Spindle A structure that is responsible for the movement of the
chromosomes during cell division. It consists of intracellular micro-
tubules.
Splicing Involves joining of exons after the removal of introns in
RNA during transcription.
Split gene A gene having one or more introns.
SRY Stands for sex-determining region of Y. It refers to the part of
Y chromosome containing testis determining gene.
Stop codon One of the three triplets UAA, UAG and UGA, causes
termination of protein synthesis.
Structural gene A gene coding for RNA or protein product other
than regulator gene.
Switching An alteration in the type of a or b globin chains in pre-
natal period.
Syndrome The complex of symptoms and signs that are found to-
gether in any particular disorder.
Synthetic genes Two genes that occur at different loci on the same
chromosome.
T
T An abbreviation for thymine.
T cells The small lymphocytes committed by the influence of the
thymus and are responsible for cellular immunity.
TATA box (hogness box) A conserved, non-coding DNA sequence
about 30 bp upstream from the site of initiation of transcription.
Telophase The stage of cell division that commences when the
daughter chromosomes reach the poles of the dividing cell and
completes when the two daughter cells take an appearance of inter-
phase cells.
Teratogen An agent that induces or increases the incidence of
congenital malformations.
Termination/stop codon There are three termination/stop co-
dons—UAG, UAA and UGA. Any one of them can terminate pro-
tein synthesis.
Three-prime (3’) end The end of the RNA or DNA strand having
3’ hydroxyl group.
Tissue typing Serological and cellular testing to ascertain histo-
compatibility before organ transplantation.
Trait A detectable phenotypic character.
Transcription The synthesis of mRNA or DNA template.
Transcription factors These include genes such as Hox, Pax and
zinc finger genes that control RNA transcription by binding to
mebooksfree.com
262 Glossary
specific DNA regulatory sequences. They form complexes that

initiate transcription by RNA polymerase.
Transduction Involves transfer of DNA from the donor cell to the
recipient cell/organism by recombination of the genetic material
through a phage.
Transfection Refers to the transformation of a bacterial cell by
infection with phage to produce infectious phage particles. Also in-
sertion of foreign DNA into eukaryotic cells in the culture.
Transformation Denotes genetic recombination in bacteria,
involving introduction of foreign DNA into the bacterium, its
subsequent incorporation into the bacterial chromosome. Also
the change of a normal cell into a malignant phenotype, e.g.
normal cells infected by oncogenic viruses.
Translation Refers to the process by which genetic information
along mRNA is translated into protein synthesis.
Translocation The transfer of genetic material from one chromo-
some to another non-homologous chromosome is translocation. If
the two non-homologous chromosomes exchange genetic mate-
rial, it is called reciprocal translocation. See also Robertsonian
translocation.
Transposon Refers to the mobile genetic element and inserting a
copy of itself at a new location in the genome.
Triplet codon In genetics, a unit of three bases in DNA or RNA
that codes for an amino acid.
Triploid A cell having three haploid sets of chromosomes (23 × 3 =
69 chromosomes).
Triradius In dermatoglyphics, the term denotes a point from
which the dermal ridges course in three directions at angles of ap-
proximately 120°.
Trisomy Refers to a state of having three representatives of a given
chromosome instead of normal two, e.g. Down syndrome or trisomy 21.
U
U An abbreviation for uracil.
Ultrasonography A procedure in which high frequency sound
waves are used to delineate the outline of various internal struc-
tures.
Unifactorial Inheritance controlled by a single gene pair.
Utrophin Refers to a gene on chromosome 6 with homology to
dystrophin gene.
V
Vector A plasmid or phage in which foreign DNA may be inserted
for cloning.
Virions Infectious viral particles.
mebooksfree.com
Glossary 263
X
X-chromatin See Barr body.
Xenograft A graft from donor of one species to the host of dif-
ferent species.
Y
Yeast artificial chromosome (YAC) It is a plasmid-cloning vector
that contains DNA sequences for centromere, telomere and autono-
mous chromosome replication sites, which enable cloning of large
DNA fragments up to 2–3 million bp length.
Z
Zinc finger Finger-like projection formed by amino acids, posi-
tioned between two cystine residues that form a complex with a zinc
ion. It is found in genes having important regulatory role in devel-
opment.
Zoo blot Refers to Southern blot of DNA from different species
used to look for evidence of conservation of DNA sequences during
evolution.
Zygote A diploid cell resulting from union of male and female
gamete (fertilisation).
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com
Bibliography
1. Anderson WF. Prospects for human gene therapy. Science

1984;226:401–9.
2. Anderson WF. Human gene therapy. Science 1992;256:808–13.
3. Annual Review of Genetics. California, USA: Annual Review
Inc., 1985.
4. Benson PF, Fenson AH. Genetic biochemical disorders.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1985.
5. Borgaonkar DS. Chromosomal Variation in Man: A Catalogue of
Chromosomal Variants and Anomalies. 4th edn. New York: AR Liss,
1984.
6. Brock DJH, Mayo O. The Biochemical Genetics of Man. 2nd edn.
London: Academic Press, 1979.
7. Brock DJH, Rodeck CH, Ferguson Smith MA. Prenatal Diagnosis
and Screening. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 1992.
8. Bundey S, Brett EM, Emery AEH. Genetics and Neurology. 2nd edn.
Churchill Livingstone, 1992.
9. Cappecchi MR. Targeted gene replacement. Scientific American
1994;270:34–41.
10. Ciba Foundation Symposium. Human genetics: Possibilities
and realities. Amsterdam: Excerpta Medica, 1979.
11. Conner JM, Ferguson S. Essential Medical Genetics. 2nd edn.
Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 1987.
12. Darnell J, Lodish H, Baltimore D. Molecular Cellular Biology. New
York: Freeman, 1990.
13. Emery AEH. Portraits in medical genetics. J Med Genet
1989;26:116–8.
14. Emery AEH. Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy. 2nd edn. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1993.
15. Emery AEH, Rimoin DL. Principles and Practices of Medical Genet-
ics, Vol. 1 and 2. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 1983.
16. Tumpenny P, Ellard S. Emery’s Elements of Medical Genetics. 12th edn.
Churchill Livingstone, 2004.
17. Fincham JRS. Genetics. John Wright, 1983.
18. Fraser G, Mayo O. Textbook of Human Genetics. Oxford: Blackwell
Scientific, 1975.
19. Fraser RJ, Pembrey ME. Introduction to Medical Genetics. 8th edn.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1985.
265
mebooksfree.com
266 Bibliography
20. Goodenough U. Genetics. 3rd edn. Japan: Saunders, 1984.

21. Harper P. Practical Genetic Counselling. Oxford: Butterworth
Heinemann, 1993.
22. Stone R. Harrison’s Principles of Internal Medicine. McGraw Hill,
1987.
23. Hodgson SV, Maher ER. A Practical Guide to Human Cancer Genetics.
Cambridge University Press, 1993.
24. Jorde Lynn B. Medical Genetics. Mosby, 2005.
25. King RC, Stansfield WD. Dictionary of Genetics. 3rd edn. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1985.
26. Lachmann PJ, Peter DK. Clinical Aspects of Immunology. 4th edn.
Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 1992.
27. Lewin B. Genes V. Oxford University, 1994.
28. Lilford RJ. Prenatal Diagnosis and Prognosis. London: Butterworth,
1990.
29. Mckusick VA. Mendelian Inheritance in Man. 11th edn. Baltimore.
John Hopkins University Press, 1994.
30. Pritchard DJ. Foundations of Developmental Genetics. London:
Taylor and Francis, 1986.
31. Swanson CP, Merz T, Young WJ. Cytogenetics. 2nd edn. Englewood
Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1981.
32. Thompson JS, Thompson MW. Genetics in Medicine. 7th ed.
Philadelphia: WB Saunders, 2006.
33. Vogel F, Motulsky AG. Human Genetics: Problems and Approaches.
2nd edn. Berlin: Springer–Verlag, 1986.
34. Weatherall DJ. The New Genetics and Clinical Practice. 3rd edn.
Oxford: Oxford Medical Publications, 1991.
mebooksfree.com
Answers
Chapter 1: Historical Gleanings

1. c
2. b
3. d
4. d
Chapter 2: Cytogenetics
1. a
2. It is derived from “chroma” meaning colour and “soma” mean-
ing body. The chromosomes appear like coloured (stained) rod
shaped structures.
3. A cell that is capable of division undergoes a cyclical change
throughout its life. This is called cell cycle.
4. Most of the cells in the body exist and function in an interphase.
5. The interphase consists of the following:
a. G1 (Gap 1 phase).
b. S (Synthesis phase): DNA is synthesised in this period.
c. G2 (Gap 2 phase): A brief interval before commencement of
mitosis.
6. These are:
a. Formation of metaphase plate with chromosomes arranged
at equatorial plane.
b. Formation of spindle.
7. The centromere divides vertically and the paired chromatids
disjoin to form daughter chromosomes.
8. Addition of colchicine (or its derivatives) inhibits spindle microtu-
bule formation. This permits us to study metaphase chromosomes.
9. Somatic recombination is crossing over between homologous
chromosomes in mitosis.
10. It involves crossing over between the sister chromatids of a
single chromosome in mitosis.
11. In anaphase of meiosis I, without split of the centromere, two
members of bivalent (homologous pair) disjoin.
12. Meiosis II differs from mitosis in two respects—(i) there is no
DNA replication prior to this and (ii) the second meiotic
division follows meiosis I without an interphase.
267
mebooksfree.com
268 Answers
13. a
14. a
15. d
16. c
17. It is the process of union of mature male and female germ cells,
resulting in formation of zygote.
18. c
19. (i ) Metacentric, (ii) submetacentric, (iii ) acrocentric, (iv) telo-
centric.
20. b
21. c
22. Secondary constrictions are evident on C banding in chromo-
somes 1, 9, 16 and long arm of Y chromosome.
23. Routine metaphase preparation shows total of about 200 bands;
in high resolution banding, prometaphase chromosomes are
studied and they exhibit about 800–1400 bands, making minor
structural alterations evident.
24. In this, the somatic cells from two different species are fused
together under favourable conditions and cultured.
25. A recent technique for chromosome analysis involving fluorescent
activated cell sorting.
26. It is fluorescent in situ hybridisation.
27. Karyotyping is useful in (i ) confirming clinical diagnosis,
(ii) gene mapping, (iii ) prognosis of disease, e.g. chronic
myelogenous leukaemia, and (iv) prenatal diagnosis.
28. It is a small chromatin mass in nucleus of female somatic cell.
It represents an inactive X chromosome.
29. The number of Barr bodies in a cell is n – 1 where n stands for
number of X chromosomes, i.e. if the chromosome comple-
ment of a cell is 46, XX — number of Barr bodies is 2 – 1=1; 47,
XXX, 3 2 152; 48, XXXX, 4 – 1=3 Barr bodies.
30. Lyon’s hypothesis states the following:
a. In female somatic cell, only one X chromosome is active. The
second is inactive and condensed to form sex chromatin.
b. The inactivation occurs early in embryonic life.
c. The inactivation is random but fixed.
31. It is achieved through DNA methylation.
32. The inactivation centre is believed to be in proximal part of
long arm of X chromosome.
Chapter 3: Molecular Genetics

1. Operon is a unit that comprises of an “operator gene” and “struc-
tural gene”. The operator gene controls the action of structural
gene and thus governs the amount of protein product produced.
2. It is defined as a change in sequence of genomic DNA.
mebooksfree.com
Answers 269
3. It is also called as single-base substitution. In this, there is a

single base change in DNA sequence. This alters the triplet
code and causes replacement of amino acid.
4. It is true. Females are mosaic in respect to X chromosome. They
possess two cell populations, one cell line with one X chromo-
m p
some (X or X ) active and the other with an alternative
X active.
5. The nucleic acid consists of long chain of molecules called nu-
cleotide. Each nucleotide molecule in turn consists of a nitrog-
enous base, a sugar moiety and phosphorous molecule.
6. b
7. a
8. It is a sequence of three bases that codes for one amino acid.
The genetic information regarding protein synthesis is stored in
DNA molecule in the form of triplet code.
9. They are as follows:
a. hnRNA—heterogeneous RNA
b. mRNA—messenger RNA
c. tRNA—transfer RNA
d. rRNA—ribosomal RNA
10. The primary product of transcription is a heterogeneous
nuclear RNA molecule.
11. It is a process whereby information is transmitted from DNA to
the messenger RNA.
12. It is a process of translating information from mRNA into
protein synthesis.
13. It is a segment of DNA molecule possessing code for amino acid
sequence of a polypeptide chain. It has exons (coding
sequence), introns (non-coding sequence) and flanking
regions serving as “start” and “stop” signal.
14. They are also called “transposons”; these are regions of DNA,
which can jump to and fro within single chromosome or an
adjacent one. The credit of their discovery goes to Barbara
McClintock, an American geneticist.
15. These are DNA sequences that show a striking similarity with
functional genes but are not transcribed. Probable reason being
that their regulatory regions are altered by mutation.
16. The deletion or insertion of a base leads to an alteration in the
reading frame of DNA strand and thus the amino acid sequence.
This is called as frame shift mutation.
17. It is “pulsed field gel electrophoresis”, which is used for DNA/
gene mapping.
18. It is a DNA molecule obtained by combining DNA sequence
from different organisms.
19. Plasmid is a circular chromosomal element in bacteria.
20. d
mebooksfree.com
270 Answers
21. PCR means polymerase chain reaction. It is an in vitro method of

synthesis of nucleic acid, wherein, a specific DNA segment is ampli-
fied rapidly without concomitant replication of the rest of the DNA.
Chapter 4: Chromosomal Aberrations

1. b
2. a
3. A condition in which the number of chromosome is not exact
multiple of “n”, i.e. 23, e.g. 45, X; 47, XX + 21; 47, XXY, etc.
4. Monosomy involving X chromosome is the only monosomy that
is compatible with life.
5. There are two types of translocations. They are: (i ) Robertsonian
translocation or centric fusion and (ii ) reciprocal translocation.
Refer Figure 4.4.
6. Also called “centric fusion”; it involves two acrocentric chro-
mosomes, for example D/G translocation. The short arm of D
group chromosome (13–15) and that of G group (21) fuse and
fused fragment is lost. This is found in 4% of Down syndrome
cases.
7. In this, there is an exchange of chromosome material distal to
breaks and it involves non-homologous chromosomes.
8. This is because reciprocal translocation amounts to balanced
translocation, there is no loss of chromosome material and hence
these individuals have normal phenotype.
9. Individuals with reciprocal translocation, though have normal
phenotype, produce abnormal gametes; eventually, this
results in spontaneous abortion or baby with congenital malfor-
mations.
Figure 4.4 Types of translocations.
mebooksfree.com
Answers 271
Figure 4.6 Formation of isochromosome.
10. The formation of an isochromosome involves an abnormal split

along the centromere leading to separation of arms instead of chro-
matids, for example, i (Xq), i.e. isochromosome X (refer Fig. 4.6).
11. c
12. b
13. b
14. 1–c; 2–d; 3–a; 4–b
15. c
16. Chimaera is an individual having two or more genetically differ-
ent cell populations derived from more than one zygote,
e.g. dispermic chimaera, blood group chimaera.
Chapter 5: Developmental Genetics

1. They were first identified in Drosophila. The homeobox (Hox)
genes determine segment identity in Drosophila. Four homeobox
gene clusters have been identified in humans.
2. They are also called as paired box (Pax) genes. The paired box is a
highly conserved DNA sequence that codes about 130 amino acids.
Chapter 6: Modes of Inheritance

1. Criteria for autosomal dominant trait are as follows:
a. Affected person has an affected parent, exception being mu-
tant gene.
b. Affected person has normal and abnormal offsprings in equal
proportion, i.e. there is 50% chance of dominant trait being
transmitted to offsprings.
c. Both males and females are equally affected.
d. Trait appears in every generation without skipping.
mebooksfree.com
272 Answers
2. In a dominant trait, usually one of the parent is affected; however,

a normal parent can be expected in the following three situations:
a. If the trait occurs because of a mutant gene.
b. Gene, though present in the parent, has low expressivity.
c. Extramarital paternity.
3. b
4. An autosomal recessive trait presents the following features:
a. The trait appears in sibs and not in parents or offsprings.
b. About 25% (1 in 4) of the sibs of the proband are affected.
c. Both males and females have an equal chance of being
affected.
d. Parents of the proband may be consanguineous.
5. An heterozygote for an autosomal recessive trait is called car-
rier. Clinically the carrier appears to be normal. The carrier
state is usually revealed by biochemical laboratory tests.
6. a
7. c
8. CFTR is a protein product of “Cystic Fibrosis Transmembrane
Conductance Regulator gene”. It is involved in chloride trans-
port and mucin secretion through the cell membrane.
9. A group in which there is frequent occurrence of otherwise rare
recessive disorder, e.g. Tay–Sachs disease. Its frequency in gen-
eral population is 1 in 360,000; in Ashkenazi Jews, it is 1 in 3600.
10. Haemophilia is an X-linked recessive disorder. Father passes on
Y chromosome to his son (Y is normal) and hence all sons will
be normal and all daughters of this person shall be carriers.
11. c
12. Located at X p 21, according to linkage analysis it is the largest
gene identified so far, with 2300 kilo bases of genomic DNA.
13. They are deletion sites in DMD gene detected after Southern
blot analysis with cDNA probes. The first is located in the first
20 exons of the gene while the other is in the centre of the gene
between 45 and 53 exons.
14. It is unique in the sense that it is caused by a combination of a
mutant gene with an associated cytogenetic abnormality.
15. When a single gene or gene pair produces multiple phenotypic
effects, it is called pleiotropy, e.g. phenylketonuria. In this,
an enzyme phenylalanine hydroxylase is deficient. It leads
to multiple secondary effects such as mental retardation,
phenylketonuria, hypopigmentation, etc.
16. Trait determined by autosomal transmission but expressed only
in one sex is called sex-limited trait, e.g. precocious puberty
affects males.
17. The trait is said to be sex-influenced, when it expresses in both
sexes but with different frequencies, e.g. baldness, an autosomal
dominant trait affecting males more frequently.
mebooksfree.com
Answers 273
18. They are:

a. Height/stature
b. Intelligence quotient (IQ)
c. Total ridge count (TRC)
d. Cleft lip, cleft palate
19. It is a shorthand method of giving relevant information and also
the mode of transmission of the disorder in the family.
20. 1–b; 2–c; 3–a; 4–d
Chapter 7: Biochemical Genetics

1. Inborn error of metabolism means a genetically determined en-
zyme defect leading to biochemical disorders, e.g. alkaptonuria,
acatalasia, Hurler syndrome, etc.
2. PKU stands for phenylketonuria. Enzyme phenylalanine hydroxylase
is deficient. It presents with blond hair, blue eyes, lack of pigmenta-
tion in brain, e.g. in substantia nigra. There is mental retardation.
3. Haemoglobinopathies are a group of disorders of haemoglobins,
e.g. sickle cell disease, thalassaemias.
4. A branch of genetics that deals with genetically determined
variations that become evident with an altered response to drugs.
5. It explains:
a. Sensitivity of some individuals to a particular drug
b. Defining potency of a drug
c. Antibiotic resistance in some strains of bacteria
d. Resistance of organophosphorus compounds in some insects
6. Vogel used the term pharmacogenetics for the first time about
four decades ago.
7. Majority of drugs are metabolised through the following routes:
a. Conjugation in liver, e.g. morphine, codeine are processed
this way.
b. Acetylation in liver, e.g. isoniazid, sulphonamides follow this
route.
8. Detected in 1946 by Japanese clinician, it is deficiency of an en-
zyme catalase in red blood cells. Blood turns brownish black on
exposure because haemoglobin is oxidised to methaemoglobin.
9. G6PD deficiency (glucose-6-phosphate-dehydrogenase) is inher-
ited as X-linked recessive disorder.
Chapter 8: Genetics of Blood Groups

1. The ABO blood group system was discovered by Landsteiner, in 1900.
2. Red cell antigens are used as genetic markers in population stud-
ies because they satisfy following criteria:
a. They form different phenotypes.
b. They follow a simple pattern of inheritance.
mebooksfree.com
274 Answers
c. Their frequency is different in different populations.

d. They are not influenced by environmental factors or age.
3. The presence or absence of A and B antigens gives rise to fol-
lowing four phenotypes: A, B, AB, and O.
4. The ABO locus is situated on the long arm of chromosome 9.
5. Gene “O” is amorph and has no effect. It is recessive to gene
A and B, while both A and B genes are codominant.
6. Theoretically blood group “O” is universal donor, and group AB
is assumed to be universal recipient.
7. Bombay phenotype or Oh phenotype was identified in Bombay in
1952. In this, red blood cells as well as secretions (e.g. saliva) lack
antigens A, B, and H. The individuals with Oh phenotype are
homozygous for gene “h”, i.e. they have “hh”, genotype. They do
not form H substance, therefore no substrate is available for mak-
ing antigen A and B, although A and B genes are present.
8. It is located on chromosome number 1, exhibiting eight alleles
for five Rh antigens D, C, E, c and e.
9. Rh-null blood group persons have no Rh antigen on their red
blood cells. The Rh antigen forms important and integral part
of the red cell membrane, lack of this antigen causes haemolysis
and eventually haemolytic anaemia.
10. In this, foetal RBCs die due to the action of antibodies formed
by the mother (Rh –ve) against foetal Rh antigen. It begins in
utero but continues after birth for about 3 months, the time
taken by the maternal antibodies to get cleared from newborn
circulation.
Chapter 9: Immunogenetics
1. It deals with the genetic basis of the immunological phenome-
non in an organism/individual.
2. It refers to immunity conferred by the formation of antibodies
produced by B cells (Bursa dependent cells).
3. It is immune response of an individual with the first exposure to
an antigen. It is usually slow and takes relatively longer period.
4. These are serum proteins produced by plasma cells (activated B
cell) in response to antigen. They are also called as antibodies.
5. An immunoglobulin molecule consists of four polypeptide
chains. Two identical light (L) chains and two identical heavy (H)
chains. These are held together by disulphide bonds.
6. This is because V (variable) and C (constant) region of each
chain are coded by different genes.
7. On exposure to an antigen, B cell produces IgM antibody
initially. However, on subsequent exposure to the same antigen it
produces IgA or IgG antibody, still retaining specificity to the
same antigen. This is labelled as class-switching.
mebooksfree.com
Answers 275
8. They are as under:

a. Autograft: Graft of the host’s own tissue
b. Isograft: Graft from genetically identical person, e.g. mono-
zygotic twin
c. Allograft: Graft from genetically non-identical person
d. Xenograft: Graft between different species
9. An autograft and isograft have better acceptability because of
the histocompatibility.
10. The histocompatibility means antigenic similarity between the
donor and the recipient.
11. They are (i ) mixed lymphocyte culture test and (ii ) lymphocyte
cytotoxicity test.
12. Also called human leucocyte antigen (HLA) system, it consists
of four closely linked loci associated with the short arm of the
chromosome 6. These are D (and D-related/DR), B, C and A.
13. An H-Y antigen is located on chromosome 6. It is governed by
regulatory gene on Y chromosome. The H-Y antigen gene is
thus a Y-linked histocompatibility gene.
14. It refers to a group of serum proteins required to inactivate
foreign material after formation of antigen–antibody complex.
15. There are two types of immune responses:
a. Cellular immunity—Conferred by T-cell, these are thymus
dependent cells.
b. Humoral immunity—Conferred by formation of antibodies
produced by B-cells, these are Bursa-dependent cells. Bursa
of Fabricius is an organ in birds responsible for formation of
these cells.
16. It is the substance that evokes immune response.
17. After the first exposure, the subsequent exposure to the same
antigen evokes a rapid and a more pronounced, so-called
secondary response. This is possible through “memory cells”.
18. They are lymphocytes that are primed to act vigorously with
re-exposure to the same antigen.
19. The prime factor responsible for diversity in immunoglobulins
(antibodies) appears to be multiple combinations of heavy and
light chains.
20. 1–b; 2–c; 3–e; 4–a; 5–d.
21. They are kappa (k) light chain and lambda (l) chains.
22. Genes coding for polypeptide chains of immunoglobulins are
associated with the following autosomes.
a. H: Heavy chain on chromosome 14
b. k: Kappa light chain on chromosome 2
c. l: Lambda light chain on chromosome 22
23. Hybridoma can be obtained by fusing two cell components:
a. The mutant mouse myeloma cells (not capable to produce
antibody).
mebooksfree.com
276 Answers
b. Any cells capable of producing antibody, e.g. normal spleen

cells from mice immunised with specific antigen or human lym-
phoblastoid cells. The hybrid cells thus produced can synthesise
a single type of Ig/immunoglobulin, i.e. monoclonal antibody.
24. SCID stands for severe combined immunodeficiency disease.
It is autosomal recessive trait owing to the lack of ADA (adenos-
ine-deaminase).
Chapter 10: Cancer Genetics

1. Normal mammalian cells contain DNA sequences homologues to
viral oncogenes; these are called proto-oncogenes or cellular
oncogenes.
2. The retroviral oncogenes are formed because of errors in the
replication of retroviral genome, following their integration
at random sites in the host DNA. The resultant being viral
oncogene (V-onc).
3. The anti-oncogenes are often called “tumour suppressor genes”.
These are the genes that suppress tumorigenic activity, e.g. Rb
gene (retinoblastoma gene) is recessive tumour suppressor gene.
Absence of the gene product in homozygous state leads to
development of retinoblastoma.
4. PDGF is platelet derived growth factor. It stimulates proliferation
of the connective tissue cells. EGF stands for epidermal growth
factor; it promotes proliferation of epidermal as well as numer-
ous other cells.
5. In cancer, the following chromosomal aberrations are found:
a. Translocations, e.g. CML—Chronic myeloid leukaemia:
Philadelphia chromosome [22q-(ph1)]
b. Deletions, e.g. Retinoblastoma (13q-), Aniridia-Wilms tumour
(11p-)
c. Chromosomal breakage syndromes, e.g. xeroderma pigmentosum
Chapter 11: Genetic Component in Common

Diseases
1. Some individuals are more prone to develop common diseases
like hypertension, diabetes, stroke, etc. This is because they
have inherited predisposition or genetic susceptibility for that
particular disease.
2. It may be caused by single gene defect leading to abnormal gene
product that in turn alters metabolism.
3. The approaches available for determining genetic susceptibility
are (i ) family study, (ii ) twin study, (iii ) population study, (iv)
immigration study, (v ) animal models, etc.
mebooksfree.com
Answers 277
4. LDL receptors are glycoproteins that help the passage of

low-density-lipoprotein (LDL) particle into the cell.
5. LDL-receptor gene is located on chromosome 19.
6. IDDM—It stands for insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus.
7. Body mass index is a parameter to gauge obesity. BMI = W/H 2;
where W is weight in kilograms, and H is height in meters.
A person with BMI more than 30 is said to obese. BMI between
25–30 denotes overweight.
Chapter 12: Population Genetics

1. It deals with study of genes in population.
2. The law states that “gene frequencies in a population remain con-
stant from generation to generation, if no evolutionary factors
such as migration, mutation, selection and drift are operating.
3. Eugenics refers to establishing the best characters in population
by selective breeding.
4. It means writing on the skin. It includes study of ridge patterns
on skin of palms, digits and soles.
5. It is a single transverse crease on palm, found in nearly 50% of
Down syndrome patients.
Chapter 13: Prenatal Diagnosis

1. In the following cases, prenatal diagnosis is must:
a. Maternal age above 35/40 years.
b. If one of the parent is a balanced translocation carrier.
c. If the couple already has a baby with neural tube defect or
chromosomal abnormality.
d. In a pregnancy at high risk for an autosomal or X-linked reces-
sive disorder, which is severe.
2. It is a prenatal diagnostic procedure in which amniotic fluid is
tapped and studied.
3. Amniocentesis is performed between 14 and 16 weeks because
around that time sufficient amount of amniotic fluid is available
for tapping, without harming the conceptus.
4. The procedure carries 1%–1.5% risk of abortion; however, a
repeat amniocentesis increases the risk to about 9%.
5. They are:
a. Increase in neonatal respiratory distress.
b. Increase in postural orthopaedic problems such as talipes
equinovarus, congenital dislocation of hip.
c. Increased risk of rhesus sensitisation and perinatal mortality.
6. a. The chorion villous sampling (CVS) can be done at much
earlier stage (around 8–10 weeks).
mebooksfree.com
278 Answers
b. Faster results because direct chromosome analysis can be done

without culture.
c. If the results indicate abnormality, termination of pregnancy
can be safer and simpler in the first trimester.
7. There are (i ) maternal cell contamination, and (ii) pseudomosa-
icism. It may be due to:
a. An abnormal cell line appearing as an artifact during culture.
b. Maternal cell contamination.
c. Cell line from extra embryonic tissue.
Chapter 14: Genetic Counselling

1. It is defined as a process in which patient/s or their relatives at
risk of a genetic disorder are made aware of the consequences of
the disorder, its transmission and the ways by which this can be
prevented or mitigated.
2. The steps are as under:
a. An accurate diagnosis of the disorder.
b. Advising patient and relatives after screening family mem-
bers/relative with similar complaints for disease confirmation
or otherwise normal relatives for carrier detection.
c. Management of the disease curative or supportive.
Chapter 15: Gene Therapy

1. They are (i ) liposome-mediated DNA transfer and (ii ) receptor-
mediated endocytosis.
2. The first human gene therapy was instituted on 14 September
1990 to a 4-year-old girl suffering from adenosine-deaminase
(ADA) deficiency leading to severe combined immunodeficiency
(SCID).
Chapter 16: Stem Cell Therapy

1. They are totipotent/pluripotent cells having endless self-renewal
potential.
2. The sources are (i) embryonic stem cells (ESCs)—blastocyst;
(ii ) adult stem cells—PBSCs, BMSCs.
3. The stem cell therapy can be useful in stroke, brain injury,
Alzheimer disease, myocardial infarction, diabetes, muscular
dystrophy.
4. The research on embryonic stem cells (ESCs) raises following
issues:
a. When does human life begin?
b. Does use of zygote for research accounts for killing?
mebooksfree.com
Index
A Biochemical genetics (Continued)

Abnormal twinning, 201–202 clinical features, 129
chimaera, 202 Hurler syndrome, 129
conjoined twins, 201 phenylketonuria (PKU), 127
monozygotic twins with different diagnosis, 127
karyotypes, 202 manifestation, 127
ABO blood group system, 140–142 treatment, 128
agglutination reactions, 141t pharmacogenetics, 132–138
Bombay phenotype, 142 fate of drug, 133–138
diseases and ABO system, 141 acetylation, 133
H-substance, 140 acatalasia, 133–134
multiple allelism, 140 conjugation, 133
secretor status and ABH antigens, 142 glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase
Acetaldehyde dehydrogenase, 178–179 deficiency, 134
Adenomatous polyposis coli gene, 227 isoniazid inactivation, 135–138
Alcohol dehydrogenase, 178–179 malignant hyperthermia, 135
Alpha-foetoprotein, 225 polymorphisms, 145–147
Alzheimer disease, 190–193 succinylcholine sensitivity, 135
Amniocentesis, 209–210 thalassaemias, 131–132
perinatal problems, 210 alpha, 131–132
procedure, 209–210 beta, 132
risk to pregnancy, 210 Blood group systems, 144–145
time, 209 Duffy blood group, 145
Analysis of genetic disorder, 101–103 Duffy locus, 145
family history, 101–102 Kell blood group, 145
pedigree, 103 Lutheran blood group, 145
Angelman syndrome, 71 Xg blood group, 145
Aristotle, 1–2 Blood polymorphisms, 140
ABO system, 139, 141
B HLA system, 140, 153–156
Beanbag genetics, 195–196 Rh blood group, 140
Biochemical genetics, 124–138 Body mass index (BMI), 188
haemoglobins and
haemoglobinopathies, 129–132 C
structure of haemoglobin, 129–130 Calculating gene frequency, 196–199
haemoglobin C, 130 mating type, 197t
haemoglobin S: sickle cell Cancer genetics, 161–176
disease, 130–131 Chimaeras, 87–92
Lepore haemoglobin, 131 blood, 88–92
inborn errors of metabolism, 125–129 dispermic, 88
alkaptonuria, 125 experimental production, 89f
genesis of, 127–128 Chorion villous biopsy, 210–212
mucopolysaccharidoses (MSP), merits, 211
128–129 problems, 211–212
Hunter syndrome, 128 sampling, 210–211
279
mebooksfree.com
280 Index
Chromosomal aberrations, 68–92 Diseases amenable to gene therapy,

Chromosomal aberrations in cancer, 235–237
171–176 AIDS, 236–237
chromosomal breakage syndromes, cancer, 235–236
174–176 blocking oncogene, 235–236
ataxia–telangiectasia, 174–175 immunogenicity, 236
Fanconi anaemia, 174 MDR-1, 236
xeroderma pigmentosum, suicide gene, 236
175–176 tumour suppressor gene, 235
deletions, 173–174 use of genes for cytokines, 236
Aniridia–Wilms tumour, 174 coronary artery disease, 236
retinoblastoma, 173–174 peripheral vascular disease, 236
translocations, 172–173 prerequisites of, 235
Burkitt lymphoma, 173 DNA fingerprinting technology, 58–60
CML: Philadelphia chromosome, Alec Jeffreys, 58
172 applications, 60
detailed consideration, 172–173 hypervariable regions of the
future prospects, 173 genome, 58
Chromosomal disorders, 101 probe, 59–60
Cri-du-chat syndrome, 70, 101 single locus, 59–60
monosomy of X, 101 DNA mapping, 48–49
trisomy, 101 DNA sequencing, 60–61
Chromosome, 18–26, 38 autoradiography, 61
code, 38 dideoxy chain termination method,
Ochre and Amber, 39 60–61
solenoid model, 38 DNA structure, 35
triplet code, 39 types, 37
Chromosome morphology, 19 mitochondrial DNA, 37–38
acrocentric, 19 pedigree, 38
metacentric, 14–16 unique sequences, 37
submetacentric, 19 Watson–Crick model, 35
telocentric, 19 Down syndrome, 75–78
Clinical applications of blood groups, 140 clinical features, 76
conditions of, 140 cytogenetics, 77–78
red blood cell antigens, 140 dermatoglyphics, 77
Cloning, 202–204 Langdon Down, 75
Control of gene action in prokaryotes, risks of, 78
“Operon”, 46
control genes, 46 E
inducer genes, 46 Edward syndrome, 78–79
repressor genes, 46 Electrophoresis, 48, 55
Coronary artery disease (CAD), Embryonic disc, 93, 201
180–181, 236 Endonucleases, 50
Cytogenetics, 10–32 Endoplasmic reticulum, 41, 182
Escherichia coli (E. coli), 46
D Ethnic groups, 99
Dermatoglyphics, 204–207 Euchromatin, 10
applications, 206–207 Eugenics, 199
palmar patterns, 205–206 Eukaryotes, 10, 41
plantar patterns, 206 Evolution, 194
Developmental genetics, 93–100 Exon, 40, 43, 44
Diabetes mellitus, 185–187
maturity onset diabetes of young, F
186–187 Factors influencing development, 94
type 1 (IDDM), 185–186 repressing gene expression, 94
type 2 (NIDDM), 186 transcription factors, 94
mebooksfree.com
Index 281
Familial hypercholesterolaemia, Gene transfer techniques (Continued)

181–183 receptor-mediated endocytosis, 231
management, 183 viral vectors (biological), 231–234
Fanconi anaemia, 174, 226 adenovirus, 233
Fertilisation, 18, 94 advantages, 233
achievements, 18 disadvantages, 233
process, 18 herpes virus, 233–234
Foetal blood sampling (FBS), 213 advantages, 233
need, 213 disadvantages, 234
Duchenne muscular dystrophy, retrovirus, 231–233
114–115, 213 helper virus, 232
haemophilia, 213 packaging cell line, 232
immune deficiency disorders, 213 Genes in development, 95–96
sickle cell disease, 213 homeobox (Hox) genes, 95
thalassaemias, 213 paired box (Pax) genes, 95–96
placental aspiration, 213 zinc finger genes, 96
sampling under direct vision, 213 Genetic counselling, 217–228
Foetoscopy, 212–213 Genetic disorders, 101
foetoscope, 212–213 analysis, 101–103
malformations, 212–213 family history, 101–102
uses, 213 pedigree, 103
foetal blood sampling, 213 chromosomal disorders, 101
foetoscopic skin biopsy, 213 multifactorial inheritance, 101,
Frame shift, 47 119–123
single gene disorders, 101,
G 103–106
Gametogenesis, 16–17 Genetic screening, 224–225
oogenesis, 17 Genetics of blood groups, 139–147
spermatogenesis, 16–17 ABO blood group system, 140–142
Gene, 43 agglutination reactions, 140
CAT, 44 Bombay phenotype, 142
TATA, 44 diseases and ABO system, 141
Gene chip, 61 H-substance, 140
Gene delivery, 230 multiple allelism, 140
ex vivo, 230 secretor status and ABH antigens,
in vivo, 230 142
Gene mapping, 48–49 clinical applications, 140
DNA sequence polymorphisms, 48 blood transfusion, 140
chromosome jumping, 48 tissue transplantation, 140
linking, 48 Haemolytic disease of newborn
markers, 48 (HDN), 143–144
chromosome mapping, 48 erythroblastosis foetalis, 143–144
hybridisation, 48 remedial measures, 144
in situ, 48 other blood group systems,
somatic cell, 48 144–145
pulsed field gel electrophoresis, 48 Duffy blood group, 145
YAC contigs, 48 Duffy locus, 145
Gene therapy, 229–238 Kell blood group, 145
Genetic susceptibility, 178–187 Lutheran blood group, 145
Gene transfer techniques, 230–235 Xg blood group, 145
physical transfection method, polymorphism in blood, 145–147
230–231 haptoglobin, 145–147
liposome-mediated DNA transfer, RFLPs, 146
230–231 rhesus blood group system,
advantages, 231 142–144
disadvantages, 231 Gordon syndrome, 187
mebooksfree.com
282 Index
H Inactivation of X chromosome, 28,

Haemoglobins and 98–100
haemoglobinopathies, 129–132 Barr body, 26f
haemoglobin C, 130 Inborn errors of metabolism,
haemoglobin Lepore, 131 125–129
haemoglobin S, 130–131 alkaptonuria, 125, 125–126t,
structure of, 129–130 128f
thalassaemias, 131–132 examples, 125
alpha, 131–132 Garrod, 125
beta, 132 genesis, 127–128
Hardy–Weinberg’s law, 194–195 phenylketonuria, 127
C Stern, 194–195 diagnosis, 127
expected gene, 194–195 manifestation, 127
gene frequencies, 196–199 treatment, 128
genotype frequencies, 194–195
GH Hardy, 194–195 K
Human chromosomes, 18–26 Karyotyping, 19–25
autosomes, 18 chromosome classification, 20
sex chromosome, 18 Denver, 20
Tjio and Levan, 18 chromosome preparation, 20
Human genome project, 60 standard symbols, 21t
Human leucocyte antigen (HLA) Karyotyping applications, 25–26
system, 153–156 clinical diagnosis, 25
disease states, 155t gene mapping, 25
ankylosing spondylitis, 155 prenatal diagnosis, 26
chronic hepatitis, 155t repeated foetal loss, 26
diabetes mellitus, 155t role in cancer, 25
Hodgkin disease, 155t Klinefelter syndrome, 83–84
myasthenia gravis, 155t clinical features, 83–84
Reiter syndrome, 155t cytogenetics, 84
rheumatoid arthritis, 155t Harry Klinefelter, 83
thyrotoxicosis, 155t XYY males, 85
H-Y antigen, 155
complement, 155 L
functions, 156 LDL receptors, 181–182
Huntington disease, 106–107, 227, 235 Liddle syndrome, 187
Hybridoma and monoclonal Long QT syndrome, 184
antibodies, 152
applications, 152 M
Hypertension, 187–189 Maternal serum sample, 214
Meiosis, 14–16
I meiosis I, 14–16
Immunogenetics, 148–160 anaphase I, 16
Immunoglobulins, 149–151 metaphase I, 16
chromosomal association, 151 prophase I, 14–16
H autosomes, 151 diakinesis, 16
K autosomes, 151 diplotene, 14–16
l autosomes, 151 leptotene, 14
class switching, 151 pachytene, 14
diversity, 151 zygotene, 14
human immunoglobulins, 150t telophase I, 16
structure, 149–151 meiosis II, 16
Immune system disorders, 156–160 Mendel and Mendelism, 2–6
Bruton-type, 157–160 Christian Doppler, 2
chronic granulomatous, 156 contrasting characters, 2, 3f
DiGeorge syndrome, 157 Franz Unger, 2
reticular dysgenesis, 156 Johann Mendel, 2
Swiss-type, 156–157 Pisum sativum, 2
mebooksfree.com
Index 283
Mendel’s laws, 4–6 Modes of inheritance (Continued)

independent assortment, 5–6 X-linked inheritance, 112–115
segregation, 4–5 features, 113
unit inheritance, 4 Molecular genetics, 33–67
Microdeletion syndromes, 71 Mongolism, 75–78
Milestones in the development of Multifactorial inheritance, 101,
genetics, 6–9 119–123
Karl Landsteiner, 6 congenital malformations, 120
Mitosis, 12–14 genetic, 119
comments, 13–14 non-genetic, 119
sister chromatid exchange, 13–14 polygenic inheritance, 119
stages of, 12f teratogenic agents, 120
anaphase, 13 Multiple malformation syndromes,
metaphase, 12–13 96–97
prophase, 12 hydatidiform mole, 96–97
telophase, 13 complete, 97
Modes of inheritance, 101–123 partial, 97
analysis of genetic disorders, role of parental chromosome,
101–103 97
family history, 101–102 VATER, 96
pedigree, 103 Mutation, 47–52
chromosomal disorders, 101 effects, 47–48
Mendelian inheritance, see Single chain termination mutations, 47
gene disorders, 103 regulatory sequences, 48
achondroplasia, 107 splice mutations, 47
autosomal dominant, 104–106 mechanisms, 47
pedigree analysis, 104 deletion, 47
unaffected parent in dominant insertion, 47
trait, 104–106 substitution, 47
autosomal recessive, 109–111
features, 109–110
proband, 109 N
cystic fibrosis (CF), 110–111 Normal chromosomes and errors of
clinical presentation, 111 sex development, 85–87
diagnosis, 111 hermaphroditism, 86
incidence, 111 pseudohermaphroditism,
life expectancy, 111 86–87
Duchenne muscular dystrophy female, 86
(DMD), 101–102 male, 86–87
clinical features, 115 true, 86
diagnosis, 115 role of Y chromosome, 87
DMD locus, 115 H–Y antigen, 87
dystrophin, 102 Northern blotting, 58
hot spots, 115 electrophoretic gel, 58
incidence, 115 mRNA transcript, 58
management, 115 radiolabelled probe, 58
fragile X, 116–117
gene: expression and penetrance, O
117 Obesity, 188–189
genetic heterogeneity, 118 Oncogenes, 163–171
genetic isolates, 111–112 classification of, 168–171
haemophilia, 113–114 cytoplasmic oncogenes, 169–170
sex-influenced traits, 119 GTP binding proteins, 170
sex-limited traits, 118 growth factors, 169
Treacher Collin syndrome, growth factor receptors, 170
108–109 nuclear oncogenes, 169
X-linked dominant inheritance, 116 post-receptor tyrosine kinases,
features, 116 170
mebooksfree.com
284 Index
Oncogenes (Continued) Polysomy X, 83

oncogenic function, 164–166 Population genetics, 194–207
qualitative model, 166–167 Preimplantation diagnosis, 214
chromosomal translocations, demerits and limitations, 214
172–173 reproductive option, 214
mutations of coding, 166 Prenatal diagnosis, 208–216
quantitative models, 164–166 Pseudohermaphroditism, 86–87
gene amplification, 166
insertional mutagenesis, R
166–167 Recombinant DNA, 50–52, 214–216
oncogenic retrovirus, 165t Retrovirus, 163
proto-oncogenes, 163–164 provirus, 163
V-onc formation, 164 reverse transcription, 163
Rhesus blood group system, 142–144
P alleles of, 143t
p53 gene, 167 clinical significance, 143
Li-Fraumeni syndrome, 168 Rh-null blood group, 142–143
Patau syndrome, 79 Ribonucleic acid (RNA), 39–41
D trisomy, 79 transcription, 40
malformations of, 79 types, 40–41
trisomy, 78–79 mRNA, 40
Peptic ulcer, 189–190 rRNA, 40
Pharmacogenetics and drug-related tRNA, 40
disorders, 132–138 Romano–Ward syndrome, 184
fate of drug, 133–138
transformation, 133 S
acatalasia, 133–134 Sex chromatin, 26–32
acetylation, 133 Lyon’s hypothesis, 27
conjugation, 133 Mechanism of Inactivation
glucose-6-phosphate of X Chromosome, 28
dehydrogenase deficiency, inactivation centre, 28
134 origin, 29–32
isoniazid inactivation, 135 significance, 30
malignant hyperthermia, 135 procedure, 26–27
succinylcholine sensitivity, 135 Sex chromosome abnormalities, 79–85
Vogel, 133 Klinefelter syndrome, 83–84
Polymerase chain reaction (PCR), clinical features, 83–84
52–56 cytogenetics, 84
advantages of PCR, 56 Turner syndrome, 79
analysis of PCR product, 55–56 clinical features, 80–82
cloning and sequencing, 56 cytogenetics, 79
estimation of size, 66 investigations, 82
hybridisation, 55–56 Sex determination and differentiation,
nested PCR, 55 97–98
restriction enzyme mapping, 56 SRY, 97–98
applications of PCR, 56 TDF, 97
ARMS PCR, 56 Sex development errors, 85–87
primer, 53 Single gene disorders, 103–106
problems of PCR, 56 autosomal dominant, 104–106
procedure, 54–55 achondroplasia, 107
annealing, 55 pedigree analysis, 104
denaturation, 54 Treacher Collin syndrome,
primer extension, 55 108–109
standard reaction, 53–55 unaffected parent, 104–106
Polymorphisms in blood, 41 autosomal recessive, 101
haptoglobin, 145–147 cystic fibrosis, 110–111
mebooksfree.com
Index 285
Single gene disorders (Continued) Structural aberrations (Continued)

clinical presentation, 111 ring chromosome, 74
diagnosis, 111 translocation, 71–73
incidence, 111 reciprocal, 73
life expectancy, 111 spontaneous abortions, 73
features, 109–110 Robertsonian, 71–73
genetic isolates, 111–112 Synthetic cornea, 243
haemophilia, 113f
X-linked dominant, 116 T
X-linked recessive, 113 Tay–Sachs disease, 110, 111, 126, 225
Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Therapeutic cloning, 227
114–115 Transcription and translation, 41–43
clinical features, 115 Trisomy, 8, 75–78
diagnosis, 115 Trisomy, 76t, 78–79
DMD locus and gene, 115 Trisomy, 76t, 78–79
hot spots, 115 Trisomy, 75–78
incidence, 113–114 Tuberous sclerosis, 108
Southern blot technique, 57 Turner syndrome, 79–82
DNA analysis, 57 Twins, 39–41
Edwin Southern, 57
technique of, 57 U
Stem cell, 239–244 Ulnar loops, 205
adult stem cells, 241 Ultrasonography, 212
embryonic stem cells, 240
Stem cell therapy, 239–244 V
bone marrow transplant, 242 Vascular endothelial growth factor
ethical, legal and social issues, 243 (VEGF), 203–204
future, 243–244
peripheral blood stem cell X
transplant, 242 XX male, 87, 98
umbilical cord blood stem cell XYY males, 85
transplant, 242–243
cord blood banking, 242–243 Y
Structural aberrations, 69–75 Y chromosome, 87
deletion, 69 YY sperm, 85
interstitial, 70–71
terminal, 70 Z
insertion, 73 Zona pellucida, 18, 94
inversion, 73 Zygote, 93, 99
isochromosomes, 74 Zygotene, 14
mebooksfree.com
mebooksfree.com

Human Genetics - 5th PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Human Genetics - 5th PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Human Genetics - 5th PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

mebooksfree.

SD Gangane, MBBS, MS (ANATOMY), FAIMS

Human Genetics, 5e, SD Gangane

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

Manager Content Strategy: Dikshita Khanduja

“Speed/pace”, is the crux of scientific progress and especially so in

Human genetics claims a frontline position under the faculty of

With deep sense of gratitude, I wish to acknowledge the help

Preface to the Fifth Edition vii

Preface to the First Edition ix

6 Modes of Inheritance 101

7 Biochemical Genetics 124

Haemoglobin Structure 130

8 Genetics of Blood Groups 139

Immunoglobulin Structure 150

10 Cancer Genetics 161

11 Genetic Component in Common Diseases 177

12 Population Genetics 194

13 Prenatal Diagnosis 208

14 Genetic Counselling 217

15 Gene Therapy 229

Gene Therapy 230

16 Stem Cell Therapy 239

Stem Cell Therapy 240

At the end of this chapter the students should be able to understand:

Mendel and Mendelism

The concept of heredity dates back

He described small protuberances on mammalian ovaries, now

MENDEL AND MENDELISM

Our present knowledge of genetics has its roots in Mendelian princi-

Figure 1.1 Seven contrasting characters in garden peas.

in hybrids were called dominant, e.g. tallness. Among the two

Figure 1.2 Progeny of tall and dwarf plant (homozygous) in F1 followed by

conclusion that F2 generation is constituted by 1:2:1 ratio of plants,

Figure 1.3 Law of segregation.

paired homologous chromosomes forms the basis of the law of

Figure 1.4 Law of independent assortment.

MILESTONES IN THE DEVELOPMENT

chronic myeloid leukaemia. In 1961, Mary F. Lyon proposed the

technology, restriction fragment length polymorphisms (RFLPs),

1. Mendel selected following contrasting characters in garden peas except:

*See page 267 for Answers.

At the end of this chapter the students should be able to understand

Cell cycle, Mitosis, Meiosis, Chromosomes, Sex chromatin, Barr body

Cytogenetics deals mainly with the study of chromosomes and sex

Figure 2.1 An interphase cell showing heterochromatin.

(in metaphase) consists of two

It involves somatic cells. The result of mitosis is two daughter cells

Figure 2.4 Stages of mitosis.

to centromeres of the chromosomes. These microtubules consti-

(Hoechst 33258). Bright and dim fluorescence pattern along chro-

Meiosis I (Reduction Division) (Fig.฀2.5)

Figure 2.5 Chromosomal behaviour in meiosis. Only two pairs of chromo-

each chromosome remain together. Chiasmata mark the sites of

Gametogenesis in human beings shows sexual dimorphism. In

latter consists of (i) germinal element and (ii) supporting ele-

1. Oogonia divide to form primary oocytes in prenatal life. No pri-

It is the process of union of male and female germ cells resulting in

We have earlier seen that the human chromosome complement has